Reference Manual of Dynamic Voltage Stability

Advanced Engineering Support Documentation
Dynamic Stability Reference Manual
Revision 5.7
2016 EasyPower LLC | 7730 SW Mohawk St, Tualatin, OR 97062 | Tel: 503-655-5059 | Fax: 503-655-5542
www.EasyPower.com
Table of Contents
1.0 INTRODUCTION TO EASYPOWER DYNAMICS .........................................................................................1
1.1 CONVENTIONS .....................................................................................................................................................3
1.1.1 Generators ..................................................................................................................................................3
1.1.2 Motors .........................................................................................................................................................4
1.2 THE DS SIMULATION TECHNIQUE .......................................................................................................................4
2.0 USING EASYPOWER DYNAMICS ...................................................................................................................7
2.1 ENTERING DATA ..................................................................................................................................................7
2.1.1 Data via the Library Library Structure ....................................................................................................7
2.1.2 Data via the Library Supplied Naming ....................................................................................................8
2.1.3 Data via the Library Adding to Library ................................................................................................. 11
2.1.4 Data via the Library Importing into Database....................................................................................... 15
2.1.5 Generator Data Dialog ............................................................................................................................. 16
2.1.6 Motor Data Dialog .................................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.7 ATS Data Dialog ....................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.8 LV Breaker Data Dialog ........................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.9 Fused Switch/Contactor Data Dialog ....................................................................................................... 22
2.2 MODIFIED EQUIPMENT BEHAVIOR ..................................................................................................................... 23
2.2.1 Generators ................................................................................................................................................ 23
2.2.2 Motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.3 MCCs and Panels ...................................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.4 Behavior of UPS ...................................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.5 Transformer Tap Behavior ........................................................................................................................ 25
2.2.6 Protective Device Behavior ....................................................................................................................... 25
2.3 PF BALANCED SWITCHING FEATURE ................................................................................................................. 27
2.4 DS FOCUS ENTRY .............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.5 INITIALIZATION DETAILS ................................................................................................................................... 30
2.6 INTEGRATION TECHNIQUE ................................................................................................................................. 32
2.7 TIME STEP ISSUES .............................................................................................................................................. 32
2.7.1 Numerical Instability ................................................................................................................................. 33
2.7.2 Visual Appearance of Numerical Instability ............................................................................................. 33
2.7.3 Numerical Aspects of Induction Motors .................................................................................................... 35
2.8 ONELINE RESPONSE ........................................................................................................................................... 36
2.8.1 Normal Oneline Display ........................................................................................................................... 36
2.8.2 Stepping Oneline Display .......................................................................................................................... 37
2.9 TWO FORMS OF POWER FLOW ........................................................................................................................... 40
2.9.1 Swing Bus Power Flow ............................................................................................................................. 40
2.9.2 VCN Power Flow ...................................................................................................................................... 41
2.10 DYNAMICS OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 41
2.10.1 Control Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 42
2.10.2 Double-Click Screen ............................................................................................................................... 44
2.10.3 Plot Output Screen .................................................................................................................................. 46
2.10.4 Arc Flash Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 47
2.11 PLOT DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 48
2.11.1 General.................................................................................................................................................... 48
2.11.2 DS Plot Window ...................................................................................................................................... 55
2.12 SCRIPTS ........................................................................................................................................................... 64
2.12.1 Commands............................................................................................................................................... 64
2.12.2 Creating a Script ..................................................................................................................................... 66
2.12.3 Renaming a Script ................................................................................................................................... 69
2.12.4 Deleting a Script ..................................................................................................................................... 69
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page i
2.12.5 Copying a Script...................................................................................................................................... 70

2.12.6 Edit a Script ............................................................................................................................................ 70
2.12.7 Running a Script...................................................................................................................................... 72
2.12.8 Stepping Through a Script....................................................................................................................... 73
2.13 SCENARIO MANAGER BEHAVIOR ..................................................................................................................... 74
2.14 PRINTING MODEL DATA SHEETS ..................................................................................................................... 75
2.15 STATUS BAR MESSAGES .................................................................................................................................. 79
2.16 REGISTRY CONTROL VARIABLES ..................................................................................................................... 79
2.16.1 SlewIterationLimit ................................................................................................................................... 80
2.16.2 IndMotVarThreshMag & IndMotVarThreshExp ..................................................................................... 80
3.0 EASYPOWER DS METHODS .......................................................................................................................... 81
3.1 SELECTING MODELS AND MODEL DATA............................................................................................................ 81
3.1.1 Generators ................................................................................................................................................ 81
3.1.2 Excitation Systems ..................................................................................................................................... 84
3.1.3 Governor Systems...................................................................................................................................... 89
3.1.4 Induction Motors ....................................................................................................................................... 89
3.1.5 Synchronous Motors.................................................................................................................................. 89
3.1.6 Typical Inertia Constants .......................................................................................................................... 90
3.2 PERFORMING MOTOR STARTING SIMULATIONS ................................................................................................. 91
3.2.1 Example Data Setup .................................................................................................................................. 91
3.2.2 Starting the Motor ..................................................................................................................................... 98
3.2.3 Defining Plots ......................................................................................................................................... 102
3.3 PERFORMING A BUS FAULT SIMULATION ........................................................................................................ 106
3.3.1 Example System....................................................................................................................................... 106
3.3.2 Perform First Bus Fault .......................................................................................................................... 109
3.3.3 Perform Second Bus Fault ...................................................................................................................... 113
3.3.4 Perform Third Bus Fault ......................................................................................................................... 115
3.3.5 Critical Clearing Review ......................................................................................................................... 117
3.4 STEP TESTING AN EXCITATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 120
3.5 STEP TESTING A GOVERNOR SYSTEM .............................................................................................................. 121
3.6 DETERMINING MACHINE SATURATION ............................................................................................................ 123
3.7 PERFORMING A LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT SIMULATION .................................................................................. 125
3.8 ATS SWITCHING FOR EMERGENCY POWER...................................................................................................... 128
3.8.1 The Backup Generator ............................................................................................................................ 128
3.8.2 Example System and Data ....................................................................................................................... 128
3.8.3 Running the Simulation ........................................................................................................................... 133
3.9 DS QUICK ADVANTAGE METHODS .................................................................................................................. 135
3.9.1 Steady State Run Checks All Device Pickups, Proper CT Selection ....................................................... 135
3.9.2 Symmetrical Fault Simulation Check on Protective Device Selectivity .................................................. 135
3.9.3 Balanced Switching Fault Voltage Depression Check ............................................................................ 136
3.9.4 Balanced Switching Fault Contactor Action Check ................................................................................ 136
3.9.5 Fuse I2T Percentage to Blow to Predict Fuse Fatiguing ......................................................................... 136
3.9.6 Check Relay Travel to Predict Device Racing ........................................................................................ 136
3.9.7 Real-Time Simulated Arc Flash to Symmetrical Currents ...................................................................... 137
3.9.8 Balanced Switching Analysis for Switching of Any Device ..................................................................... 137
3.9.9 Run Power Flow with Motors Showing Correct PQ Loading ................................................................. 137
3.10 CHANGING FROM DROOP TO ISOCHRONOUS MODE ....................................................................................... 138
3.10.1 Diesel Generator Example .................................................................................................................... 138
3.10.2 Gas Turbine Generator Example .......................................................................................................... 141
4.0 MODELS ............................................................................................................................................................ 144
4.1 GENERATOR MODELS ...................................................................................................................................... 146
4.1.1 Round Rotor Synchronous Generator ..................................................................................................... 147
4.1.2 Salient Pole Synchronous Generator ...................................................................................................... 160
4.1.3 PV1G - Photovoltaic Inverter ................................................................................................................. 163
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page ii
4.1.4 WT4G - Wind Turbine with Inverter ....................................................................................................... 165

4.2 EXCITATION SYSTEM MODELS ........................................................................................................................ 167
4.2.1 Basler AVC1 ............................................................................................................................................ 172
4.2.2 IEEE Type 1 Excitation System ............................................................................................................... 174
4.2.3 IEEE Type 2 Excitation System ............................................................................................................... 178
4.2.4 IEEE Type AC1A Excitation System ....................................................................................................... 181
4.2.5 IEEE Type AC2 Excitation System .......................................................................................................... 184
4.2.10 IEEE Type AC6A Excitation System ..................................................................................................... 197
4.2.11 IEEE Type AC7B Excitation System ..................................................................................................... 200
4.2.12 IEEE Type AC8B Excitation System ..................................................................................................... 203
4.2.13 IEEE Type DC1A Excitation System ..................................................................................................... 206
4.2.16 IEEE Type DC4B Excitation System ..................................................................................................... 214
4.2.17 IEEE Type ST1A Excitation System ...................................................................................................... 217
4.2.18 IEEE Type ST2 Excitation System ......................................................................................................... 220
4.2.21 IEEE Type ST4B Excitation System ...................................................................................................... 227
4.2.25 Inverter Q Control - For WT4G and PV1G Models Only ..................................................................... 237
4.2.26 Simple Excitation System ...................................................................................................................... 240
4.2.27 STAMFORD 1 Excitation System .......................................................................................................... 242
4.3 GOVERNOR MODELS ........................................................................................................................................ 244
4.3.1 Caterpillar Diesel 1 Governor System .................................................................................................... 245
4.3.2 Cummins Diesel 1 Governor System ....................................................................................................... 247
4.3.3 Gas Turbine Governor System ................................................................................................................ 249
4.3.4 Gas Turbine 2 Governor System ............................................................................................................. 251
4.3.5 Gas Turbine WD Governor System - Woodward .................................................................................... 256
4.3.6 Hydro Governor System .......................................................................................................................... 259
4.3.7 IEEE Hydro 2 Governor System ............................................................................................................. 261
4.3.8 IEEE Hydro 3 Governor System ............................................................................................................. 263
4.3.9 IEEE Steam 1 Governor System .............................................................................................................. 265
4.3.10 Pratt & Whitney PWFT8 Governor System........................................................................................... 267
4.3.11 Split Shaft Gas Turbine 1 Governor System .......................................................................................... 270
4.3.12 Steam Turbine Governor System ........................................................................................................... 272
4.3.13 WECC Gas Turbine Governor System .................................................................................................. 274
4.3.14 Woodward Diesel Governor System...................................................................................................... 277
4.3.15 Woodward Steam PID1 Governor System ............................................................................................ 279
4.3.16 Cummins Gas Engine 1 Governor System ............................................................................................ 281
4.4 PSS MODELS ................................................................................................................................................... 283
4.4.1 IEEE PSS1A Power System Stabilizer ..................................................................................................... 284
4.4.2 IEEE PSS2B Power System Stabilizer..................................................................................................... 286
4.4.3 IEEE PSS3B Power System Stabilizer ..................................................................................................... 289
4.4.4 IEEE PSS4B Power System Stabilizer ..................................................................................................... 291
4.5 MOTOR MODELS .............................................................................................................................................. 294
4.5.1 Double Cage Flux Induction Motor ........................................................................................................ 294
4.5.2 Synchronous Motor ................................................................................................................................. 308
4.6 MOTOR LOAD MODELS .................................................................................................................................... 311
4.7 PROTECTIVE DEVICE MODELING ..................................................................................................................... 312
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page iii
4.7.1 Fuses ....................................................................................................................................................... 314

4.7.2 Low Voltage Breakers ............................................................................................................................. 315
4.7.3 Relays ...................................................................................................................................................... 316
4.7.4 Under-Frequency Relay .......................................................................................................................... 317
4.7.5 ATS Model ............................................................................................................................................... 320
4.7.6 Contactor Model ..................................................................................................................................... 320
4.7.7 Under-Voltage Relay ............................................................................................................................... 321
4.7.8 Over-Voltage Relay ................................................................................................................................. 323
4.7.9 Inverter Blocking During Fault............................................................................................................... 324
5.0 MESSAGING ..................................................................................................................................................... 325
5.1 EXCITER MAX LIMIT MESSAGES ..................................................................................................................... 326
5.2 EXCITER MIN LIMIT MESSAGES ....................................................................................................................... 327
5.3 EXCITER GATE LIMIT MESSAGES..................................................................................................................... 329
5.4 GOVERNOR MAX LIMIT MESSAGES ................................................................................................................. 329
5.5 GOVERNOR MIN LIMIT MESSAGES .................................................................................................................. 330
5.6 GOVERNOR RUNTIME LOAD LIMIT MESSAGES ................................................................................................ 331
5.7 GOVERNOR INITIALIZATION LOAD LIMIT MESSAGES ...................................................................................... 331
5.8 SLEW RUN MESSAGES ..................................................................................................................................... 331
5.9 SLIP ESTIMATE MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................. 332
5.10 DATA ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................... 333
5.10.1 Generator Error Messages................................................................................................................... 333
5.10.2 Exciter Error Messages ......................................................................................................................... 334
5.10.3 Governor Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... 338
5.10.4 Description & Fix ................................................................................................................................. 340
5.11 MOTOR STARTING RUNTIME MESSAGE ......................................................................................................... 340
5.12 INITIALIZED MESSAGE ................................................................................................................................... 340
5.13 LOAD TRANSITION MESSAGES ....................................................................................................................... 341
5.14 SYNC MOTOR FIELD TRIPPED MESSAGE ........................................................................................................ 341
5.15 SYNC MOTOR FIELD TRIPPED ON REVERSE POWER MESSAGE ....................................................................... 341
5.16 SYNC MOTOR FIELD APPLIED MESSAGE........................................................................................................ 341
5.17 SOLUTION MESSAGES .................................................................................................................................... 341
5.18 REFACTOR MESSAGES ................................................................................................................................... 342
5.19 ENERGIZING GENERATOR IN OFFLINE CONDITION MESSAGE ........................................................................ 342
5.20 INDUCTION MOTOR POWER FLOW MESSAGES ............................................................................................... 343
5.21 PROTECTIVE DEVICE PICKUP MESSAGES ....................................................................................................... 343
5.22 PROTECTIVE DEVICE RESET MESSAGES......................................................................................................... 344
5.23 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TRIP MESSAGES ........................................................................................................... 344
5.24 RELAY TIME DELAY SATISFIED MESSAGE ..................................................................................................... 345
5.25 RELAY TRAVEL BACK MESSAGE ................................................................................................................... 345
5.26 RELAY UNABLE TO TRIP BREAKER MESSAGE ............................................................................................... 345
5.27 RELAY INSTANTANEOUS RESET MESSAGE .................................................................................................... 345
5.28 ATS TRANSFERRED MESSAGES ..................................................................................................................... 346
5.29 CONTACTOR DROPPED OUT MESSAGE .......................................................................................................... 346
5.30 EXCEEDED RESULT STORAGE MESSAGE ........................................................................................................ 346
5.31 NO PF SOURCE MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................ 346
5.32 DSTATES NOT SETTLED MESSAGES............................................................................................................... 347
5.33 DSTATES SETTLED MESSAGES ...................................................................................................................... 347
5.34 FAULTED MESSAGE ....................................................................................................................................... 347
5.35 FAULT REMOVED MESSAGE .......................................................................................................................... 347
5.36 ATS TRANSFERRED MESSAGE ....................................................................................................................... 348
5.37 CONTACTOR DROPPED OUT IN ISOLATED SUB-SYSTEM MESSAGE ................................................................ 348
5.38 RESULTS SAVED MESSAGE ............................................................................................................................ 348
5.39 DEVICE OPENED MESSAGE ............................................................................................................................ 348
5.40 DEVICE CLOSED MESSAGE ............................................................................................................................ 349
5.41 SIMULATION RUN TO MESSAGE .................................................................................................................... 349
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page iv
5.42 SIMULATION RUN FOR MESSAGE .................................................................................................................. 349

5.43 SIMULATION RESET MESSAGE ....................................................................................................................... 349
5.44 RUN SCRIPT MESSAGE ................................................................................................................................... 349
5.45 RUN SCRIPT WARNING MESSAGE .................................................................................................................. 349
5.46 CONTROL SETTING CHANGED MESSAGES...................................................................................................... 350
5.47 MOTOR LOAD MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................. 350
5.48 SIMULATION AUTO-STOP MESSAGE .............................................................................................................. 350
5.49 COMPLEX OPERATIONS ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................................... 350
5.50 NUMERICAL INSTABILITY MESSAGE .............................................................................................................. 351
5.51 STEPPING MESSAGE ....................................................................................................................................... 351
5.52 SIMULATION COMPLETE MESSAGE ................................................................................................................ 351
5.53 DS FOCUS ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................................................ 352
5.54 DS FOCUS ENTRY MODEL ERROR MESSAGE ................................................................................................. 352
5.55 ATTEMPTING OPEN / CLOSE MESSAGE .......................................................................................................... 352
5.56 EXCITER / GOVERNOR STEPPING MESSAGES.................................................................................................. 352
5.57 COMPLETING SCRIPT MESSAGE ..................................................................................................................... 352
5.58 RESET ENCOUNTERED ERRORS MESSAGE...................................................................................................... 353
5.59 ARC FLASH MESSAGES .................................................................................................................................. 353
5.60 COMPLETING SCRIPT MESSAGE ..................................................................................................................... 354
5.61 POWER FLOW SCALING MESSAGE ................................................................................................................. 354
5.62 TIME STEP CHANGE MESSAGE ....................................................................................................................... 354
5.63 BUS / DEVICE / ATS NOT DEFINED MESSAGE ............................................................................................... 354
5.64 GENERATOR AVR UNDEFINED MESSAGES .................................................................................................... 355
5.65 GENERATOR AVR ACTION MESSAGES .......................................................................................................... 355
5.66 MOTOR SOFT START MESSAGES .................................................................................................................... 355
5.67 GENERATOR GOVERNOR SETTING MESSAGES ............................................................................................... 356
5.68 EXCITATION SYSTEM WARNING MESSAGES .................................................................................................. 356
5.69 SOLID STATE DEVICE BLOCKING MESSAGE .................................................................................................. 356
5.70 CONTACTOR MINIMUM VOLTAGE MESSAGE ................................................................................................. 357
5.71 RELAY TRIP SIGNAL SENT MESSAGES ........................................................................................................... 357
5.72 INVERTER TRIP SIGNAL SENT MESSAGES ...................................................................................................... 357
5.73 ZSI MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 357
5.74 BREAKER DELAY SATISFIED MESSAGES ........................................................................................................ 357
5.75 INVERTER LIMIT ON INITIALIZATION MESSAGES ........................................................................................... 358
5.76 EXCITER VL SELECTED FOR LOW VALUE GATE MESSAGE ............................................................................ 358
5.77 PLUGIN DATA TRANSLATION ERROR ............................................................................................................. 359
5.78 PLUGIN INSTANTIATION FAILURE ERROR ...................................................................................................... 359
5.79 INVALID PLUGIN ERROR ................................................................................................................................ 359
5.80 PLUGIN IS MISSING ERROR ............................................................................................................................ 360
5.81 PLUGIN IS NOT INSTALLED ERROR ................................................................................................................ 360
5.82 MOTOR TORQUE VS. SPEED LOAD TABLE SIZE EXCEEDED ............................................................................ 360
5.83 IGNORING SOLID STATE BREAKER/SWITCH ACTION...................................................................................... 361
5.84 MODEL SET PARAMETER NOT DEFINED MESSAGES ...................................................................................... 361
5.85 MODEL SET PARAMETER MESSAGES ............................................................................................................. 362
5.86 NO SUCH PARAMETER MESSAGES ................................................................................................................. 362
5.87 CHANGING PARAMETER MESSAGES .............................................................................................................. 362
5.88 PARAMETER CANNOT BE SET MESSAGES ...................................................................................................... 362
5.89 DROOP AND ISOCH MESSAGES................................................................................................................... 363
5.90 GOVERNOR FAILED STEP TEST MESSAGE ...................................................................................................... 363
Note: Additional excitation system reference material reprinted with permission from IEEE
Standard 421.5 2005, Copyright 2006, by IEEE. The IEEE disclaims any responsibility or
liability resulting from the placement and use in the described manner.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page v
1.0 Introduction to EasyPower Dynamics

Running dynamic simulations requires a new level of knowledge and understanding in power
system simulation techniques from those most users of EasyPower have become accustomed to.
If you are new to performing dynamic stability simulations, please review one of many texts by
noted engineers such as Crary or Kundar that set the stage for use of EasyPowers Dynamic
Stability (DS) Engine.
If you are familiar with stability simulations, then please take our advice, and read this manual to
familiarize yourself with the methods used in EasyPowers DS Engine. Due to the par excellent
graphical interface of EasyPower, you may find running simulations a bit different than methods
used in other industry software. We are certain however, that you will find the interface mature
and well thought out. It was the DS Engine designers goal to make dynamic simulations in
EasyPower as easy to run as possible.
In the DS Engine, we include the following dynamic stability models:
Generator Models
Round Rotor Flux Synchronous

Salient Pole Flux Synchronous
PV1G - Photovoltaic Array with Grid Connected Inverter
WT4G - Wind Turbine Generator with Grid Connected Inverter
Excitations System Models
Basler AVC1
IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type AC1A
IEEE Type AC2
IEEE Type AC2A
IEEE Type AC3A
IEEE Type AC4A
IEEE Type AC5A
IEEE Type AC6A
IEEE Type AC7B
IEEE Type AC8B
IEEE Type DC1A
IEEE Type DC2A
IEEE Type DC3A
IEEE Type DC4B
IEEE Type ST1A
IEEE Type ST2
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 1
IEEE Type ST2A

IEEE Type ST3A
IEEE Type ST4B
IEEE Type ST5B
IEEE Type ST6B
IEEE Type ST7B
IEEE Type AC8B
Inverter Q Control (for WT4G and PV1G models only)
Simple Excitation System
STAMFORD 1
Governor System Models
Caterpillar Diesel 1
Cummins Diesel 1
Cummins Gas Engine 1
Gas Turbine
Gas Turbine 2
Gas Turbine WD (Woodward)
Hydro
IEEE Hydro 2
IEEE Hydro 3
IEEE Steam
PWFT8 (Pratt & Whitney)
Split Shaft Gas Turbine
Steam Turbine
WECC Gas Turbine
Woodward Diesel
Woodward Steam PID 1
Power System Stabilizer Models
IEEE Type PSS1A

IEEE Type PSS2B
IEEE Type PSS3B
IEEE Type PSS4B
Motor Models
Double Cage Flux Induction

EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 2
Protective Device Models
Contactors - Automatic Drop Out Action

ATS - Automatic Transfer Action
All Protective Devices in EasyPower Power Protector Relays, LV Breakers, Fuses
Over-Voltage Relays
Under-Voltage Relays
Under-Frequency Relays
Source Inverter Solid State Blocking for Faults
In later updates, the model library will grow even more. These models however supply a broad
range of application, and should be most complete and with the greatest level of detail possible
within a balanced positive sequence stability simulation. This includes the full detail of flux
change in the machines, modeling of saturation, and full starting detail, including pulsating
current and torque in the synchronous motor model.
1.1 Conventions
Between groups of engineers and technicians within the U.S., there are numerous conventions
used to describe electrical power systems. Groups like the IEEE and their sub-groups the Power
Engineering Society and the Industrial Applications Society, have done their best to create a
common convention to ease communication. Nonetheless, there are points of confusion. The
goal of this section is to include a few notes on conventions used in the DS Engine, and the
documentation. The conventions selected do not necessarily conform to any particular group, but
are based on the designers experience and choice. In most cases, several other industry
engineers were solicited for their view on a given convention.
1.1.1 Generators
In the power system industry, there is (unfortunately) confusion in the use of the term
generator, where it can represent the electrical machine that produces the electrical power,
and in some cases (especially backup generators) the total generation system. The author has
endeavored to write as clearly as possible, so that model components are clearly distinguishable.
Whether exactly correct or not, we have elected to use the term Generation System to represent
the combination of a Generator that generates electricity, the Excitation System that supplies the
Generators field voltage, and the Governor System that supplies prime mover power and speed
control to the Generator. From our Dynamics 101 notes, we have drawn a similar chart in Figure
1 to represent this structure.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 3
Thevenin Voltage
Terminal Voltage
Governor System
Model
P Mech
Governor
Generator Model
Internal Voltage
Prime Mover
Internal Impedance
Ra + jXd
The Network
Field Voltage
Generation
System
Field Current
Speed
Excitation System
Model
Terminal Conditions
AVR
Power System
Stabilizer
Amplifier
Exciter
Terminal Voltage Feedback
Terminal
Conditions
Alternator
Figure 1. Generation System definition.
1.1.2 Motors
For motors, we have a similar issue. Often motor is used to define the motor and the load, and
any field excitation that is needed. Similar to the Generation System definition defined above, we
have elected to define Induction Motor System and Synchronous Motor System as detailed in
Figure 2 and Figure 3 below.
1.2 The DS Simulation Technique

The DS simulation technique is a method that has been in existence for over 30 years. It basically
assumes that:
We are interested in time responses typically no smaller than a half cycle.
We are not interested in simulating the fast transient effect of the network.
We are interested in simulating the time response of machines and control systems.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 4
Thevenin Voltage
Terminal Voltage
T Mech
Induction Motor
Internal Voltage
Internal Impedance
Ra + jXd
Speed
The Network
Motor Load
Induction Motor
System
Terminal Conditions
Figure 2. Induction Motor System definition.
Thevenin Voltage
Terminal Voltage
T Mech
Synchronous Motor
Internal Voltage
Internal Impedance
Ra + jXd
Speed
The Network
Synchronous
Motor
System
Field Voltage
Motor Load
Fixed Field Voltage

Terminal Conditions
Figure 3. Synchronous Motor System definition.
Thus, the network (overhead lines, cables, transformers, etc.) is not simulating any transient
response due to the interchange between inductance, capacitance and resistance. The model is
solved as if the instantaneous solution represents the present fundamental frequency network
response.
To illustrate the DS model and network interaction, we have supplied Figure 4. In this figure,
we see the network (all modeled network items in EasyPower, including cables, transformers,
capacitors, loads, etc.) being the central connective link between all DS machine models. Now
on each time step of the simulation, a network solution is used to solve for the updated network
conditions (bus voltages, line flows, machine terminal conditions, etc.). Likewise, on each time
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 5
step, the DS models (generation and motor systems) update their internal conditions based on the
network conditions, and thus supply an updated Thevenin voltage that is used to again update the
conditions of the network on the next time step. This progressive behavior continues until the
simulation terminates.
And so, the network is the central connective tool to link all of the DS machine models together.
In addition, all system perturbations occur in the network. On each half cycle, protective devices
use the updated network conditions to alter (if needed) the connectivity of the network, by
opening switch devices, dropping out contactors, and performing ATS transfers. Finally, the user
can use scripts to open or close switching devices, force ATS transfers, open or close contactors,
and apply bus faults during the simulation.
Relay
Generation System
Generation System
Fuse
The Network
Motor System
LVB
Motor System
Contactor
Mo
to r
Sy
s te
Motor System
Figure 4. Network and DS Model Connectivity.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 6
2.0 Using EasyPower Dynamics

Using the EasyPower DS Engine will involve several aspects that a user of EasyPower is already
accustomed to. These are:
Entry of data into the database
Entry into an analysis focus
Performing the simulation
Printing out results or copying results into a report
This procedure is the same used in all foci of EasyPower, and thus we have introduced a new
focus, the DS Engine focus. In the following sections we will explain the steps needed to get the
additional data specified for performing DS and get a simulation up and running. We will also
describe the new behavior of equipment now operating in a dynamic (time simulation)
simulation environment. For example, in Power Flow, a motor is a load, and in Short Circuit it is
a source. In DS, a motor behaves as both depending upon variations in terminal voltage of the
machine. The motors response is also plotted in real time, rather than being a set of static values
like amps, kW and kVar.
2.1 Entering Data

All dynamics data entry is performed via convenient spreadsheets that accompany the Library
and the individual equipment dialogs. In the Library, there is a DS category, and in the
equipment dialogs there is a stability tab. To open a Library, click the EasyPower e and then
Open Library, and select the Library you desire to view or edit.
2.1.1 Data via the Library Library Structure

The DS category entry in the Library has the following breakdown:
Category Group Equipment Manufacturer Type
For example, this could be:
DS Generation System Generators (Generic) Std RR
Within the Group and Equipment levels, we have the following available Equipment:
Generation System
Exciters
Generators
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 7
Governors
Stabilizers
Motor Systems
Motors
Running Loads
Starting Loads
Network
ATS
Contactors
Transformers
Utility Sources
Within each Equipment level, we can have many Types arranged by Manufacturer designation.
Given the amount of data supplied by default in the DS portion of the Library, we will not list
every Type and every Manufacturer here, however Figure 5 below gives an indication of how
the Library is organized, and how you might add your own Manufacturer designation and Types.
2.1.2 Data via the Library Supplied Naming

In the Library that accompanies EasyPower DS, you will see a number of Manufacturers and
Types entered for your use. Each of these entries is given a name, as well as located under a
designated Manufacturer. Note that there is no hard-coded-reason why the present naming
convention in the DS portion of the Library was used. The Library has the flexibility to
accommodate many other naming schemes dependent only upon simple text entry for the
Manufacturer or Type. We developed the naming convention as supplied here to have as much
information about a device as possible visible in the Type names, so that when importing Library
data into the equipment dialogs, selection would be easy. If desired (though not recommended),
you may rename all of the Manufacturer and Type designations in your own copy of the Device
Library. And, as shown in the next section, you can add to any existing Equipment or
Manufacturer designation. For clarity, we supply the following definitions so that you have a
better idea of what you are being supplied in the DS Library group.
(Generic)
For each Equipment designation there is a Manufacturer labeled (Generic). In

this designation, you will find listed all available hard coded model types,
each listed with the Std prefix. The data supplied in this Library entry is
truly generic, and we suggest that you review it closely before making use
of it. We supply this (Generic) Manufacturer designation to clearly show what
models the user has available.
(Plugin)
For each Equipment designation there is a Manufacturer labeled (Plugin). In

this designation, you will find listed all available plugin model types. The data
supplied in this Library entry typically supplies variations in tuning (fast,
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 8
medium and slow for exciters and governors mostly) and at least one entry for
each plugin model.
Plugins are listed as a separate category since they are dependent upon the
latest plugin dlls located in the Plugins folder in the EasyPower installation
folder. Four dlls, Generators.dll, Exciters.dll, Governors.dll and Motors.dll are
possible, and can be updated without an EasyPower formal update to gain
the latest models made available by EasyPower engineers.
Figure 5. DS Group in Library open to show structure.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 9
Typical
This set of data for excitation systems and governor systems supplies three
tunings (fast, medium and slow) for each hard coded model available in these
two Equipment designations. We suggest performing an excitation system and
governor system step test if you use this typical data, as the response will
differ depending upon the generator (time constant and inertia) data that you
use.
EPRI Synthetic This set of generator data supplies typical data that was taken from a report
issued by EPRI in 1977.
RR
This means Round Rotor.
SP
This means Salient Pole.
W in Governors This means Woodward.

IM
This means Induction Motor.
Generator Types For the generator Types supplied in the Library, they have been supplied
names with a specific meaning in each part of the name. This is defined to be:
(Model)-(MVA)-(RPM)-(Year)-(Number)
For example, RR-106-3600-1991-1 means:
A Round Rotor generator

Rated 106 MVA
Rated 3600 RPM
Built in 1991
The first one of these we had in our library of data
Droop
For the Woodward Diesel Governor model this designates the typical
governor tuning uses the Droop setting.
Isoch
For the Woodward Diesel Governor model this designates the typical
governor tuning uses the Isochronous setting.
Motor Types
For the motor Types supplied in the Library, they have been supplied names
with a specific meaning in each part of the name. This is defined to be:
(Model)-(HP)-(Sync RPM)-(NEMA Design)-(NEMA Code)
For example, IM-100-1200-B-G means:
An Induction Motor
Rated 100 HP
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 10
Rated 1200 RPM at no load

NEMA Design B
NEMA Code G
2.1.3 Data via the Library Adding to Library

Now that we have seen the layout of the Library, and the EasyPower naming scheme for the DS
group, one logical question is, how is data entered into the Library for my own equipment? We
will show this by example.
Consider a new motor that is to be installed at your facility, and this motor data represents a large
number of motors that will soon replace older motors near the end of their life. Therefore,
including this motor in the Library will allow you to import it into any EasyPower database in
the future.
To properly determine double cage induction motor flux parameters, you will need to perform a
motor parameter derivation. That method is explained thoroughly in two documents entitled,
Induction Motor Modeling Part 1 and Induction Motor Modeling Part 2. Refer to those
papers to learn how to take manufacturers performance data, and generate detailed flux model
parameters. With the derivation complete, the Motor Data Dialog Stability Tab will have a
complete set of data in its Motor spreadsheet. Use the following steps to add this data to the
Library:
Step 1 - If desired, create a new manufacturer
Right click on Motors in the Motor System group, and a context menu will pop up as shown
below. Click on Insert New Manufacturer.
Figure 6. Library Manufacturer insert.
The Library will create a new Manufacturer with a default name.

Enter a name for the manufacturer. For this example, we used My Plant.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 11
Figure 7. Library name Manufacturer.
The Library tree should now look like this:
Figure 8. Library after Manufacturer insert.
Step 2 - Insert New Type

Right click on My Plant, and a context menu will pop up as shown below. Click on Insert
New Type.
Figure 9. Library Type insert.
The Library will create a new Type with a default name.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 12
Figure 10. Library name Type.
Enter a name for the Type. For this example, we used Motor 1.
Figure 11. Library after Type insert.
You have now successfully added a new motor entry in the Library. Now, make sure that Flux
Ind 2 Cage is selected for the model (see Figure 12) since we are adding an induction motor. If
you are ever needing to add a synchronous motor, select Flux Sync instead.
Step 3 - Copy Data from Motor Data Dialog
After a motor parameter derivation, the resultant derived parameters will reside in the Motor
Spreadsheet in the left most spreadsheet in the Stability Tab of the Motor Data Dialog. Select all
of the cells in that spreadsheet, and then press CNTL-C to copy the cell data to the Windows
clipboard. See Figure 13 showing the Motor Data Dialog.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 13
Figure 12. Library Model selection.
Figure 13. Motor Data Dialog selection of motor data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 14
Step 4 - Paste Data into Library

Now, go to the Library you have open, and paste the data into the new motor we just added to the
Library. Right click on the first left most cell, and then click on Paste cell(s) (see Figure 14).
You have now successfully added a new motor to the Library. Close the Library to save your
changes.
Figure 14. Library paste of motor data.
2.1.4 Data via the Library Importing into Database

Data can be easily imported into any equipment dialog Stability Tab from the Library, by
selecting the Manufacturer and Type (see Figure 15 for an example with the Motor Data
Dialog), and then clicking on the Library Import button in the dialog.
Library Import Button
Once this is done, your new data is immediately imported and ready for use. This procedure is
the same for all equipment dialogs that have DS models (generators, LV breakers, two winding
transformers, ATS, fused contactors).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 15
Figure 15. Motor Data Dialog Library import.
2.1.5 Generator Data Dialog

The Generator Data Dialog has two tabs of DS data; the Stability 1 Tab and the Stability 2 Tab
(see Figure 16 and Figure 17). The Stability 1 Tab includes all model selection, data entry, and
status for the:
Generator
Excitation System
Governor System
The Stability 2 Tab at this time only has Power System Stabilizer (PSS) modeling. In a future
release, we visualize adding Minimum and Maximum Excitation Limiters, or some other
automatic control function to the Stability Tab 2.
To define data for each of these components, we suggest first importing typical data from the
Library for the model you select, and then modifying that data accordingly to match parameter
values for your own equipment. In that way, if any parameters are left out in your data, you will
at least have a beginning data set. For example, excitation system saturation is often left out of
typical data sets.
All models that can be specified in the Generator Data Dialog are documented in Section 4.0.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 16
Figure 16. Generator Data Dialog Stability Tab 1.
Figure 17. Generator Data Dialog Stability Tab 2.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 17
Each model system:
Generator
Excitation System
Governor System
PSS
can be enabled or disabled. Depending upon the enabled status, the model systems will behave in
the following manner:
Generator Model
Enabled. If the generator model is enabled and properly specified, then

the machine data specified will transfer with the model specified into the
DS Focus. The model is then initialized and prepared for simulations.
Disabled. If the generator model is disabled, then all generation system
models (Generator, Exciter, Governor, PSS) are ignored and no DS model
is specified in the DS Focus. The generator is thus a fixed voltage source
model in the DS Focus.
Excitation Model
Enabled. If the Excitation System Model is enabled and properly

specified, then the data specified will transfer with the exciter model
specified into the DS Focus. The model is then initialized according to the
generators initial conditions (from resultant field voltage), and prepared
for simulations.
Disabled. If the Excitation System Model is disabled, then no exciter
model is specified in the DS Focus. There is also no automatic field
voltage control (resulting in no terminal voltage control). The generator is
then being simulated with a fixed field voltage.
Governor Model
Enabled. If the Governor System Model is enabled and properly

specified, then the data specified will transfer with the governor model
specified into the DS Focus. The model is then initialized according to the
generators initial conditions (from resultant mechanical power) and
prepared for simulations.
Disabled. If the Governor System Model is disabled, then no governor
model is specified in the DS Focus. There is also no automatic mechanical
power control (resulting in no speed control). The generator is then being
simulated with a fixed mechanical power.
PSS Model
Enabled. If the PSS Model is enabled and properly specified, then the
data specified will transfer with the PSS model specified into the DS
Focus. The model is then initialized according to the generators and
excitation system initial conditions and prepared for simulations.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 18
Disabled. If the PSS Model is disabled, then no PSS model is specified in

the DS Focus, and no PSS damping is included in the simulation.
2.1.6 Motor Data Dialog

The Motor Data Dialog has a tab of DS data; the Stability Tab (see Figure 18). The Stability
Tab includes all model selection, data entry, and status for the:
Motor
Starting Load
Running Load
As noted for the Generator Data Dialog above, to define data for each of these components, we
suggest first importing typical data from the Library for the model you select, and then
modifying that data accordingly to match parameter values for your own equipment. In that way,
if any parameters are left out in your data, you will at least have a beginning data set. For
example, motor saturation is often left out of typical data sets.
All models that can be specified in the Motor Data Dialog are documented in Section 4.0.
Figure 18. Motor Data Dialog Stability Tab.
In the motor system, there is only one enable check box. This model status behaves as follows:
Motor System
Enabled. If the motor system is enabled and properly specified, then the
data specified will transfer with the models specified into the DS Focus.
The models are then initialized and prepared for simulations.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 19
Disabled. If the motor system model is disabled, then all motor system
models (Motor, Starting Load, Running Load) are ignored and no DS
models are specified in the DS Focus. The motor is thus a fixed load
model in the DS Focus, having no ability to supply any short circuit
current contribution.
By default, when a motor is initially specified, the Starting and Running Load are set to a Speed
Squared model. This selection eliminates the need for specifying any additional data in the
Motor Data Dialog. For details on specifying data for induction motors, refer to documentation:
Induction Motor Modeling - Part 1

Induction Motor Modeling Part4
These papers discuss a wealth of information that will guide you in the use of manufacturers
performance data, performing flux parameter derivation, validating manufacturers performance
data, and discussing details on grouped and single motor behavior.
For details on specifying data for synchronous motors, refer to documentation:
Synchronous Motor Modeling
2.1.7 ATS Data Dialog

The ATS Data Dialog has a tab of DS data; the Stability Tab (see Figure 19). The Stability Tab
includes all model selection, data entry, and status for the automatic transfer of an ATS in the DS
Focus.
To define data for the ATS, we suggest first importing typical data from the Library for the
model you select, and then modifying that data accordingly to match parameter values for your
own equipment.
The ATS DS model is documented in detail in Section 4.0.
In the ATS Data Dialog, there is only one enable check box. This model status behaves as
follows:
ATS DS Model
Enabled. If the ATS model is enabled and properly specified, then the
data specified will transfer with the model into the DS Focus. The model
is then initialized and prepared for simulations.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 20
Disabled. If the ATS model is disabled, then no automatic ATS action is

simulated in the DS Focus. The ATS can, however, still be manually
switched from the oneline, and switched in a DS Script.
Figure 19. ATS Data Dialog Stability Tab.
2.1.8 LV Breaker Data Dialog

Low Voltage Breakers have the ability to also function as a Contactor, and thus include a DS
model of a contactor in their Stability Tab. The Std Contact model in the Library has typical
settings. Replace these to match dropout behavior of your installed contactors.
The Enable Contactor Model checkbox allows you to include or exclude action of an
individual contactor. This model status behaves as follows:
Contactor Model
Enabled. If the Contactor model is enabled and properly specified, then

the data specified will transfer with the model into the DS Focus. The
model is then initialized and prepared for simulations.
Disabled. If the Contactor model is disabled, then no automatic contactor
action is simulated in the DS Focus. The contactor can however still be
manually switched from the oneline, and switched in a DS Script.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 21
Figure 20. LV Breaker Data Dialog Stability Tab.
2.1.9 Fused Switch/Contactor Data Dialog

Fused Switches have the ability to also function as a Fused Contactor, and thus include a DS
model of a contactor in their Stability Tab. The Std Contact model in the Library has typical
settings. Replace these to match dropout behavior of your installed contactors.
The Enable Contactor Model checkbox allows you to include or exclude action of an
individual contactor. This model status behaves as follows:
Contactor Model
Enabled. If the Contactor model is enabled and properly specified, then

the data specified will transfer with the model into the DS Focus. The
model is then initialized and prepared for simulations.
Disabled. If the Contactor model is disabled, then no automatic contactor
action is simulated in the DS Focus. The contactor can however still be
manually switched from the oneline, and switched in a DS Script.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 22
Figure 21. Fused Switch Data Dialog Stability Tab.
2.2 Modified Equipment Behavior

In DS, the power flow solution is the initial system condition criteria used for initializing all
DS models. Due to the nature of stability, and the models equations, we find that a few
adjustments are needed in the power flow solution technique to get an appropriate initial
condition power flow.
As noted in the next section, entry into the DS Focus includes solving the system power flow to
establish our initial conditions. Thus after entry into the DS Focus, the user is presented with the
solved power flow on the oneline of the system. The user may notice a solution that is not
exactly equal to the solution in the Power Flow Focus. This is caused by a few subtle changes
that are necessary to prepare the power flow initial conditions to line up with the needs of DS
simulation methods and DS models.
2.2.1 Generators
Generators are converted to internal Thevenin sources behind equivalent impedances, to
represent the internal behavior of the machine and its interaction with the network. Thus, swing
sources and power flow voltage control no longer exist. All automatic control is supplied by the
generators excitation system and governor system, if they are included.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 23
2.2.2 Motors
Due to the need for motors to be represented as active sources in DS, motors have a modified
behavior in the power flow solution within the DS Focus.
First, since the regular power flow does not contain the ability to model motors as Thevenin
sources during balanced switching, motors are converted to a PQ generator internally. This
means that the motor load is treated as a constant MVA load (instead of constant current or
impedance as specified in the motor data dialog) during the DS Swing Bus Power Flow. This
slight change could then cause a system to take a few more iterations to solve, and could present
slightly lower voltages than those seen when solving the system in the Power Flow focus.
NOTE: If the user notices that DS entry is not allowed due to lack of a power
flow solution, there are induction motors being modeled and the system solves
just fine in the Power Flow focus, try increasing the number of iterations in the
Power Flow Options dialog. This can be accessed in the PF focus, under Tools.
Then, try re-entering DS Focus.
In addition, induction motors have an issue in matching var requirements determined by the
machine equations with vars specified in the database. To properly initialize the motor, we have
elected to ignore vars specified in the database, and match vars determined by machine
equations. This then causes the need to repeat several power flow solutions (iteratively), as the
machine equations are initialized to supply updated var requirements. Upon completion, the
initial power flow solution will create a match between power flow voltage and var conditions,
so that induction motor machine equation var requirements match the power flow.
Finally, there are differences in how single and grouped motors are treated. Refer to Induction
Motor Modeling Part 4, for an in depth discussion of this behavior.
2.2.3 MCCs and Panels

In the DS Engine, MCCs and Panels have no ability to model dynamic motor response. Their
motors specified will be treated as passive loads in the DS Engine. If motor starting is desired for
a motor in an MCC, we recommend adding a single motor on a bus connected off of the MCC.
Note also, that since the motors of MCCs and Panels are represented as passive, there is no short
circuit contribution from them during a fault in DS.
In a future revision, detailed modeling of MCC and Panel motors will be considered.
2.2.4 Behavior of UPS

In the Power Flow focus, a UPS is modeled as a load on its primary, and a swing generator on its
output. This falls in line with a UPS holding voltage and supplying power as needed, as long as it
is operating within its rating.
In the Short Circuit focus, a UPS has a fault contribution like a generator on its output according
to entered data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 24
In the DS Focus, a UPS is modeled as a fixed Thevenin voltage source on its output, and a load
on its input. During a simulation, changes in the output loading are not reflected on the primary,
and no voltage control occurs. We thus recommend not simulating switching actions on the
secondary of a UPS, as they will provide no automatic voltage and power response, and the
changes will not reflect onto the high side of the UPS.
In a future revision, full UPS automatic control will be considered.
2.2.5 Transformer Tap Behavior

Since transformer tap changing is typically timed in an actual system with a 20 to 60 second
delay, transformer tap changing is disabled during a dynamic simulation.
2.2.6 Protective Device Behavior

All Protective devices modeled in Power Protector are simulated in the DS Engine if appropriate
data is supplied and the Power Protector feature is enabled (has been purchased). For users
without Power Protector, no protective devices are transferred into the DS Focus.
Modeling of protective devices includes:
Fuses
LV Breakers
Relays
Under-Frequency Relay Action
Contactor Drop Out Action
ATS Auto-Transfer Action
Over-Voltage Relay Action
Under-Voltage Relay Action
Source Inverter Solid State Blocking Action for Faults
In all cases, for devices that include a minimum and maximum curve for device operation (for
example, an uncertainty band or fuse min melt and max clear curve) the more severe max clear
curve is used to determine when a device will be tripped. This will thus keep a fault condition on
longer, and corresponds to a consistent tripping action that matches the EasyPower Arc Flash
tool. More specifically, we note the following for each protective device:
Fuses
Fuses are simulated using an accumulated I2T action. When current through a fuse
causes the trip time to drop below 1000 seconds, I2T energy begins to accumulate.
The I2T trip value is updated on each time step corresponding to the present
current flowing through the fuse. When the accumulated I2T meets or exceeds the
I2T trip value, the fuse is tripped (actually the EasyPower switch on the oneline is
opened to simulate this).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 25
Note that the energy accumulated in the fuse is not reset during a given
simulation. This memory action is performed since a typical dynamic simulation
runs for 10 to 50 seconds, and we believe this is not long enough to allow any
significant dissipation of heat from the fuse. From this memory action, multiple
faults through a fuse can contribute to a faster fuse blowing action, which in
reality would exist in the field.
LV Breakers Low Voltage Breakers are simulated using a time accumulation method.
When current through a LV Breaker causes the trip time to drop below 1000
seconds, then a timer is used (accumulating time) to trip the device as long as the
current remains above the devices pickup setting. When the accumulated time
exceeds the trip time at the current point on the devices TCC (specified and
updated by the present current flowing through the device), the device will trip.
The device instantaneously resets if the current drops below the pickup setting.
Relays
Relays are simulated using time accumulation as a simulated induction disc turns.
This assumes that digital relays are performing a similar action. Thus the device is
simulating travel time and tripping in accordance to the time dial setting.
When current through a Relay causes the trip time to drop below 1000 seconds,
the disc simulator starts timing. When the time passing by meets or exceeds the
trip time from the relays TCC based on present current through the device, the
device will trip.
If the current drops below the pickup setting before tripping, the device will
simulate travel-back of the induction disc (again assuming digital devices will do
the same). This travel-back assumes that the full travel-back of any relay is 60
seconds when on the maximum time dial, with this effect ratioed accordingly to
other time dial settings. From this travel-back action, we are simulating memory,
and thus are including the capability of a relay to trip faster on a second fault
application.
UF Relays
Under-Frequency Relays use a single under-frequency setting and timer. When

the bus frequency drops below the setting, and has stayed below for the time
specified, the device will trip its specified breaker. The relay performs an
instantaneous reset if the frequency goes above its setting.
Under-Frequency Relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current
Transformer (CT). In a future revision, we anticipate adding Potential
Transformers (PT) to the equipment pallet.
Contactors
Contactors operate like the Under-Frequency Relay, and trip after voltage has
dropped below its setting for the time specified. The device resets
instantaneously.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 26
ATS
ATS only perform automatic operation from left (Normal) to right (Emergency)
as seen on the oneline. Their behavior is as follows:
Assuming we are originating on the Normal side, if the source is lost (voltage
drops below the Trip Voltage setting for a time longer than the Delay on Start
setting), the ATS is prepared for transfer. If the voltage on the Emergency side is
above the ATS Required Voltage setting, then the transfer will continue. If not,
the ATS remains on the Normal side.
The ATS model does not presently simulate the Neutral position in its transfer.
Therefore, if transferring, it stays on the Normal Source side until the Neutral
Delay time and Mechanical Delay time are satisfied. To simulate the Neutral
position, an additional bus would need to be simulated in the network, and that
has not been implemented in the present version.
The ATS will not auto-transfer-back if the Emergency Source is lost. The action
presently modeled is a one-way transfer.
OV Relays
Over-Voltage Relays use a single over-voltage setting and timer. When the bus
voltage goes above the setting, and has stayed above for the time specified, the
device will trip its specified breaker. The relay performs an instantaneous reset if
the voltage goes below its setting.
Over-Voltage Relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current
UV Relays
Under-Voltage Relays use a single under-voltage setting and timer. When the bus
voltage goes below the setting, and has stayed below for the time specified, the
the voltage goes above its setting.
Under-Voltage Relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current
Inv Block
Inverters (when no DS data is specified) include a blocking action when the fault
current (specified in the inverter data dialog), has stayed above 102% FLA for the
time specified. Upon blocking, the inverter current injection is removed from the
network model and the inverter does not interact with the grid.
2.3 PF Balanced Switching Feature

A natural consequence of creating a DS Engine that is robust and which can handle a variety of
customer systems is balanced switching. To keep the DS Engine robust, we had to include the
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 27
ability of performing simulations with a minimal set of DS model data, or for that matter, no DS
model data. In the case where you have an EasyPower database with no DS models enabled, you
can perform balanced switching.
Balanced switching allows you to determine network conditions immediately after a network
change has occurred. Since there are no DS models active, the resulting plot will take on a
squarish nature (see Figure 22), where the conditions before the change represent the time T
zero minus (To-) and the conditions after the change represent time T zero plus (To+). Such
simulations are very useful if one desires to know network conditions immediately after a line
opening (for example). Since all sources are modeled as Thevenin voltage sources, and all other
motors and loads are passive, the difference seen will be one that reflects the sudden change, but
will not represent the real-time response of the system.
When first learning to use DS, we suggest doing a few balanced switching simulations to get
familiar with the DS Focus, before specifying DS model data.
800.00
M-1 [kW]
M-1 [kVar]
-400.00
0.00
1200.00
M-1 [I Amps]
-800.00
800.00
BUS-4 [V PU]
BUS-4 [V PU]
M-1 [I Amps]
M-1 [kW]
M-1 [kVar]
0.8800
0.9600
EasyPower DS
0.0
0.6
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
Time (Seconds)
Figure 22. Balanced switching plot result.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 28
2.4 DS Focus Entry

Upon entry into the DS Focus, your model is checked and set up to run a simulation. The
simulation relies upon a tight link between the DS Engine and the Power Flow Engine, as all
flows and voltages are dependent upon the network. Without a well-developed power flow case,
DS Simulation is impossible or of no value. Make sure that your power flow case solves well,
and accurately represents your network. Once clicked, moving into the DS Focus will:
Not allow entry into the DS Focus if any dynamics data fields are partially completed, i.e.
started but not complete. However DS Focus entry is allowed when there are sparse DS
models or even no DS models, as the system will resort to passive load models for nonDS motors, and Thevenin sources for non-DS generators. In this way a user can spec only
a single DS-motor, and run a fully detailed motor start case using short circuit impedance
info for the source. Such is actually an accurate simulation for a system with no nearby
(local) generation.
Solve the Power Flow case using a swing-bus power flow. If the case does not solve, the
user will be alerted, and returned to the Database Focus.
Initialize induction motors alone if there are any. The system is then repeatedly
(iteratively) solved as a swing-bus power flow and induction motor initialization updates
motor terminal conditions in the power flow. This typically takes between 1 and 4 power
flow solutions, and is reported in the message log.
Initialize all other defined models. Models use the conditions specified by the power flow
to perform their initialization. If any models fail initialization, the user is returned to the
Database Focus. Failure is typically due to power flow conditions that are unrealistic or
through which the model is incapable of initializing. For example, such a condition might
be having a load in the power flow on a motor specified at 180%. When the motor
dynamics are initialized, the motor will most likely initialize into a stall condition on the
wrong side of the torque speed curve. The motor is thus not able to supply the load, and
will be operating at a ridiculously high slip.
If a motor is connected on a bus with zero voltage, or is disconnected from the system by
its breaker, then the motor model will be initialized such that it is ready to start.
Otherwise, the motor is initialized online.
Note that all static loads (and non-DS motors) are converted into constant impedance
loads. This is the present load model used in the program. Future revisions may allow
constant power and constant current load models, with eventual reduction methods when
voltages drop below a pre-defined threshold. However, at this time, all static loads are
converted to constant impedance.
The reason for the conversion to constant impedance is due to the fact that the network
solution is a direct solution, and is non-iterative. This supplies a great degree of
robustness. The network solution under this condition will always solve. If loads however
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 29
are modeled as constant current or power, the solution would have to iterate. This would
then open up the possibility of divergence or minimal convergence under severe voltage
depressions. It is known that utility systems necessitate this modeling flexibility, since
often entire complex sub-systems are modeled with a simple static load. Thus the three
model types supply a total power equation with a constant (constant Z), linear (constant
I), and squared (constant power) capability. This affords the user load models that can be
developed to closely represent the sub-system with just a static load.
In industrial systems however, such static load modeling should have less need, as motors
will be modeled as actual machines. Thus, constant Z load models (representing resistive
heating, and incandescent lighting, etc.) are an accurate method when employed.
Evaluate all model DStates. If any exceed a specified threshold (defined in the DS
Options Dialog), then the user is alerted to review the DS Message Log to fix any
problems. The user is allowed into the DS Focus, but we highly recommend that the
DState violations be dealt with. Refer to Message Log Messages for help in
determining appropriate actions to resolve any DState issues. Also, additional
information is included in the Models section (Section 4) for each dynamics model
available in EasyPower.
If all is well, the DS Focus is entered, and the user is able now to perform DS analysis.
2.5 Initialization Details

When the case you are simulating goes through initialization, the power flow conditions
specified at the terminal of machine models are used to initialize the machine models.
Initialization of a machine model is thus performed assuming all differential states (DStates) are
equal to zero. This should be so at steady state, as we are considering no movement in the model
and thus, no changes (DStates are changes) are taking place. This allows us to work backwards
through the machine equations and initialize all States.
Next, for generators, their excitation systems and governor systems are initialized, given the
machine has been initialized. This is our natural progression back through the model control
flow. Excitation systems use generator field voltage and current to specify initial conditions, and
governor systems use the machines mechanical power or torque. For generators at steady-state,
we assume speed is at rated condition, and so mechanical power and torque are equal in the per
unit data system. For induction machines, we take the machines mechanical power, and
initialize the load model that specifies the Torque vs. Speed characteristic for the motor load.
The process of moving back through the models appears fairly straight forward, and actually is
so, with exception of a few models and load specification conditions that upset this simplicity.
The first upset is saturation. Since saturation is a non-linear effect, we find that specifying the
correct internal machine conditions necessitates an iterative approach, as the machine equations
would generate a very complex algebraic solution. In fact the algebra does not lend itself to a
direct solution, as squared and cubed terms appear and make the direct solution impractical.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 30
Similar to power flow solutions, we then iterate within the model to find machine model States
that create the same terminal conditions as specified in the power flow. This iterative approach is
termed a Slew Run, as we are actually running a simplified and fast dynamic simulation in the
model while updating particular States based on the error of the desired terminal conditions vs.
what the model is calculating. Slewing is performed on round rotor generator and induction
motor models, as each allows simulation of machine saturation.
The second upset that causes a need for slewing is the fact that the induction motor model does
not have a direct solution for initializing its States due to the interaction between the real and
imaginary axes of the model. To explain this we would need to delve into the machine model and
explain what the real and imaginary axes do. Suffice it to say, the modeling method is similar to
the d and q axis modeling technique used in generator modeling, and we will stop there.
However, we note that the induction motor model has complete cross coupled interaction
between its real and imaginary components, even without saturation. For the round rotor
generator model, however, the d and q axes can be initialized separately and will only interact
when saturation is included.
The third upset involves the inability of an induction motor model to match conditions specified
in the power flow case. Power factor conditions for an induction motor in a power flow case are
estimated. But in reality, the machine determines its reactive power based upon magnetizing
impedance, internal machine impedances in the rotor and stator, machine slip, loading and
saturation. We can only make the model match terminal real power (via slip), and must allow the
machine model to tell us what the actual vars of the motor are, given the machine data used. This
means that the resultant vars will most likely differ from those in the power flow case, and that
we cannot match the power flow case vars for each induction motor.
There are several ways to handle this issue. One method utilized in a well-known stability
package adds a reactive or capacitive shunt to the motor bus (in the network model) which is
equal to the difference between the power flow case and what the motor model requires. This has
been used for many years, and thus appears to be an acceptable technique. With EasyPower,
however, we have decided to forgo this method since it actually adds a new component to the
system that really does not exist and thus compromises model accuracy. For example, if the
motor model vars are greater than those in the power flow, we would have to add a capacitor to
the bus where the motor is connected in order to compensate. We are convinced that this is
simply unrealistic, given the customers we serve. The other software package noted above is
used mostly by large interconnected utility systems. In such a case the system response is mostly
determined by generators, excitation systems, and governors. Induction motor models have less
impact on simulations by most users. However, EasyPower customers are predominantly
industrial, and may have hundreds or even thousands of induction motors modeled in their case.
Thus, the accumulation of this additional reactive fudge factor becomes a significant change to
the real model.
Because of these ramifications to the overall system model, we have elected to iterate the swingbus power flow, while the induction motor model re-initializes and updates its power flow
terminal conditions. In reality, if the motor is modeled correctly by the machine model, then the
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 31
vars will be different, and the system power factor will change based on the real motor vars. This
then requires us to update the power flow solution accordingly.
Table 1. Summary of Slew Actions in EZP.
Model
Slew in Init
Slew for Sat
Slew for No Sat
Sys PF Iter
Round Rotor Gen
Yes
Yes
No
No
Salient Pole Gen
No
No
No
No
Induction Motor
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Synchronous Motor
No
No
No
No
2.6 Integration Technique

The integration technique used in the DS Engine is simple yet elegant, and has been found to
yield excellent results for many systems. The method used is a Modified Euler technique, and
has the main advantage of increasing simulation accuracy as well as being a very fast method.
Other more complicated integration methods may take double to triple the math operations per
integration. When this is multiplied by the number of times that the integration algorithm is
called during a simulation (i.e. on every time step and as needed in each model), the performance
repercussions are clear.
The Modified Euler technique uses an averaging technique with memory. This then means that
one additional variable is needed in addition to the State and DState. This is called the Store
value, and is involved in the integration equations for each time step as noted in the following
equations.
StoreNew StoreLast Time DState t
StateNew StoreNew
DState t
2
2.7 Time Step Issues

The time step used in a dynamic simulation is the lowest level fundamental value that moves a
simulation through time. With it, you are defining:
The T or dt for numerical integration
The step size resolution of the simulation
Plot level detail
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 32
2.7.1 Numerical Instability

Due to the use of numerical integration to perform our simulation, the time step affects numerical
stability of our simulation. This issue, which can rear its ugly head during a critical simulation,
must be understood so that corrective actions can be taken by the user.
So, how does numerical instability occur? It occurs when the time step is large to the point where
control block feedback (for example, as seen in a single time constant block) is unstable. In
simple terms, this happens when the time step is greater than a control blocks time constant.
However, very complex systems may have effective time constants (formed by loops within
the model) which cause the actual time constant during a simulation to be even smaller than the
smallest observed time constant in any model. A good practice, then, is to never simulate with a
time step greater than half the value of the smallest observable time constant.
2.7.2 Visual Appearance of Numerical Instability

To see numerical instability and its effect on output, let us review the single time constant model
discussed in the Dynamics 101 material. That block is shown in Figure 23, with its exploded
view (to see the integration block) in Figure 24. The result of a step on the input to this system
is shown in Figure 25. The simulation to generate Figure 25 was performed with a 0.1 second
time step, and since the time constant T is equal to 1.0 second, this is a safe and accurate time
step.
K
1 sT
Vi
Vo
Input
Output
Figure 23. Single time constant block.
Vi
K
+
1
T
DState
1
s
Vo
State
Figure 24. Single time constant block showing integrator.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 33
1.20
2.00
1.80
1.60
1.40
0.80
1.20
0.60
1.00
Input
DState & Output
1.00
0.80
0.40
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.00
0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
0.00
10.0
Time (Seconds)
Dstate
Output
Input
Figure 25. Results of step simulation on single time constant block t = 0.1 Sec.
However, if we were to increase the time step to say 0.8 seconds, we would see some numerical
artifacts begin to appear. In Figure 26, we have such a simulation. Our time step is now so large,
that we miss seeing the exponential curve of the dynamic response, and the jagged overshoot is
definitely not part of the real result.
Similarly, if we were to increase the time step to 1.8 seconds, we now see a definite problem
with the simulation. Figure 27 shows the response with a 1.8 second time step. The jagged backand-forth response of the system is a clear indication of the numerical feedback loop of the single
time constant model becoming unstable. The system even needs time to settle numerically.
Here we have results that show a clear signature of numerical instability. If this is noticed in
plot outputs, then a model in the system may have too small a time constant for the time step
being used in the simulation.
In more complicated systems, such as we have when simulating induction motors and generators,
there are conditions where numerical instability occurs so severely, that jagged curves do not
even result. In such cases, the model States move quickly to unstable and non-realistic values
with high exponents. In such cases, the DS Engine has checks to shut down a simulation with
such behavior before math errors are created that may cause severe repercussions, like an
application crash to the operating system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 34
1.40
2.00
1.20
1.80
1.60
1.40
0.80
1.20
0.60
1.00
0.40
Input
DState & Output
1.00
0.80
0.20
0.60
0.00
0.40
-0.20
0.20
-0.40
0.0
10.0
20.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
0.00
70.0
Time (Seconds)
Dstate
Output
Input
2.00
2.00
1.80
1.60
1.40
1.00
1.20
0.50
1.00
Input
DState & Output
1.50
0.80
0.00
0.60
0.40
-0.50
0.20
-1.00
0.0
10.0
20.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
0.00
70.0
Time (Seconds)
Dstate
Output
Input
2.7.3 Numerical Aspects of Induction Motors

One of the places where numerical instability can appear first is the application of starting
motors. Due to the small time constants in the rotor, and the effective time constants that are very
small during starting, motors (both induction and synchronous) need small time steps during a
starting simulation. For this reason, and since a majority of EasyPower users will be using
dynamics to perform detailed motor starting simulations and responses, we have specified the
default time step to one twentieth of a cycle. For 60 Hz systems, that would be 0.0008333
seconds.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 35
From this selection of a default time step, it is clear that there will be a significant performance
hit on running any dynamic simulation. However, this is necessary due to the modeling detail
used in the induction and synchronous motor models in the DS Engine. Both are full detail flux
models, and can be used for running and starting motor simulations.
If simulations being performed do not include motors or do not include motors in a starting
condition, then one can increase the time step to shorten simulation computer run time. A typical
time step used in systems with mostly generators is half a cycle.
2.8 Oneline Response

As has been discussed earlier, the network as simulated in the Power Flow engine is the critical
link between machine models. Because of this (and because of our users familiarity with the
oneline display in the Power Flow Focus), in the DS Focus, the oneline and the resulting power
flow solution have again been brought forth as central for simulation interaction and
visualization. You will see this first-hand as you enter the DS Focus, where the oneline is
presented with the results of the pre-simulation power flow solution. This solution is unique and
has subtle differences from the Power Flow Focus solution (documented just above). Given that
DS is a real-time simulation, there is a need to know what is displayed on the oneline and how it
benefits the user in the DS Focus.
2.8.1 Normal Oneline Display

The oneline display can be summarized as follows:
1. After entering DS Focus, the oneline displays the resultant power flow solution that
represents the initial conditions of your simulation. As noted above, if induction motors
are present, the results on the oneline may change slightly from results seen in the Power
Flow Focus.
2. After a simulation is performed, the oneline displays the resultant network conditions
present at the end of the simulation.
3. After right clicking on a switching device and selecting either Open and Resolve PF or
Close and Resolve PF, the oneline is resolved and displays newly updated initial
conditions for your simulation while including your selected switching device status
change.
4. After resetting a simulation using the Simulation Reset button, the power flow resolves;
the oneline displays the initial conditions of your simulation, taking into account
whatever initial condition network changes you made in 3.
Simulation Reset
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 36
5. When a new script is selected from the Script Load drop down list box, the power flow
resolves; the oneline displays the initial conditions of your simulation, taking into
account whatever initial condition network changes you made in 3.
6. When DS Options are changed, the power flow resolves; the oneline displays the initial
conditions of your simulation, taking into account whatever initial condition network
changes you made in 3.
Thus, while in DS focus, the user has the ability to change the steady-state initial conditions used
to perform a simulation. You may ask why? Among other reasons, this feature is essential if
one wishes to perform a quick and easy motor starting simulation. Typically, a user will enter a
new focus with their system model set up as it is normally running. This means that the DS
Engine is ready to run a simulation based upon the steady-state initial conditions that it has been
supplied. But before starting a motor, it needs to be set offline, and the system needs to be
resolved in order to supply a new steady-state condition. To accomplish this, one could go back
to the DB Focus, open the motor breaker, re-enter the DS Focus, and then double click on the
open motor breaker. A simulation will thus be triggered which runs steady state for a pre-set time
(according to the DS Options dialog Double Click settings), closes the motor breaker, and then
runs to a pre-set simulation end time.
From this example, we also see that the fundamental behavior of a double-click action on a
breaker has changed in the DS Focus. In the Power Flow and Short Circuit Foci, a double-click
action on a breaker changes the steady-state condition of the system (before solving the power
flow, and before application of the fault). In DS, double-click actions perform simulations,
similar to the Harmonics Focus. Double clicking on a bus in Harmonics causes a frequency scan
to be performed. Double clicking on a bus in DS Focus causes a bus fault simulation to be
performed.
So, a method is needed to change the steady-state system in DS Focus, without having to go back
and forth between DB and DS Foci. The method selected is that of right mouse clicking on the
switching device, and selecting Open and Resolve PF or Close and Resolve PF. After that
action, the system is resolved and set up according to the third method listed above. Now, for a
newly opened motor breaker, for example, a simple double click on the breaker is all that is
needed to start the motor.
2.8.2 Stepping Oneline Display

One enhanced feature of the oneline, that we believe has not been done in any dynamic simulator
to date, is the ability to see system wide network conditions during a dynamic simulation. To do
this, however, one would need to freeze the simulation in time so that an update in the display
can be made. This is accomplished through the stepping feature in DS.
The stepping feature makes use of the following button:
Simulation Step
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 37
This button is similar to the Simulation Run button:

Simulation Run
but only runs the simulation up to a point in time defined by the Tools / DS Option / Step Run
Delta Time. This parameter basically defines how long the simulation will run before it is
paused, and updates the oneline with the condition of the entire network. Multiple presses of the
Simulation Step button will thus propel you through the simulation (defined by the presently
selected script) one moment at a time, while pausing and allowing you to view conditions in the
entire network.
For example, the default value of Step Run Delta Time is 0.1 seconds. Just after entering DS
Focus or after a Simulation Reset, if the Simulation Step button is pressed with this setting, the
simulation will run from 0.0 to 0.1 seconds, update the plot window for that brief time-span in
the simulation, and then update the network conditions on the oneline. If pressed again, the
simulation will run from 0.1 to 0.2 seconds, update the plot window, and then update the oneline
window. This continues as you press the Simulation Step button until you reach the end of the
simulation.
Figure 28. Example of system with script stepped several times into the simulation.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 38
We suggest trying this feature at least once to expose yourself to the concept of updated oneline
results during a dynamic simulation. Users with a history of using other stability simulation
software may skip over this feature, as it is unique and is not a standard offering in other DS
software. The power of this feature is addicting, as you find how fast you can move around the
oneline to observe system conditions during a contingency event at any frozen moment in time.
An example of a system with a motor start simulation that is being stepped is shown in Figure
28. The Step Run Delta Time is set to 0.1 seconds, and so the simulation has been stepped
several times to get to about 1.3 seconds. Notice the conditions of the system on the oneline, and
how both temporary bus under-voltage and transformer overload are highlighted in red,
according to the present settings in the Power Flow Options. Also, notice that the selected script
is Start Motor 3, which was specifically written to start the motor at 1.0 second, and run to 3.0
seconds. The x-axis of the DS Plot Window is set to the maximum time found in the script. To
see results for a step run simulation, plot channels must be defined. The example in Figure 28
has plot channels defined to monitor MCC-3 bus voltage, motor current and transformer current.
A quick pan of the oneline up to the generator bus (Figure 29) shows that the system voltage is
just fine at 0.985 pu at this time in the simulation.
Figure 29. Figure 28 panned up to the generators bus.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 39
2.9 Two Forms of Power Flow

In the DS Focus, you will find that there are two forms of power flow solving at work. At all
times after a time steps power flow solution and oneline update, the form will be a Voltage
Controlled Network (VCN) that is ready to perform further dynamic simulation. However, after
a Simulation Reset or other resolve after a steady-state system change, the original Swing bus
power flow is used to solve the system first, and then the swing bus power flow is converted to a
VCN. The methods at work before the oneline is updated with results are:
Entry into DS Focus:
Solve swing-bus PF
Check induction motor vars
Feed back updated motor vars to PF
<repeat last three steps as needed>
Convert to VCN
Solve VCN
Update oneline
Perform a Reset in DS Focus:
Reset all status to initial condition

Solve swing-bus PF
Convert to VCN
Solve VCN
Update oneline
Right Click Switching Device change:
Add breaker to initial condition list

Solve swing-bus PF
Check induction motor vars
Feed back updated motor vars to PF
<repeat last three steps as needed>
Convert to VCN
Solve VCN
Update oneline
2.9.1 Swing Bus Power Flow

As a review, we would note again that a swing bus power flow (as used in the Power Flow
Focus), is the basis for determining the steady-state initial conditions for DS. The swing bus
power flow is thus assuming:
Generators and Utilities specified as PV are performing voltage control actions to

accommodate system changes, and have settled.
Generators and Utilities specified as Swing are performing voltage control and governor
control to accommodate system changes, and have settled.
Now, in reality, swing generators do not really exist. The actual power system is responding in
real-time to supply load and maintain frequency. Even if you are not near a utility generator, and
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 40
only see the utility supply as a feeder or step-down transformer, there is a generator (actually
generators) somewhere responding to your increase and decrease in load demand for any given
moment.
A swing source is a convenient way of simulating a source that supplies whatever power is
needed, and holds voltage at a user defined set-point. It is also necessary to solve an iterative
power flow, since without a swing, we are over-constrained in our equations for a solution and
will not be able to solve the system. We need at least one degree of freedom, or, a place where
all of the left over power needs can be met (either supply or consume). The swing source
provides this for us.
2.9.2 VCN Power Flow

The VCN power flow is used in the stability simulation to allow machine models to update
conditions, so that a new network condition can be determined for any given time step in a DS
simulation. It uses a formulation of YBus (an admittance matrix formulation) to perform a direct
solution. It is dependent upon the driving voltage sources supplied by the machine models to
determine its solution (actually converted to Norton equivalent current sources, to properly
interact with the YBus solution).
As noted in other sections of the DS Operations Manual, this means that all loads are modeled as
constant impedance. In a future version of the DS Engine, other load types may be allowed;
however, that would necessitate an iterative solution on each time step (a well-known method).
In the first version of the DS Engine we have chosen not to use the iterative network technique,
since the main users of EasyPower are industrial in nature, and are not concerned with large
interconnected utility networks, where such load models are needed. It is our goal in future
releases to not require an iterative technique by including actual dynamic models that simulate a
variety of loads. This would thus supply additional modeling detail for EasyPower users, and
would guarantee a network solution on every time step. If an iterative solution is used, then
conditions can arise where the network does not solve.
The VCN solution network can be illustrated as shown in Figure 4 back in Section 1. In that
figure we see the interconnected network of lines, cables, transformers, loads, etc., and then we
see the interface points for the machine models. As the machine models update their driving
voltages on each time step of the simulation, the voltages across the network are updated using a
quick forward-back matrix calculation of the network model. For any change in the network, it
must be re-factorized to include the change, so that we can again do fast forward-back
computations.
2.10 Dynamics Options

When in the DS Focus, the DS Options Dialog can be reached by clicking on DS Options. The
dialog includes four main sections with settings that supply control over the DS Engine. Each
setting is described in detail in this section.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 41
2.10.1 Control Screen

The Control Section includes settings that control the foundational elements of a DS simulation,
as well as control display and messaging (Figure 30). The settings are defined as follows:
Simulation Run Control
Solution Time Step
The defined time step, in seconds, of the simulation.

The default value is 1/10th of a half cycle, and is set low
on purpose, to create stable numerical conditions for
induction motors under starting and spin-down
conditions.
Step Run Delta Time
The time duration, in seconds, over which a simulation

is run and then paused after the Simulation Step button
is pressed. The default value is 0.1 seconds.
Enable all protective devices
If enabled (default), then relays, fuses and low voltage

breakers will sense and trip in a simulation. For this
feature to be active the user must own the Power
Protector feature of EasyPower.
Enable contactor action
If enabled (default), then contactors will sense and trip

in a simulation. For this feature to be active the user
must own the Power Protector feature of EasyPower.
Enable ATS
If enabled (default), then ATS will sense and transfer

in a simulation. For this feature to be active the user
must own the Power Protector feature of EasyPower.
Include Stator Flux Dynamics

Induction motor models
If enabled (not default), then additional stator flux

dynamics (the time build-up of flux in the stator
windings) are included for all induction motors in the
simulation.
Message Log Control

Log model messages at initialization
If enabled (default), then all initialization messages

from DS models appear in the Message Log.
Log model messages during run
If enabled (default), then all run time messages from

DS models appear in the message log.
Log protective device trip messages
If enabled (default), then all run time message from

protective devices will appear in the message log.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 42
Figure 30. Dynamic Stability Options Control Tab.
Initialization Control
Maximum Allowed DState
The maximum allowed DState, in per unit, that triggers

an initialization error message in the Message Log if
exceeded.
Entering Stability Focus

Automatically arrange windows
If enabled (default), then the Oneline Window,

Message Log Window, and DS Plot Window will autoarrange all in view. You may also press the F8 key at
any time to perform the same auto-arrange.
Show plot window
If enabled (default), then when DS Focus is entered the

DS Plot Window will automatically appear. If not
enabled, the DS Plot Window will automatically appear
whenever a simulation is run or step-run.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 43
Show message log
If enabled (default), then when DS Focus is entered the

Message Log Window will automatically appear. If not
enabled, the DS Plot Window will automatically appear
whenever a simulation is run or step-run.
2.10.2 Double-Click Screen

The Double-Click Control Tab includes settings that control all of the double-click actions that
are performed on the oneline (Figure 31). The settings are defined as follows:
Generators Exciter Symbol to Step
VRef Step
The step voltage, in percent, applied to the reference of

the excitation system to be stepped.
Initial Terminal Voltage
The initial terminal voltage of the generator, in percent,

used to initialize the generator machine model and the
excitation system model.
Simulation End Time
The total simulation time length in seconds.
Delay Time Length
The time duration, in seconds, where the simulation

runs steady-state before any actions are taken. After this
time, the excitation system voltage reference (VRef) is
stepped.
Generators Governor Symbol to Step

Initial Load
The initial loading of the generator, in percent.
Load Step
The step load, in percent, applied to the terminals of the

generator.
Simulation End Time
The total simulation time length, in seconds.
Delay Time Length

time, the load on the generators terminals is stepped.
Breaker or Switch to Open

Simulation End Time
Delay Time Length

time, the switching device is opened.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 44
Figure 31. Dynamic Stability Options Double-Click Control Tab.
Breaker or Switch to Close

Simulation End Time
Delay Time Length

time, the switching device is closed.
ATS to Transfer
Simulation End Time
Delay Time Length

time, the ATS is transferred.
Bus to Fault
Fault Resistance
The fault resistance, in ohms.
Fault Reactance
The fault reactance, in ohms.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 45
Simulation End Time
Delay Time Length

time, the bus is faulted.
Fault Time Length
The time duration, in seconds, that the fault is left on

the bus. The fault is applied after the Delay Time
Length, and is removed after Fault Time Length has
elapsed. If you desire to have protective devices
perform all fault clearing, we recommend setting this
value longer than the Simulation End Time, so that the
fault is never removed from the bus over the entire
simulation. If you set this value equal to the Simulation
End Time, then the last time step of the simulation, and
the resulting end-of-simulation network results
displayed on the oneline will present the system with
the fault removed.
2.10.3 Plot Output Screen

The Plot Output Tab includes three settings that control plotting in the DS Plot Window (Figure
32). The settings are defined as follows:
Figure 32. Dynamic Stability Options Plot Output Tab.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 46
Maximum plot size
The maximum number of points for each curve

presented in the DS Plot Window, and the tabulation of
data in the DS Plot Window spreadsheet. Note: if the
simulation time step and simulation duration are set
such that the total number of simulation time steps
exceed the Maximum Plot Size, the DS Engine will
automatically skip points so as not to exceed the
Maximum Plot Size.
Copy results to clipboard
If enabled (not default), then all results defined either

via auto-plot behavior or through user defined plot
settings, are copied to the Windows clipboard in a tab
delimited format, ready for pasting into Excel, or any
other software that supports tab delimited data import
from the clipboard.
Overlay Plot Curves
If enabled (not default), then the min and max scales of

all plots (when in auto-scale mode) in the DS Plot
Window are determined so that all curves are in a
maximum view mode. In most cases curves will
overlap somewhat. If disabled (default) then all min and
max plot scales of each plot curve will be determined so
that no overlap in the curves occurs. The plot is broken
into vertical sections depending upon the number of
curves.
2.10.4 Arc Flash Screen

The Plot Output Tab includes three settings that control plotting in the DS Plot Window (Figure
33). The settings are defined as follows:
Use Arc Flash Simulation for Faults
If enabled (not default), this will use IEEE 1584 arc

flash equations to apply a fault, thus including fault
current limiting action by the arc.
Arcing Current
This percentage is applied to the calculated arcing

current and is typically used to simulate conditions with
the 85% of bolted fault current method typically used in
arc flash calculations.
Working Distance
This distance is used to calculate PPE from the arc flash

results.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 47
Maximum Time
If the arc is not cleared by a protective device, then this

time will be used to remove the arcing fault. Since
applying an arc flash significantly increases the time it
takes to perform a simulation during the arc, the value
will allow you to curtail simulations that may never
clear (i.e. if protective devices were not specified).
Figure 33. Dynamic Stability Options Arc Flash Tab.
2.11 Plot Definitions

2.11.1 General
DS software would be useless without the ability to plot machine response and many of the
results that appear on the EasyPower oneline. In line with the other Foci in EasyPower, we have
integrated result plotting in the DS Focus, made it update with results that mirror the oneline, and
supplied the easiest methods possible to define what you desire to monitor and plot in your
simulation. To access plot definitions, click on the Define Plots button.
Define Plots Button
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 48
When pressed, the Define Plots floating dialog will appear (Figure 34). This dialog has the
following features:
Allows up to 5 curves per plot.
Allows up to 9 plots.
Gives you access to the oneline for fast select of values to monitor.
Gives you access to resize and pan around the oneline for value selection.
Can be moved around as you desire.
Has drop down list boxes for making plot value definitions.
Has drop down list boxes that auto-fill with the correct equipment IDs to complete value
selection faster.
Auto un-grays appropriate cells in the plot define spreadsheet according to the needs of
each value to plot.
Figure 34. Define Plots dialog.
The following values are able to be plotted in a dynamic simulation, if the appropriate equipment
is being modeled and is in existence and enabled.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 49
Table 2. List of Available Plot Values.
Equipment
Value
Units
Comment
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Voltage
Voltage
Fault I
Fault I
Angle
Frequency
Frequency
AF Energy
pu
kV
pu
Amps
Degrees
pu
Hz
Cal/cm/cm
If AF Fault Enabled
Network Dev
Network Dev
Network Dev
Network Dev
Current
Current
kW
kVar
pu
Amps
kW
kVar
See Note 1
See Note 1
See Note 1
See Note 1
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
DS Motor
Term Voltage
Current
Current
Speed
Speed
Torque
Load Torque
Watts
Vars
kW
kVar
Angle
Field Voltage
Power Angle
D-Axis Current
Q-Axis Current
Psi''d
Psi''q
pu
pu
Amps
pu
RPM
pu
pu
pu
pu
kW
kVar
deg
pu
deg
pu
pu
pu
pu
Sync Motor Only

Sync Motor Only
Sync Motor Only
Sync Motor Only
Sync Motor Only
Sync Motor Only
Sync Motor Only
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 50
Equipment
Value
Units
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
DS Gen
Current
Current
Speed
Speed
Torque
P Mechanical
Watts
Vars
kW
kVar
Field Voltage
Angle
Term Voltage
Power Angle
D-Axis Current
Q-Axis Current
Psi''d
Psi''q
VPSS
AVR Out
pu
Amps
pu
RPM
pu
pu
pu
pu
kW
kVar
pu
deg
pu
deg
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Note 1:
Network Dev values are those that have no DS Model defined, and
include:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Comment
Machine Angle
Id
Iq
Flux d
Flux q
PSS Output Voltage
Capacitors
Loads
Shunts
Filters
Motors (Non DS Model)
Generators (Non DS Model)
Utilities
UPS
Breakers
Switches
Tie Breakers
Tie Switches
Cables
Overhead Lines
Two Winding Transformers
Three Winding Transformers
Busway
Current Limiting Reactors
Page 51
For Non DS motors and generators, we mean that no model is defined in the Stability Tab of the
motor or generator data dialog, and/or their Enable checkbox is not checked.
All plot definitions are saved with your case. We suggest defining plots when you first enter the
DS Focus, while you know that your system represents the conditions (equipment status) in the
database. Define the plots as you want, and then press the File Save button while still in the DS
Focus. Remember, if you press save while in an analysis focus, the case will include any
temporary status changes you have made (right click action on switching device and pressing
Open and Resolve PF or Close and Resolve PF). This is why we recommend making plot
definitions immediately after you first enter.
Plot Channel Scaling
In the Plot Defines Dialog, there are columns that let you define the min and max plot scales for
the value you desire to monitor. By default, the mode is Auto so that no extra work has to be
done (i.e. setting the min and max scale). The DS Engine plot scale selection is excellent in
Auto mode. However, if you desire to enter your own min and max scale values, un-check the
Auto field for the appropriate curve, and set the min and max values to those that suit your
needs. Note that you must un-check the Auto field, or the min and max values will not be
remembered after a simulation. When the Auto option is enabled, the min and max scale
values determined by the DS Engine after a simulation are transferred into the min and max
values of the Plot Defines Dialog (replacing any values previously entered).
Now, if you desire to enter you own min and max scale values, but dont have an idea as to what
they should be, we suggest first running a simulation that is typical of what you are working on
with all curves defined with the Auto feature on. Then, after the simulation is run, open the
Plot Defines Dialog to see the min and max values selected by the DS Engine. Replace the scales
as you desire, with guidance from the scales supplied by the DS Engine.
Selection Method 1
The first method of selecting values to plot, is directly from the Plot Definitions Dialog. On any
of the five cells in the Monitoring column, click to get the drop-down list box of available plot
values. Select one (Figure 35), and then proceed to fill in the rest of the enabled cells on the
same row. For example (Figure 36), if Bus Frequency is selected, then in the With ID column,
select the bus you desire to monitor.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 52
Figure 35. Plot value Selection Method 1.
Figure 36. Example of completing Selection Method 1.
Selection Method 2
The second method of defining plot channels involves a blending of the Plot Definitions Dialog
with selecting actions on the oneline. After opening the Plot Definitions Dialog, select the plot
you wish to define via the Plot Tabs at the top of the dialog. Next, right click on equipment items
on the oneline to fill in each row (see Figure 37). All cells for the row are automatically defined,
with the Auto-Scale feature enabled for that plot channel. Rows are filled in starting at the first
available (blank) row.
If you desire to replace a row, click on the Monitoring cell of the row you desire to replace,
and then right click and select the equipment and value you desire to monitor. You will be
prompted about over-writing the existing defined row.
Note that while in the plot define mode, you can still pan and zoom (using mouse wheel actions)
around the oneline. This makes defining monitored items quick, visual, and easy to associate
with the oneline.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 53
Figure 37. Plot value Selection Method 2.
Ind Motor
Sync Motor
Bus
Network Dev
Generator
Figure 38. Plot Definition context menus for Selection Method 2.
Finally, to make sure that plot definitions are saved with the EasyPower database, click on the
Save button.
Save
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 54
2.11.2 DS Plot Window

The DS Plot Window is a fully functional plotting tool that allows for quick display of results,
printing of the plots, and several other features. We supply here a list of those features as well as
some specifics that will help you understand what you are seeing in the plot window.
The plot window includes printing of any plot.
The DS Plot Window includes an Auto Plot Tab that automatically plots pertinent values
depending upon the double-click action performed (clicking a motor breaker for example
plots motor parameters). Refer to the next section for more detail.
The DS Plot Window is updated at the end of a simulation, or after the pause of a steprun simulation.
Plots are all created using the maximum number of points (defaults at 3000) supplied in
the DS Options; but in reality, not exactly that number. Based on the simulation time
step, the DS Engine determines the closest integer divisor into the number of simulated
points to determine the number of points to be saved for plotting. They will not exceed
the plot size defined in DS Options.
There will be slight differences between times where events happen in the message log
(which is the actual time of the event) vs. times when changes appear on the plots
themselves. This is due to the natural down-sampling action needed to keep the plot
within the size defined in the DS Options dialog.
In addition to plot results down-sampling, the DS Engine automatically saves conditions

on both sides of a switching event. Thus, at times, one might see places where there are
two points with the same time, but two different values. This is due to saving results both
before and after the network is resolved for a switching event.
For more definition, increase the number of points plotted in the DS Options dialog.
For all network components, plotted flow is calculated into the bus.
Plot ID Names are automatically generated for each value you desire to plot. Those
names appear in the legend and on the Y-Axis of the plot.
Auto Plot
For each double-click action that runs a simulation, an auto plot is generated (first tab in the DS
Plot Window). The results plotted are pre-selected values corresponding to the double-click
action. The auto plot is generated according to the guidelines presented in Table 3.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 55
Table 3. Auto Plot Pre-Defined Values.
Double-Click On
Plots
Units
Generator Exciter Symbol
Terminal Voltage
Field Voltage
AVR Voltage
pu
pu
pu
Generator Governor Symbol
Mechanical Power
Speed
pu
pu
Motor Breaker
Terminal Voltage
Terminal Current
Speed
Torque
pu
pu
pu
pu
Generator Breaker
Terminal Voltage
Field Voltage
Angle
kW
kVar
pu
pu
Degrees
kW
kVar
Breaker on Network Device
Bus Voltage nearest breaker

Amps through device
kW through device
kVar through device
pu
Amps
kW
kVar
Plot Printing
Printing of plots in the DS Plot Window falls in line with capabilities in the Harmonics and
Power Protector Focus. The main controls used to Print and Print Preview are the Print and Print
Preview buttons.
Print
Print Preview
After selecting Print or Print Preview, the Print Plot Dialog shown in Figure 39 will be
displayed to prompt you with several choices for how you want your plots to appear. First, select
the plots you desire to see under Print What. Under Scaling, you will find several fit-to-page
options that change depending upon the number of plots you have selected to see.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 56
Figure 39. Print Dialog showing default page option settings.
For example, if you select four plots as shown in Figure 40, three scaling options allow:
Fit to Page
Fit to Page - Fits Two Plots per Page
Fit to Page - Fits Four Plots per Page
- Fits One Plot per Page
Once selected the plots will either Print or Print Preview as you have selected.
Figure 40. Print Dialog showing settings for four plots per page.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 57
Figure 41. Example plot window ready to print.
As an example, a plot as shown in Figure 41 is ready to plot. The Print Preview of this plot is
shown in Figure 42. Once the Print Preview is displayed, there are options that allow you to
look at more pages (on a multiple plot Print Preview), Zoom In, Zoom Out, Close the Print
Preview window, and finally to Print what you have previewed. These fall in line with standard
Print Preview features in many Windows applications.
In Figure 43 we show the Print Preview that matches selections shown in Figure 40. Figure 43
is also shown in Landscape. If you desire to see your plots in Portrait, you will need to first open
the Page Setup Dialog, shown in Figure 44. This can be found under File / Page Setup in the
EasyPower menu.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 58
Figure 42. Plot during a print preview with default settings.
Figure 43. Print Preview with four plots per page.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 59
Figure 44. Page Setup Dialog.
Plot Zooming
When reviewing your plots, at some point you will most likely desire to zoom in to a section for
closer scrutiny. EasyPower DS allows both X and Y axis zooming using the plot display control.
The plot display control.

Zoom Area
Allows you to select any portion of your plot using a rubber rectangle.
First click on this button, and then left-mouse click and drag on the plot to
zoom into the location you desire. An example of this action is shown in
Figure 45 and Figure 46.
Zoom Out Full
To restore the plot window to its original fully zoomed out view, click on
this button, or double click on the mouse scroll wheel, if you have one.
Zoom In 1.5x
Pressing this button will zoom in by 1.5 times.
Zoom In 1.5x
Pressing this button will zoom out by 1.5 times.
Data View
Shows and hides the spreadsheet data view where the curve data plotted is
supplied in tabular form.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 60
Data Cursor
When pressed causes the cursor to also show digitized values as you move
your mouse over the plot. The values are displayed in the legend.
Scroll Bars
Shows and hides the plot scroll bars.
Figure 45. Plot with Zoom Area shown.
Figure 46. Results of Figure 44 Zoom Area.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 61
Plot Horizontal Zooming

When you desire to zoom into an event for more detail, but desire the vertical axis scales to
remain fixed, left-mouse click and drag directly on the plot without clicking on any of the
buttons documented in the last section. This will perform a horizontal (Time Axis) zoom. Figure
47 shows the black zoom range while it is being selected, and Figure 48 shows the result of this
action in the plot window.
Figure 47. Plot with horizontal zoom being applied.
Figure 48. Results of Figure 46 horizontal zoom.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 62
Spreadsheet Data
The DS Plot Window inherently includes all plot data values for ready access if you need it. To
quickly access the data, pull the splitter bar (shown in Figure 49), to the right. This reveals the
plot data, thus allowing spreadsheet-like select and copy functions. An example of selecting a
section of data is shown in Figure 50. To copy the data, either press Ctrl-C on the keyboard, or
use the Copy button.
Copy
Splitter Bar
Figure 49. DS Plot Window showing spreadsheet data.
Figure 50. DS Plot Window showing selected spreadsheet data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 63
2.12 Scripts
Scripts in the DS Engine are used to define simulation actions. EasyPower DS has supplied a
good amount of automatic simulation actions through quick double-click actions performed
directly on the oneline (See Chapter 3). However, in a lot of situations, more simulation action
detail is necessary to perform what is needed. For this case, the DS Engine allows you to create
as many scripts as you want, each as long as you need.
Scripts have these limits:
They perform no auto-plot action, and so plot definitions must be made to see any results.
They are limited to the commands documented in the next section.
Script commands are time dependent and chronological.
To be run, they must be selected from the Script Load drop down list in the toolbar.
They can only be run one at a time.
They can only be created in the Script Edit Dialog.
2.12.1 Commands
Table 4 lists all presently available script commands.
Table 4. Script Commands.
Script Command
Type
Value1
Value2
Time
Fault Bus (R+jX)

Fault Bus For (R+jX)
Remove Fault
Network Change
Network Change
Network Change
R-Ohms
R-Ohms
X-Ohms
X-Ohms
Seconds
Run to Time
Run for Time
Simulation Run
Simulation Run
Close LV Breaker
Close HV Breaker
Close Switch
Close Fused Switch
Network Change
Network Change
Network Change
Network Change
Open Switch
Open Fused Switch
Open LV Breaker
Open HV Breaker
Network Change
Network Change
Network Change
Network Change
Transfer ATS
Network Change
EasyPower LLC 2016
Seconds
Seconds
Page 64
Script Command
Type
Value1
Enable Contactors
Disable Contactors
Enable Prot Devices
Disable Prot Devices
Override DS Options
Override DS Options
Override DS Options
Override DS Options
Set Time Step
Override DS Options
AVR to Manual
AVR to Auto
Step AVR
Alter AVR Mode

Alter AVR Mode
Alter AVR Mode
% Step
Set Governor Speed Setpoint
Alter Governor Mode
pu Value
Set Exciter Parameter

Set Governor Parameter
Set Generator Parameter
Set Stabilizer Parameter
Set Motor Parameter
Alter Model Data

Alter Model Data
Alter Model Data
Alter Model Data
Alter Model Data
Row #
Row #
Row #
Row #
Row #
Value2
Time
Seconds
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Notes:
1.
If the fault impedance is specified as zero, the impedance value will be automatically
limited to 0.0 + j1.0 E-10 per unit Ohms. No smaller value is allowed.
2.
Only one fault may be applied at a time. If another fault application is attempted, it
will be ignored, and the operation of fault removal will only correspond to the first
fault application.
3.
Repeated ATS Transfers will toggle the ATS back and forth from Normal to
Emergency connections.
4.
Changing the time step will have impacts on plot length and can trigger an error in
cases where the plot length is too short. We suggest changing overall simulation time
step in the DS Options Dialog.
5.
The pu Value specified when setting the Governor Speed Setpoint is dependent upon
each governor model. Some specify speed as a pu change, where rated speed is 0.0,
and others specify speed in pu where 1.0 is rated speed.
6.
Row # in the table above is the parameter row number starting with 1, as seen in the
data spreadsheet of the Stability Tab for a generator or motor. For example, an IEEE
AC1A excitation system has gain KA specified in row 7 of its parameter list. Use 7 as
the Row # to change this exciters value of KA at run-time.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 65
7.
For all model parameter setting commands, values are hard set. This means that no
special data integrity checks are performed to validate the parameter value, and it
means that whatever value was there is replaced immediately at the time in the
simulation that the change is being made. There are a handful of details and
exceptions to consider:
Models with saturation have the internal saturation variables updated if any
saturation parameter is modified. Without this extra step, changing the
saturation parameters would actually do nothing.
IEEET1 and IEEET2 exciter models include modifying KE at initialization to

include effects of saturation. If KE is ever set at runtime, this initialization is
not repeated, and KE is hard set overriding whatever value of KE was
determined.
For the Woodward Diesel governor model, the last parameter, +1 specifies
droop control and -1 specifies isochronous control.
For the Round Rotor and Salient Pole generator models, changing Xd also
changes Xq to the same value.
2.12.2 Creating a Script

To create a script, click on the Script Edit button while in DS Focus. You will be presented with
the Scripts Dialog, as shown in Figure 51. In Figure 52, we see that if you have no scripts
defined, there will always be a default Steady State script that simply runs a five second
simulation with no switching actions.
Often, running your system in steady state using this default script is a good check of your
systems initialization. If the curves plotted are practically flat through the entire simulation, then
all models are most likely initialized into a good steady-state pre-event condition.
Script Edit
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 66
Figure 51. Scripts Dialog.
To add a script to the list of scripts in the Scripts Dialog, click on New. This will pop up the
New Script Dialog as shown in Figure 52.
Figure 52. New Script Dialog.
Once you have entered a name for your new script and clicked on OK, you will be provided the
Edit Script Dialog as shown in Figure 53. This dialog is where all scripts for DS simulations are
written. Figure 53 shows the 5 columns of the dialog, where they are defined as:
Command
Via drop down list of the Table 4 Commands
Equipment ID
Via drop down list of appropriated equipment IDs
Value 1
1st value if needed
Value 2
2nd value if needed
Time
Time value if needed
Refer to Table 4 above for all script commands along with definitions for values or times that are
necessary.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 67
Figure 53. Edit Script Dialog with no script yet defined.
To define a script, use the drop down list box in each Command column cell (click on cell to see
it) to first select your script command. Next, enter any IDs, values or times that are needed.
Repeat these actions to define your script in chronological order. A completed script for a
sequenced motor start is shown in Figure 54.
Figure 54. Edit Script Dialog with script entered.
Once you have defined all of your script commands and any other data needed, click on OK to
close the Edit Script Dialog. The new name of your script will now appear in the Scripts Dialog,
as shown in Figure 55. Click on Close in the Scripts Dialog to close your script creating and
editing session.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 68
Figure 55. Scripts Dialog with new Sequence Start script.
Finally, to make sure your script is saved with your EasyPower database, click on the Save
button.
Save
2.12.3 Renaming a Script

To rename a script while in the Scripts Dialog, select the script and then click on Rename. You
will be prompted with a Rename Script Dialog as shown in Figure 56. Click on OK after you
have entered a new name to make your change.
Figure 56. Rename Script Dialog.
2.12.4 Deleting a Script

To delete a script while in the Scripts Dialog, select the script and then click on Delete. You
will be prompted with a delete confirmation dialog as shown in Figure 57. Click on Yes to
delete the script.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 69
Figure 57. Delete Script confirmation dialog.
2.12.5 Copying a Script

To copy a script while in the Scripts Dialog, select the script and then click on Copy. You will
be prompted with a Copy Script Dialog as shown in Figure 58. Click on OK after you have
entered a name to copy the script into.
Figure 58. Copy Script Dialog.
2.12.6 Edit a Script

To edit a script while in the Scripts Dialog, select the script and then click on Edit. You will be
put into the Edit Script dialog, where you can make changes. You can also double-click on the
script name in the Script Dialog to do the same.
Once in the Edit Script Dialog, use the same edit actions discussed above in Creating a Script
to make any changes to commands, IDs, values or time. To move commands up or down, select
the row, and click on Up and Down to accomplish your desired placement for a given
command.
For example, to swap BL-4 and BL-1, so that BL-1 is closed first in our example script, first
select row 6 as shown in Figure 59 (click on row 6 number).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 70
Figure 59. Row 6 in script selected.
Next, click on Up two times. The result is shown in Figure 60.
Figure 60. BL-1 moved up two rows by clicking on Up twice.
Now, click on the row with BL-3 (click on row 5 number), and click Down once. The result is
shown in Figure 61.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 71
Figure 61. S-3 row selected and moved down one row by clicking on Down.
To delete a row in your script, select the row (click on the rows number) and then click on
Delete. You will be prompted with a delete confirmation dialog. Click Yes to delete the row.
Figure 62. Delete script row confirmation dialog.
2.12.7 Running a Script

To run a script, select it from the DS script select drop down list (see example in Figure 63), and
then click on the Run button. The DS Engine will run your script through to the end, and once
completed, will have plot results in the DS Plot Window (if defined), messages in the Message
Log and the oneline will display network results for the last time step of the simulation. An
example result of a script run is shown in Figure 64. Note how the motors are started at 1, 2, 3
and 4 seconds, and how the 2nd and 3rd motor overlap slightly in their start. To clear the plot, and
reset back to initial conditions before the simulation, click on the Reset Simulation button.
Run Simulation
Reset Simulation
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 72
Figure 63. Selecting Sequence Start script from DS Toolbar.
Figure 64. Results after Sequence Start script was run.
2.12.8 Stepping Through a Script

To step run a script, select it from the DS script select list (see example in Figure 63), and then
click on the Step button repeatedly to move through the simulation.
Step Simulation
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 73
After each press of the Step button, the DS Plot Window, Message Log and oneline will update,
presenting results at the end of the step. Default step size is 0.10 seconds. An example of a step
run result is presented in Figure 65. This was used to see voltage conditions in the network at
the moment of lowest voltage during the simulation.
Figure 65. Results after having stepped through Sequence Start script part ways.
2.13 Scenario Manager Behavior

The DS Focus has inherited all of the capabilities of Scenario Manager. The loading and defining
of scenarios, of course, occurs in the Database Focus. For DS, the main items that are affected by
Scenario Manager are plot definitions and script commands. Figure 66 below details the
behavior of Scenario Manager as it impacts dynamic stability simulations. This follows the same
conventions used throughout EasyPower.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 74
Base Case
Base Case Action

Doesnt Matter.
Scenario
Addition?
Yes
Use Base Case with

Scenario Addition.
No
Use Base Case
As Is.
Change Script or Plot

Def in Base Case.
Scenario
Change for Same
Base Case
Change?
Yes
Use Base Case with

Scenario Change
Overriding Base
Case Change.
No
Use Base Case with
Base Case Change.
Scripts
Plot Defs
No Changes In Base
Case.
Scenario
Change?
Yes
Use Base Case with

Scenario Change
Overriding Base
Case Change.
No
Use Base Case
As Is.
Delete Command
(Script) or Item (Plot
Def) in Base Case.
Scenario
Change for
Deleted Base
Case Item?
Yes
Use Base Case with

Scenario Change
Overriding Base
Case Change.
No
Use Base Case
As Is.
Figure 66. Behavior of Scenario Manager in Dynamic Stability.
2.14 Printing Model Data Sheets

Model Data Sheets are essential when documenting data in your EasyPower model. They are
printed and viewed quickly and easily. Data Sheets can only be printed and viewed in the DS
focus. This method of was implemented since it not only supplies the data sheet while in that
focus, but because it supplies a verification of what data was actually transferred from the
Database Focus into the DS Engine. This may seem unimportant, but it is a vital check of data
validity. The information that is used in a DS simulation needs to be the data printed in the Data
Sheet. If there is any discrepancy between data seen in the Data Sheet and data thought to be
entered in the Database Focus (in an equipment dialog), then we have an automatic check to help
catch a programming error. This process enhances the stability and maturity of the DS Engine
and its data transfer methods.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 75
There are three methods to print Data Sheets:

1. Right click context on oneline.
2. Oneline single item select, and then click the Data Sheet button.
3. Oneline multiple item select, and the click the Data Sheet button.
These three methods are shown in Figure 67, Figure 68 and Figure 69. After performing the
method, the Data Sheet Window will be displayed with the equipment Data Sheets you selected.
This is shown in Figure 70.
Figure 67. Right mouse context selection method for Generator Data Sheets.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 76
Then click on
Figure 68. File / Data Sheet menu single selection method.
Then click on
Figure 69. File / Data Sheet menu multiple selection method.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 77
After the Data Sheet Window is displayed, you now have the ability to scroll through it, print
and print preview. For ease of viewing, we suggest using the Print Preview feature to view each
data sheet page. Clicking on Print Preview, and then selecting a two page display option will
generate a view like that seen in Figure 71. While in Print Preview, you can page quickly
through all data sheets in a single and two page view.
Figure 70. Data Sheet Window.
Figure 71. Data Sheet Window in Print Preview mode.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 78
Finally, to print the data sheets, select the Print button in either mode. The dialog shown in
Figure 72 will prompt you for the pages to print, as well as the number of copies.
Figure 72. Data Sheet Print Dialog.
2.15 Status Bar Messages

Status Bar messages appear under some simulation circumstances. The Status Bar messages
currently defined are:
Running "Bus Fault" on XX - Press PAUSE to Suspend
Running "Open Breaker Action" on XX - Press PAUSE to Suspend
Running "Close Breaker Action" on XX - Press PAUSE to Suspend
Running "ATS Transfer" on XX - Press PAUSE to Suspend
These messages will display in the Status Bar when the appropriate simulation is running, and
only during the simulation.
2.16 Registry Control Variables

Several control variables are left, for the most part, as unchangeable by the user. In other words,
they are not included in the DS Options dialog. Due to the complexity of dynamics, and the
possible need to change some of the internal settings of the engine, the following control
variables are accessible via the Windows Registry. To change these control variables, the exact
name and type of the variable must be added to the EasyPower/Options list of variables in the
Registry. Then the value can be set accordingly.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 79
2.16.1 SlewIterationLimit
Name:
Type:
Default:
Range:
SlewIterationLimit
DWORD
12000
20 to 100000
The SlewIterationLimit variable is used to define the maximum number of iterations used in
induction motor and round rotor slew runs at initialization. The default value is 12000. Typically
the slew run completes in just 10 or 20 iterations, since additional feedback logic is included to
get the model initialized quickly. However, the slew run could extend to many hundred or more
iterations if a machine is initialized high on its saturation curve, or if near pull-out torque, where
there is a chance of initializing at a stall condition.
2.16.2 IndMotVarThreshMag & IndMotVarThreshExp

Name:
Type:
Default:
Range:
IndMotVarThreshMag
DWORD
1
1 to 1000
Name:
Type:
Default:
Range:
IndMotVarThreshExp
DWORD
4
0 to 20
When induction motors are initialized vars specified by the power flow and vars required by the
DS model may not necessarily match. To correct for the difference, the swing bus PF is forced
on repeat solutions to match the vars required by the model. The full swing power flow solution
is run until the difference between the power flow vars and the DS model vars fall below:
Var Mismatch pu = IndMotVarThreshMag 10-IndMotVarThreshExp
The default value is thus: 1.0 x 10-4 or 0.0001.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 80
3.0 EasyPower DS Methods

3.1 Selecting Models and Model Data
Selecting dynamics models is not as easy as selecting the appropriate cable or overhead line
conductor in EasyPower. This is a simple fact based upon the level of detail that is being
simulated in the DS Engine. We have attempted, in the software and here, to make the model
selection process as simple as possible. By reading through this section we hope you will learn to
discern what represents a good or exact match, and where some simplifications can be accepted.
3.1.1 Generators
The user is responsible for inputting machine data that is supplied for their generator. Machine
data is specific to a users installed generator. Care must be taken to obtain machine data that
represents the machines being modeled.
Generator impedances must be unsaturated. Unsaturated values are essential to modeling a
machine properly, as the model introduces saturation itself in real-time. In data sheets, saturated
values are noted with an additional v subscript:
Xdv for example
Unsaturated values are noted with a plain subscript or with an additional i:
Xd or Xdi for example
Generators should be selected based on the two generator types used predominantly in the
industry; Round Rotor and Salient Pole machines. A round rotor generator is constructed from a
solid iron rotor, and is associated with high speed. That is, the units are typically two or four
poles and have speeds of 3600 and 1800 rpm respectively.
Salient Pole generators are constructed with a rotor that is not solid iron, where the rotor poles
are laminated and placed on the perimeter of the rotor. A salient pole unit is associated with low
speed, typically below 1800 RPM. Low speed hydro units are always salient pole.
If you are uncertain if your generator is round rotor or salient pole, a review of the units test data
can typically help. Due to the rotor design, salient pole units do not include Xq or Tqo constants.
There are several ways to arrive at the necessary data for modeling a generator. We supply four
common methods here in order of highest accuracy first.
Manufacturers Test Data. This data is generated from tests performed at the
manufacturers facility, and should be part of a new generator procurement. Though extra
cost is incurred, such testing is highly recommended and what we would consider a
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 81
mandatory item when purchasing a new generator. In this day and age of computer
simulations, there is no excuse for not obtaining Manufacturers Test Data.
Field Test Data. For generators where only Manufacturers Typical Data or other Typical
Data is available, field testing can be performed to generate all data items noted above.
This testing relies upon access to the unit for breaker tripping under various loading
conditions. A complete analysis of test data is needed to complete the data derivation.
The combination of field testing work and analysis is not trivial, and can incur a
significant cost. Under some circumstances (equipment limitations, modes of operation,
and sensitivity to interruptions), testing cannot be completed to generate all necessary
parameters. Thus a blend of field test and typical data may result. If a complete test can
be adequately performed, Field Test Data is as good as or better than Manufacturers Test
Data.
Manufacturers Typical Data. This data is typical of a generators type and size, and often
has a historical basis. This data can have significant error based on generator design and
the vintage nature of the typical data.
Typical Data. This data is generally formulated from two sources: 1) other similar
generators where there is detailed manufacturers data, and 2) data based on a
summarizing of many units into a typical response. In all cases, typical data for a
generator should only be used in sensitivity simulations (where you are trying to get a
feel for the dynamic response of your system) or as a last resort if you have exhausted all
other avenues.
Round Rotor Generator

The round rotor generator has the following parameters:
Parameter
Rated MVA
Rated Efficiency
Rated Speed
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
Rated PF
Ra
Xd
Xq
Xd
Xq
Xd = Xq
Xl
Tdo
Tqo
Tdo
Units
MVA
Percent
RPM
Volts LL
Amps
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
EasyPower LLC 2016
Armature Resistance
D-Axis Synchronous Reactance
Q-Axis Synchronous Reactance
D-Axis Transient Reactance
Q-Axis Transient Reactance
D & Q-Axis Sub-Transient Reactance
Stator Leakage Reactance
D-Axis Transient OC Time Constant
Q-Axis Transient OC Time Constant
D-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
Page 82
Tqo
E1
E2
S( E1 )
S( E2 )
H
D
Note:
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
kW-Sec / kVA
pu
Q-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant

First Voltage to Define Saturation
Second Voltage to Define Saturation
Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
Combined machine and prime mover inertia
Machine damping, normally = 0
OC - Open Circuit
These are standard machine quantities, and are based upon a sub-transient level detail flux
model. All machine data shown above is mandatory for modeling the round rotor generator
properly.
Salient Pole Generator
The salient pole generator has the following parameters:
Parameter
Rated MVA
Rated Eff
Rated Speed
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
Rated PF
Ra
Xd
Xq
Xd
Xd = Xq
Xl
Tdo
Tdo
Tqo
E1
E2
S( E1 )
S( E2 )
H
D
Note:
Units
MVA
Percent
RPM
Volts LL
Amps
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
kW-Sec / kVA
pu
Armature Resistance
D-Axis Synchronous Reactance
Q-Axis Synchronous Reactance
D-Axis Transient Reactance
D & Q-Axis Sub-Transient Reactance
Stator Leakage Reactance
D-Axis Transient OC Time Constant
D-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
Q-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
First Voltage to Define Saturation
Second Voltage to Define Saturation
Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
OC - Open Circuit
Again, these are standard machine quantities, and are based upon a sub-transient level detail flux
model. All machine data shown above is mandatory for modeling the salient pole generator
properly.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 83
EasyPower Supplied Data

In the EasyPower Library, a host of actual detailed and typical machine data is specified, falling
in the category of Typical Data. Refer to this data to obtain typical values as well as to get a feel
for the range that can be expected for each parameter. To gain a bit more insight into the latter,
Figure 73 and Figure 74 are supplied below; these plot impedance and time constant data for
the round rotor generator data supplied in the EasyPower Library.
3.1.2 Excitation Systems

Defining an excitation system falls into similar methods as generator data, with some significant
differences. First, the model (type of excitation system) needs to match the type of controls being
used in the actual excitation system. Second, the model needs parameters that match the response
of the unit in the field.
With generators, due to construction practices, we basically have two synchronous types: round
rotor and salient pole. With excitation systems, unfortunately, we can have hundreds of different
model types, and then each can be tuned in an infinite number of ways. The parameters of an
excitation system are a blend of physical constants and variable tuning parameters, whereas
generators are all physical parameters based on construction. Older analog excitation systems use
potentiometers, jumpers, DIP switches, taps, etc. to tune the system. New digital excitation
systems allow digital settings of parameters in various ways.
In general, there are three methods for defining an excitation system.
Method 1 Match Model Diagram and Match Tests
To select a proper excitation system model, the first and best method (Method 1) to guarantee
simulation accuracy is to match the block diagram of the excitation system model with that
specified by the manufacturer, and then match response with actual field tests. Unfortunately, the
manufacturer often will not supply such a block diagram that is built for stability simulation
purposes, and field testing for generating stability simulation data is often not considered
appropriate use of money. However, this is the best approach.
Once the block diagram is matched, then the constants of the model need to be selected to tune
the model to match the response in the field. If you have not had a formal machine parameter
derivation performed on your units (where both the model and the parameters are specified to
match actual field tests of the generator and excitations system) then you must rely upon the
manufacturer to supply you those constants.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 84
Xq
3.000
3.000
2.500
2.500
2.000
2.000
Per Unit
Per Unit
Xd
1.500
1.500
1.000
1.000
0.500
0.500
0.000
0.000
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
MVA
1.000
1.000
0.900
0.900
0.800
0.800
0.700
0.700
0.600
0.600
Per Unit
Per Unit
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
X'q
X'd
0.500
0.500
0.400
0.400
0.300
0.300
0.200
0.200
0.100
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
0.0
180.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
MVA
MVA
X''d
X''q
1.000
1.000
0.900
0.900
0.800
0.800
0.700
0.700
0.600
0.600
Per Unit
Per Unit
100.0
MVA
0.500
0.500
0.400
0.400
0.300
0.300
0.200
0.200
0.100
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
MVA
80.0
MVA
Figure 73. Plot of Round Rotor Generator data in the EasyPower Library
Xd, Xq, Xd, Xq, Xd, Xq.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 85
RA
1.0000
0.020
0.9000
0.018
0.8000
0.016
0.7000
0.014
0.6000
0.012
Per Unit
Per Unit
XL
0.5000
0.010
0.4000
0.008
0.3000
0.006
0.2000
0.004
0.1000
0.002
0.0000
0.000
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
MVA
12.000
1.200
10.000
1.000
8.000
0.800
Per Unit
Per Unit
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
T'qo
T'do
6.000
0.600
4.000
0.400
2.000
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
0.0
180.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
MVA
MVA
T''qo
T''do
0.100
0.100
0.090
0.090
0.080
0.080
0.070
0.070
0.060
0.060
Per Unit
Per Unit
100.0
MVA
0.050
0.050
0.040
0.040
0.030
0.030
0.020
0.020
0.010
0.010
0.000
0.000
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
MVA
MVA
Figure 74. Plot of Round Rotor Generator data in the EasyPower Library
XL, RA, Tdo, Tqo, Tdo, Tqo.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 86
As an example to Method 1, we show Figure 75 below; an excitation system model supplied by

a manufacturer. The block diagram of the AVR (automatic voltage regulator) shows a series of
blocks with time constants and limits. This unit is digital. The generator for this excitation
system is also brushless. This then led us to choose an excitation system model that simulated the
blocks and limits of the AVR as closely as possible, with the addition of blocks to model the
brushless aspect of the generator. The model selected was the IEEE AC6A excitation system
shown in Figure 76.
This selection brings up an obvious shortcoming with the proper simulation of brushless
generators where we need to include field feedback effects in the excitation system model. This
is discussed in detail in the section on the IEEE AC6A excitation system model.
As can be seen in Figure 77, additional effort was put forth to match the actual field response of
the excitation system with the IEEE AC6A model. In the figure we see an almost exact match of
the field test response to the model simulation response for an open circuit step test.
Figure 75. Excitation system AVR (automatic voltage regulator) block diagram.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 87
VRef
VAMax
VT
1
1 sTR
1 sTK
KA
1 sTA
VT VR Max
1 sTC
1 sTB
1
sTE
VT VR Min
VAMin
I N 0.433
FEX 0.75 I
0.750 I N 1.000
FEX 1.732 1 I N
I N 0.750
EFD
FEX f I N
VE S E VE
FEX 1 0.577 I N
0.433 I N 0.750
VE
2
N
VH Max
1 sTJ
1 sTH
FEX 0
KH
IN
KE
VFE LIM
K C I FD
VE
KD
I FD
Figure 76. IEEE AC6A Excitation System Model.
1.06
Terminal Voltage in pu
1.04
1.02
0.98
VT Test
0.96
VT Sim
0.94
0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
Time Seconds
Figure 77. Simulation vs. Test for 10% Open Circuit Step Change in AVR Reference.
Method 2 Generic Model and Match Test

This then leads to Method 2 of selecting an excitation system model. As long as the primary
components are being simulated in the model, any model may be selected as long as its tuned
response matches the response of the actual field test. This has been a method used historically,
where many excitation systems were simulated using the standard IEEE Type 1 excitation
system model. To this day, many units simulated in the U.S. interconnected east coast simulation
case are done so with an IEEE Type 1 model which does not model specific detail of the
excitation system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 88
Method 3 Generic Model and Generic Data

Finally, it has been proven through experience that simulating some form of excitation system,
which has acceptable response, is always better and more accurate than performing a simulation
without any excitation system model at all. When excitation systems are commissioned and
maintained in the field, they are tuned to meet an industry standard response. The criteria for
response varies for the electrical systems that a particular unit is connected to, but the response
typically falls within a standard open-circuit overshoot and response time. Because of this, most
units are tuned well. Thus selection of an excitation system model, when no other information
may be obtained, can be performed using an excitation system model (with a typical tuning) that
appears to have the most important aspects of the installed system. The EasyPower Library
includes typical tunings for all supported excitation systems. This includes a slow, medium and
fast response based on pairing it with a round rotor generator with typical data. Though we
recommend simulating with only the model and data that match your system, you can get an idea
of system behavior by using the Library provided excitation system tunings.
3.1.3 Governor Systems

Governor system models simulate the power output of the prime mover as well as the governor
control action in response to a desired set-point and machine speed. Thus, the output of a
governor model is mechanical power. As with the excitation system models, the three methods
noted apply in exactly the same way.
3.1.4 Induction Motors

In EasyPower, the level of detail modeled in the induction motor model necessitates a level of
parameter detail that many may be unaccustomed to. A detailed flux model needs machine
impedances and time constants similar to that of a synchronous generator. To generate this data
from manufacturers performance data please refer to several papers written specifically for this
purpose:

3.1.5 Synchronous Motors

As noted for induction motors, in EasyPower, the level of detail modeled in the synchronous
motor model necessitates a level of parameter detail that many may be unaccustomed to. A
detailed flux model needs machine impedances and time constants similar to that of a
synchronous generator. To generate this data from manufacturers performance data please refer
to:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 89
3.1.6 Typical Inertia Constants

Typical inertia constants should only be used when doing sensitivity studies, or when there is
absolutely no way to obtain actual data. This data however must be used with great caution, and
several simulations should be performed with different values if typical data is used to discern
the impact of the typical values used.
The following inertia constant equations were supplied by Conrad St. Pierre. Listed below are
approximate motor and load inertia constants. These values do not include any motors which
have special designs for high inertia loads and starting torques. In general, the motor inertia tend
to follow the standard motors. Approximate values are:
Synchronous Motors:
H = 0.202 pf HP
Small Slow Speed Engine Drive Generators:
H = 0.35 kVA
Squirrel Cage Induction Motors:
H = 0.14 HP
Wound Rotor Induction Motors:
H = 0.28 HP
0.15
0.15
0.15
(kV)0.07
(kV)0.07
(kV)0.07
0.15
(kV)0.07
The following table is supplied from a list of motors from a generating facility.
Table 5. Actual induction motor data for large generating facility (H is in last column).
Rated
HP
4500
350
300
800
250
Rated
Rated
Volts Efficiency
4000
0.940
4000
0.920
4160
0.927
4000
0.937
4000
0.915
Rated
PF
0.880
0.890
0.902
0.898
0.875
Rated
KVA
Calc
4056.6
318.8
267.5
709.0
232.8
Rated
Amps
Calc
585.5
46.0
37.1
102.3
33.6
Rated
Amps
580.0
46.0
38.0
104.0
34.0
Rated
RPM
1190
1775
1770
3561
1775
Synch
RPM
1200
1800
1800
3600
1800
Rated
Slip
Calc
(pu)
0.008333
0.013889
0.016667
0.010833
0.013889
Locked Locked
Locked
Pull
Rotor
Rotor Locked
Rotor
Out
Current Current Rotor
Torque
Torque
(Amps)
(pu)
PF (Mech pu) (Mech pu)
3480
6.000 0.150
0.60
1.75
282
6.130 0.320
1.00
2.00
208
5.474 0.310
1.21
2.27
543
5.221 0.219
0.80
2.60
201
5.912 0.330
1.00
2.00
Total
Inertia
Inertia
H
WR2 (kW-secs)
(lbs-ft)2
KVA
5000.00
0.4014
168.60
0.3833
115.56
0.3112
149.10
0.6134
138.60
0.4313
250
600
900
7000
2000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
0.915
0.930
0.930
0.961
0.946
0.875
0.855
0.890
0.900
0.880
232.8
562.7
810.8
6035.3
1791.5
33.6
81.2
117.0
871.1
258.6
34.0
81.0
117.0
870.0
259.0
1775
3565
1180
3575
1785
1800
3600
1200
3600
1800
0.013889
0.009722
0.016667
0.006944
0.008333
201
407
800
5220
1554
5.912
5.025
6.838
6.000
6.000
0.330
0.218
0.300
0.150
0.150
1.00
0.80
1.00
0.70
0.70
2.00
2.50
2.50
2.25
2.00
261.00
115.90
1040.00
3095.00
1050.00
0.8123
0.6021
0.4108
1.5075
0.4295
400
800
600
500
250
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
0.910
0.919
0.931
0.935
0.915
0.870
0.780
0.870
0.878
0.884
376.8
832.2
552.4
454.2
230.5
54.4
120.1
79.7
65.6
33.3
53.2
120.0
80.0
66.0
32.5
1760
322
1180
3570
3570
1800
327
1200
3600
3600
0.022222
0.016112
0.016667
0.008333
0.008333
355
660
480
370
200
6.673
5.500
6.000
5.606
6.154
0.280
0.200
0.300
0.258
0.300
1.00
0.70
1.10
0.91
0.80
2.10
2.00
2.25
2.40
1.75
418.72
12525.00
760.00
240.00
92.50
0.7918
0.3589
0.4406
1.5490
1.1765
200
150
250
155
200
460
440
460
460
460
0.950
0.925
0.936
0.925
0.962
0.940
0.890
0.865
0.900
0.895
167.0
135.9
230.3
138.8
173.2
209.6
178.3
289.0
174.3
217.4
209.0
178.0
289.0
169.0
218.0
3575
1770
1180
1780
1785
3600
1800
1200
1800
1800
0.006944
0.016667
0.016667
0.011111
0.008333
1459
1133
1707
992
1445
6.981
6.365
5.907
5.870
6.628
0.259
0.420
0.300
0.200
0.200
1.44
1.10
1.73
1.10
1.44
2.82
2.00
2.30
2.00
2.40
64.60
56.80
238.20
48.12
70.00
1.1370
0.3012
0.3313
0.2526
0.2961
150
250
150
200
440
460
440
440
0.930
0.925
0.930
0.962
0.880
0.830
0.880
0.895
136.7
242.8
136.7
173.2
179.3
304.8
179.3
227.3
179.0
295.0
180.0
242.0
3560
1175
1775
1770
3600
1200
1800
1800
0.011111
0.020833
0.013889
0.016667
1085
2065
1133
1445
6.061
7.000
6.294
5.971
0.200
0.450
0.420
0.200
1.10
1.10
1.10
0.70
2.00
2.00
2.30
1.44
252.20
165.60
47.20
2.40
5.3788
0.2166
0.2503
0.0100
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 90
3.2 Performing Motor Starting Simulations

Motor starting simulations are one of the most common tasks performed by industrial power
engineers that do power system simulations. The abundant use of motors, and thus a need to start
them, can clearly be seen. Because of this, fast double-click actions have been included in
EasyPower DS so that such simulations can be performed quickly and easily.
To perform a motor starting simulation, you must first have a motor defined with a dynamic
model (induction or synchronous) selected, and a load model specified for starting and running
load. All parameters for the model must be defined to properly simulate your motor. Refer to
these papers in regards to getting to this point:

As an alternative to performing an induction motor derivation for parameters, you can select a
motor from the EasyPower model library that comes close to matching the motor you desire to
model. Note that using this data, however, is only an approximation of what your actual motor
may do. We recommend this method when:
You desire to do preliminary or investigative simulations with typical data.
You have no other alternative, as the manufacturer is unable to supply you with adequate
motor performance data. In this case, we suggest using several different motors, to
bracket your simulations (to define the extremes of what could be expected).
3.2.1 Example Data Setup

As noted just above, we will not supply the details here of working with motor performance data,
and deriving motor parameters. Instead, we will use existing data in the EasyPower Library for
our example. This data was actually generated from a detailed review of manufacturers motor
data and a parameter derivation using EasyPowers Induction Motor Parameter Derivation Tool
supplied with TMS and DS (located within the Motor Data Dialog).
Our example system is shown in Figure 78. That oneline shows a motor that has just been added
to our small system, with no data yet defined.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 91
BUS-1
12
kV
UTIL-1
100000 MVA
150 (X/R)
100000 MVA
150 (X/R)
BUS-2
0.
48
kV
TX-1
1 MVA
12 - 0.48 kV
5.75%
BL-1
M-1
** HP
Induction
16.7%
Figure 78. Oneline of small system for motor starting example.
Double click on the motor to open the Motor Data Dialog as seen in Figure 79. Change the
motor HP to 100 HP.
Figure 79. Set motor HP.
Click on the Short Circuit tab, and click on Calculate to fill in the X/R Ratio.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 92
Figure 80. Set default motor X/R.
Now click on the Stability tab to define a DS Model for the motor. The page will look like the
left one in Figure 81. Click on Enable Motor Model to tell the DS Engine that a model is
defined, so that the DS Model can be defined.
Figure 81. Enable DS motor model.
Select a motor manufacturer from the Library.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 93
Figure 82. Select motor manufacturer.
Select a motor type. Since we entered 100 HP, and left the motor at 1800 RPM, select IM-1001800-B-G. This is a 100 HP induction motor with an 1800 RPM synchronous speed, NEMA
Design B and NEMA Code Letter G.
Figure 83. Select motor type.
Click on the Library import button:

Library Import
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 94
This will import the data from the Library into the Motor Data Dialog. You will be prompted to
overwrite power factor and efficiency in the Motor Data Dialog data in the Specification tab.
Click on Yes, since the DS Motor is being used as our total definition for the motor. If you
have entered other data that corresponds to the actual motor nameplate, we suggest clicking on
No. However, note that you now have inconsistency between the DS Model data machine
parameters and the defined PF and Efficiency. If you enter the Parameter Derivation tool with
the inconsistency, you could create a totally erroneous derivation. When performing a derivation,
all motor parameters must be consistent.
Induction Motor Parameter Derivation
Figure 84. Click Yes to overwrite PF and Efficiency.
After clicking Yes in the prompt, the Motor Data Dialog will appear like that in Figure 85.
The red highlighted cells (denoting missing data) are now gone, and all fields in the Motor
spreadsheet are filled in from the Library.
Figure 85. Motor Data Dialog after clicking yes.
The motors torque vs. speed curve can be reviewed by clicking on the Induction Motor
Parameter Derivation button. The tool will display as shown in Figure 86, when the Step 2 tab
is selected. Click on Cancel to exit the review so that no changes are made to the motor
parameters. During review, the window can be resized to improve viewing.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 95
Figure 86. Induction Motor Parameter Derivation Tool in Step 2 for motor review.
By default, the time at which the motor transitions from Starting to Running Load is 200
seconds. This large value basically forces the motor to only use the Starting Load for its
simulation. If you have a load transition that you wish to model in your simulation, modify Ld
Trans Str (Load Transfer Start Time) and Ld Tran Rmp (Load Transfer Ramp Time) to suit your
simulation needs.
Scroll the Motor spreadsheet down near to the end, and modify these values to 3.0 and 0.1
respectively. This will produce a transfer from Starting to Running Load 3.0 seconds after the
motor start, and the load will ramp from Starting to Running in 0.1 seconds.
Figure 87. Scroll down and set Ld Trans Str and Ld Tran Rmp.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 96
Note that by default, DS Motor Models will use the Speed Squared load model for the Starting
and Running Load. This is done on purpose, so that a quick simulation can be performed without
entering any detailed load torque data. The Speed Squared load model is also the model of
choice for many types of fans and pumps. If this model is not accurate for your motor, then use
the Torque vs. Speed Load Model, and enter your own curve.
Click on Model under the Starting Load Model, and select the T vs. Speed model. A
spreadsheet with one row will appear. Fill in the first row as shown in Figure 88. A second row
will automatically be added. Continue filling in the spreadsheet until it matches Figure 88.
Figure 88. Select and define torque vs. speed starting load.
Click on OK to close the Motor Data Dialog. All of our additions and changes will be saved
back into the Database. To save this new data, click on the Save button, or File / Save. The
oneline is now updated (Figure 89), and shows us that we have DS data in our motor, by
drawing a rotor in the middle of the motor symbol. This allows you a quick assessment of
whether or not a motor is DS ready.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 97
UTIL-1
100000 MVA
150 (X/R)
100000 MVA
150 (X/R)
12
BUS-1
kV
TX-1
1 MVA
12 - 0.48 kV
5.75%
0.
BUS-2
48
kV
BL-1
M-2
100 HP
Induction
16.7%
Figure 89. Oneline after click on Motor Data Dialog OK button.
3.2.2 Starting the Motor

Enter the DS Focus by clicking on the DS Focus button.
DS Focus
Upon entry, the system will be solved with a power flow, and will display as shown in Figure
90 (if the DS Option Automatically Arrange Windows is checked).
To start the motor, we first need to take it offline (common sense dictates that the motor must be
offline to start it). This is done by right mouse clicking on the motor breaker, and selecting
Open and Resolve PF (Figure 91). This will open the breaker, and resolve the power flow
using the standard swing bus power flow used in the Power Flow focus, so that new initial
conditions are created for this new network condition. All conversions back into the VCN
network solution mode are made, and all model initializations are completed as well.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 98
Figure 90. First entry into the DS Focus.
Figure 91. Open the motors breaker with right mouse context action.
Conditions after resolving are now presented as seen in Figure 92. This pre-event power flow
represents conditions just before the motor is started, and is used to perform the complete
initialization of the DS Motor and Load model.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 99
1.
00
0
0.
0.000
0.000
(0.000) (-0.000)
BUS-2
UT IL-1
12.000
T X-1
0.
@
1.
00
0
BUS-1
0.000
(0.000)
0.480
OPEN
M-2
Figure 92. Updated conditions after opening motor breaker.
To produce a simulation with a convenient time scale, change the simulation run time by opening
the DS Options Dialog, under Tools on the menu (Figure 93). Set the Simulation End Time
under the Double Click Control tab and Breaker or Switch to Open and Breaker or Switch to
Close to 5.0 seconds. Click on OK to update the settings and close the dialog.
Figure 93. Change DS Options to 5 second simulation for any breaker action.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 100
To start the motor, double click on the motor breaker. This activates a simulation where the
motor breaker is toggled closed. The simulation performed is defined in the DS Options dialog
Double Click Control tab to first run steady-state to 1.0 second (Delay Time Length), then
close the motor breaker (the one we double clicked on), and then to finally run to 5.0 seconds.
The results of the simulation (Figure 94) are updated in the DS Plot Window, Oneline Window
and Message Log Window. The plot is shown from beginning to end for a set of default auto
channels as defined in the section on the DS Plot Window in this manual. Auto plot channels
supply fast results with minimal setup. The Oneline Window shows the network conditions at the
end of the simulation. The Message Log Window lists all messages logged by various models
and script commands.
Figure 94. Conditions after left mouse double click on motor breaker.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 101
3.2.3 Defining Plots

If the default auto plot channels are not adequate, specific values to plot can be defined
independently. To do this, click on the Define Plots button.
Define Plots
The Define Plots Dialog as shown in Figure 95 will appear. In this case, no plots have
previously been assigned, and so it is blank. To define plot channels, there are two methods, both
of which are discussed in detail in the section on Plot Definitions. This example uses Method 2,
where quick selections can be made directly off the oneline.
Figure 95. Define Plots Dialog.
Once the Define Plots Dialog is open, plot definitions can be made by right clicking on
equipment, and selecting the value to plot. In Figure 96, the bus has been right clicked on, and
per unit voltage selected. The plot channel in row 1 will automatically be filled in, as shown in
Figure 97.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 102
Figure 96. Right mouse click context action on motor bus.
Figure 97. Plot Define Dialog after selecting Plot Voltage (pu).
Continue defining motor channels by right clicking on the motor, and selecting Plot Current
(pu) as shown in Figure 98, with results to the Plot Definition Dialog shown in Figure 99.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 103
Figure 98. Right mouse click context action on motor.
Figure 99. Plot Define Dialog after selecting Plot Current (pu).
Continue further with Motor Speed, Motor Torque and Load Torque to fully populate the
Plot Definitions Dialog as shown in Figure 100.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 104
Figure 100. Plot Define Dialog after three more motor parameter selections.
Now, close the Plot Definitions Dialog by clicking on OK, and save the plot definitions by
clicking on the Save button. All definitions made are saved with the EasyPower database.
Finally, to re-run the motor starting simulation with the new plot definitions, click on Reset
Simulation, and then double-click on the motor breaker. The results for our new plot definitions
can be seen by clicking on the Plot 1 tab in the DS Plot Window, as shown in Figure 101.
Comparing Figure 94 and Figure 101, we see that by monitoring the bus voltage instead of the
motor terminal voltage (which starts at zero volts when offline), we can see the resulting voltage
dip more readily.
Figure 101. Conditions after double click on motor breaker, and selecting Plot 1 tab.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 105
3.3 Performing a Bus Fault Simulation

Simulations that involve a fault in the network are one of the most common simulations when
performing dynamic stability work. This is due to the many effects that faults can have on a
power system.
Similar to a motor start, running a bus fault simulation has been assigned to a fast double-click
action for performing simulations with little set up. This method of performing a bus fault is
discussed here in detail.
3.3.1 Example System

One common effect of a bus fault is a machine acceleration action that results when depressed
voltages occur. In such a condition, a depressed system voltage on a generator bus can cause a
reduction in delivered power from the generator (as power is the product of voltage and current
at the appropriate angle). When the generator cannot deliver that power, and the prime mover
continues to supply mechanical power (unhindered, as the governor response is comparatively
slow), the unit accelerates, causing the angle of the machine to move away from the pre-fault
angle. The longer the fault duration, the more the machine angle changes. And so, upon removal
of the fault, the system dynamically responds to the angle excursion, attempting to return to a
condition where machine angles and power transfer balance.
Our example system to illustrate how to perform a bus fault simulation is shown in Figure 102.
For our example, we are going to fault BUS-2 three times, with increasing fault duration. Since
we are performing bus faults using fast double-click actions, the fault will be applied and cleared
according to settings in the DS Options. We are thus simulating a fault on BUS-2 that is located
on a short feed with no load. The fault is cleared according to the settings in the DS Options.
GEN-1
1000 MVA
18.6%
31.5%
10%
BH-1
7 MW
3 MVAR
kV
BUS-2
BH-3
12
kV
BH-2
12
BUS-1
GEN-2
10 MVA
18.6%
31.5%
10%
BH-5
BH-4
1-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, 9000', [Conduit]
Figure 102. Bus fault example system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 106
Our example system is composed of two generators separated by a long cable. A load is also
included. GEN-1 is a very large generator simulating the utility system. It is 1000 MVA and has
a very large inertia (H = 1000). GEN-2 is a 10 MVA Gas Turbine. Both GEN-1 and GEN-2 are
using the same generator, exciter and governor data, with the only differences being size and
inertia. The data for this system is shown in Figure 103, Figure 104 and Figure 105.
The large inertia in GEN-1 will keep speed from having a significant change, and thus from
having an impact on machine angle. By definition, the angle of a machines rotor is the integral
(or accumulation) of speed. If we look at the system from a synchronous perspective (where
rotor angle is fixed, and always returning to the same deflection on each rotation) then speed
deviation away from synchronous speed will cause angle excursions.
Figure 103. GEN-1 Data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 107
Figure 104. GEN-2 Data.
Figure 105. Cable data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 108
3.3.2 Perform First Bus Fault

To begin, enter the DS Focus with the example system. Before running the simulation, we
suggest defining plot channels according to the settings shown in Figure 107. If you have not
learned how to set up plot definitions, refer to Section 2.11 Plot Definitions in this manual to
learn how to specify them. In addition, modify DS Options in the Plot Output tab so that all
results are copied onto the Windows clipboard for immediate pasting into Excel (Figure 108).
Figure 106. System after entry to DS Focus.
Figure 107. Plot channels defined.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 109
Figure 108. DS Option change to copy all results to Windows Clipboard.
After making sure there are no initialization errors, and after reviewing the initial power flow for
correctness, double click on BUS-2. According to the definitions in the DS Options, the activated
simulation will run steady-state for 1 Second, fault BUS-2 for 0.1 Seconds, clear the fault and
then run the simulation to 6.0 seconds. The results for this simulation are presented in Figure
109.
In Figure 109, note how the DS Engine automatically assigns bus voltage and bus fault current
as smart channels for the DS Plot Window Auto Plot tab. Thus, applying a bus fault will
generate a plot even if no plot definitions have been made.
Click on the Plot 1 tab in the DS Plot Window (Figure 110) to review the results plotted for our
plot definitions. Though not immediately discernible, notice that the machine angle increased
during the fault. After the fault is removed, the rotor angle quickly begins to turn around, moving
towards a new settling point to balance the system power transfer.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 110
Figure 109. Results after double-click action on BUS-2.
Figure 110. Results after first double-click action on BUS-2, looking at Plot 1.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 111
Now, open Excel, select the upper left cell (A1), and click on Paste to insert the results of our
simulation. The results include all plot channels defined, as well as the auto plot channels.
According to our settings in the DS Options dialog, the number of points per column will be at or
under 3000. Scrolling the window down will reveal 2405 points.
Figure 111. First paste action in Excel.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 112
3.3.3 Perform Second Bus Fault

For our next bus fault, we will increase the fault time to 0.2 seconds. Open the DS Options
dialog, and under the Double-Click Control tab, and under the Bus to Fault group, change the
Fault Time Length to 0.2 Seconds.
Figure 112. Increase fault length to 0.2 Seconds in DS Options.
To perform our second bus fault, simply double click on BUS-2. The results of this action are
shown in Figure 113.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 113
Figure 113. Results after second double-click action on BUS-2, looking at Plot 1.
As in our first fault run, go to Excel (where we already have our previous results), and add the
results of our second bus fault simulation. Select cell H1 and click on paste. The results will look
like those in Figure 114.
Figure 114. Second paste action in Excel.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 114
3.3.4 Perform Third Bus Fault

For our third and last bus fault, we will increase the fault time to 0.3 seconds. Open the DS
Options dialog, and under the Double-Click Control tab, and under the Bus to Fault group,
change the Fault Time Length to 0.3 Seconds.
Figure 115. Increase fault length to 0.3 Seconds in DS Options.
To perform our third and final bus fault, simply double click on BUS-2. The results of this action
are shown in Figure 116.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 115
Figure 116. Results after third double-click action on BUS-2, looking at Plot 1.
As in our first and second fault run, go to Excel (where we already have our two previous
results), and add the results of our third bus fault simulation. Select cell O1 and click on Paste.
The results will look like those in Figure 117.
Figure 117. Third paste action in Excel.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 116
3.3.5 Critical Clearing Review

Now that we have the results of our three fault cases, it would be prudent to overlay the results so
that we can assess the impact on our system. To do this in Excel, click on the column headers as
shown in Figure 118. Then, click on the Chart Wizard button to bring up the dialog shown in
Figure 119.
Figure 118. Selection of columns of data for plotting machine angle.
Figure 119. Excel prompt after clicking on Chart Wizard in Excel.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 117
Select the XY Plot option, and lower right method of plotting shown in Figure 119. Click on
Finish to complete and view the plot. After a bit of formatting, color changes and column
header changes, the result can look like the picture shown in Figure 120. Copying the actual
plot out of Excel and into this document, we get the Meta File plot as shown in Figure 121.
Figure 120. Results in Excel after some plot formatting and column header updates.
In Figure 121, we see an increasing angle excursion and dynamic swing with the increase in
fault time length. This response is typical, and shows that fault clearing time is essential to keep
systems stable.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 118
140.00
120.00
Angle (Degrees)
100.00
80.00
60.00
0.1 Sec
0.2 Sec
0.3 Sec
40.00
20.00
0.00
-20.00
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
Time (Seconds)
Figure 121. Excel plot copied into this document as Meta File.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 119
3.4 Step Testing an Excitation System

To step test the excitation system of a generator, after entering the DS Focus, double click on the
generator excitation symbol (see Figure 122) next to the generator.
Generator
Excitation
Symbol
Figure 122. Generator Excitation Symbol.
If we use the same system documented in the Bus Fault section just above, results will be as
shown in Figure 123. In the simulation, we double clicked on the GEN-2 excitation symbol.
Note that an auto plot is generated showing machine terminal voltage, machine field voltage, and
the excitation systems AVR voltage.
Figure 123. Results of excitation system step test for GEN-2.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 120
The results of an excitation system step test are defined under the following conditions:
Generator with excitation system is isolated, and in an open circuit condition.
Voltage conditions are set to match the pre-step terminal voltage setting defined in DS
Options.
Simulation delay and length are specified in DS Options.
The amount of step to the reference voltage is also defined in percent in the DS Options.
All prime mover affects are forced not to move.
3.5 Step Testing a Governor System

To step test the governor system of a generator, after entering the DS Focus, simply double click
on the generator governor symbol (see Figure 124) next to the generator.
Generator
Governor
Symbol
Figure 124. Generator Governor Symbol.
If we use the same system documented in the Bus Fault section just above, results will be as
shown in Figure 125. In the simulation, we double clicked on the GEN-2 excitation symbol.
Note that an auto plot is generated which plots machine speed and prime mover mechanical
power.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 121
Figure 125. Results of governor system step test for GEN-2.
The results of a governor system step test are defined under the following conditions:
Generator with governor system is isolated onto a single bus system with a load.
Voltage conditions are forced at rated terminal voltage throughout the simulation. This
keeps voltage changes from affecting the loading conditions on the machine.
Machine and governor system power conditions are set to match conditions specified in
DS Options. This is accomplished using the single bus load and then initializing the
models normally.
Simulation delay and length are specified in DS Options.
The amount of step change to the load is also defined in percent in the DS Options.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 122
3.6 Determining Machine Saturation

Saturation is used in EasyPower DS in many places. These include:
Round Rotor Synchronous generator saturation.
Salient Pole Synchronous generator saturation.
Induction motor saturation.
Synchronous motor saturation.
Excitation system exciter saturation.
Thus, determining what values to use for each of these conditions is important. As noted, for
each of the models where saturation is included, four values are typically needed. These are, and
represent:
E1
First per unit voltage off sat curve, typically 1.0
E2
Second per unit voltage off sat curve, typically 1.2
S(E1) Per unit saturation at E1
S(E2) Per unit saturation at E2
To determine these values from manufacturers performance curves, we have supplied an

example curve in Figure 126, and two equations. Use this method to define values of saturation
in all of the EasyPower DS Models.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 123
1.2
E Term
1.0
B1.2
A1.2
B1.0
Field Current
A1.0
Figure 126. Generator saturation curve.
E1 1.00
E2 1.20
EasyPower LLC 2016
S E1 S 1.0
A1.0 B1.0
B1.0
S E2 S 1.2
A1.2 B1.2
B1.2
Page 124
3.7 Performing a Line-to-Ground Fault Simulation

The DS Engine is a positive sequence simulation engine that simulates only the balanced nature
of a power system. Therefore, a direct application of a Line-to-Ground fault is not possible.
However, excellent results can be obtained by using a common method used across the industry
that simulates the same system impact as a line to ground fault from a positive sequence
perspective. That method employs application of a restricted fault to generate a positive sequence
voltage depression of 67% at the point of the fault.
To apply this method, first add a temporary motor to the bus you desire to fault in the Database.
We suggest a small 1 HP motor. Next, enter power flow and solve the case. Double click on the
motor to do a motor start, set its scaling to 0.0%, set the locked rotor multiplier to 1.0, and set the
starting power factor to 1.0%. Make sure the kVA/HP is also set to 1.0. Next, set the motor HP to
near the value of the upstream source kVA rating. If, for example, the upstream transformer is
2500 kVA, set the HP to 2500. Push the motor start Go button. The voltage on the bus will solve
to a new value. Keep iteratively increasing or decreasing the motor HP until the bus voltage
reaches 0.67 pu. When you reach that value, you have now determined the amount of load
impact impedance that is necessary to simulate a line-to-ground fault in the positive sequence.
To convert the motor start values to reactive ohms (we are assuming the fault is purely reactive, a
good and reasonable assumption), use the following equations:
Z Base
Base kVLL
System MVA Base
Ohms
Motor HP
X Fault
Z Base Ohms
System Base kVA
For example, in the EasyPower sample case Bigger, use the motor on bus SWG-5. The bus is
4160 V and is supplied by a 1.0 MVA upstream transformer. From the base voltage equation, we
get:
Z Base
Base kVLL
System MVA Base
4.16
10
1.73 Ohms
Now, entering the power flow, and using the motor on the bus to do iterative motor starts (as
described just above), we find 6100 HP needed to drop the voltage to around 67%. Figure 127
shows the Temporary Motor Data Dialog, and Figure 128 shows results on the oneline for both
pre and post motor starting.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 125
MCC
-5
.7
@
pu
538.899 A
201.670 A
324.854 A
MCC
-6
.0
@
pu
0.
67
1
227.167 A
0.160 MW
0.068 MVAR
-6
.2
@
pu
0.
66
7
227.167 A
-1
2.
@
pu
0.
90
4
324.854 A
0.092 MW
0.064 MVAR
538.901 A
-5
.9
@
0.030 MW
3.047 MVAR
MSHp = 6100
MSPF = 1%
MCC
-7.2%
325 / 350 A
0.310 MW
0.132 MVAR
pu
pu
201.671 A
-1
1.
8
MCC
0.179 MW
0.125 MVAR
BL-9
MOTOR GRP
0.
90
9
770.520 A
6
-1
1.
@
0.
91
1
pu
0.388 MW
0.240 MVAR
BL-10
10.1%
771 / 700 A
MOTOR GRP
0.
67
7
SWG-5
BL-11
BL-9
770.518 A
288.285 A
BL-10
0.
67
2
BL-11
BL-12
0.
91
9
pu
BL-12
SWG-5
288.286 A
5779.255 A
-1
1.
1649.319 A
Figure 127. Temporary motor data for motor starting.
MCC
MCC
0.228 MW
0.089 MVAR
0.117 MW
0.046 MVAR
Figure 128. Oneline results for Bigger, Pre-Start Left, Post-Start Right.
Using the above equation:
Motor HP
6100
X Fault
Z Base
1.73 10.56 Ohms
10000
System Base kVA
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 126
Now, to simulate a line-to-ground fault in the DS focus on bus SWG-5, simply apply the fault
using zero ohms of resistance and 10.56 Ohms of reactance. If you plot the SWG-5 voltage
during the simulation, you should see a voltage depression down to around 67% during the fault.
As a practical matter, if you used a temporary motor on a bus to generate XFault per the method
defined here, dont forget to remove the motor you just added to your system. It is a temporary
motor only used to help you get the equivalent short circuit impedance that simulates the line-toground fault impact to the positive sequence network.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 127
3.8 ATS Switching for Emergency Power

Automatic transfer on loss of power is used extensively around the world. And so for EasyPower
users, simulating such behavior is central to the reason why the DS feature was added to the
software. To facilitate making these simulations as easy and accurate as possible, the EasyPower
DS Engine includes an ATS model that automatically senses loss of power on its Normal source,
and transfers to an Emergency source. Of course, the detailed induction motor flux model, auto
contactor drop-out, transformer inrush model, quick plot definitions and scripting add even more
power and accuracy to an already complete set of simulation capabilities.
3.8.1 The Backup Generator

In the DS Engine, no generator spin-up capability is included. This may be added as a feature in
the future; however, simply having the generator on line on the Emergency source, and waiting
to transfer into it, is completely acceptable. And so, since the generator is in an isolated condition
before transfer, it needs to be specified in the Power Flow as a Swing source. Review of the
generator data below will confirm this.
Now, simulating the spin-up of an emergency generator is actually not that difficult, given
additional development effort is expended for this. It does, however, necessitate:
Additional automatic control similar to that which applies the field for a starting
synchronous motor.
Starting the engine, and simulating the details of a diesel startup. This would most likely
require the addition of a motor torque vs. speed characteristic, to properly simulate the
spin up of the combined generator and engine inertia.
A pass or fail check on whether the generator is ready.
Again, all of this is possible in a dynamic simulation; however the need for this detail is not that
essential for simulating the response of the system, since load should be transferred onto the
emergency generator when it is ready. Controls that might fail to bring up the generator will fall
into a level of detail rarely (if ever) simulated in a dynamic simulation. In reality, these controls
and the generator will either succeed or fail. To simulate a failed generator start, simply simulate
a case with no transfer to a generator (i.e. take the generator offline). To simulate a successful
generator start, have the generator online and ready, in a condition ready to receive load.
3.8.2 Example System and Data

To illustrate a simulation with automatic transfer action, the system shown in Figure 129 was
assembled. Data for each of the equipment items is supplied in Figure 130 to Figure 134
below. This includes the emergency generator, motors M-1 and M-2, transformer TX-2,
contactor BL-7, and the ATS. For this simulation we have included the following detail:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 128
Auto transfer of the ATS. ATS will only transfer from Normal to Emergency (left to
right). Time to transfer, upon loss of the Normal source, is about 4.75 Seconds.
Auto contactor drop-out action on motor M-2. This contactor will drop out when the
voltage drops below 75% for 0.1 Seconds. Our script restarts this motor at 7.0 Seconds.
Transformer inrush action at 6 times FLA on TX-2. When TX-2 is re-energized, it draws
inrush current, which impacts the voltage response of the generator.
12
kV
UTIL-1
10 MVA
15 (X/R)
10 MVA
15 (X/R)
UTIL
FS-1
EMERG GEN
0.5 MVA
18.6%
31.5%
5%
GEN
2-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, 200', [Conduit]
48
kV
0.
BL-4
BL-3
BL-5
0.
MAIN
48
kV
TX-1
750 kVA
12 - 0.48 kV
5%
BL-6
BL-11
2-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, 200', [Conduit]
5 kW
3 kVAR
48
BL-2
0.
LOAD
kV
2-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, 200', [Conduit]
BL-7
BL-10
M-2
50 HP
Induction
16.7%
125 kW
100 kVAR
0.
20
kV
TX-2
50 kVA
0.48 - 0.208 kV
3%
BL-1
OFFICE
BL-9
20 kW
15 kVAR
BL-8
M-1
15 HP
Induction
16.7%
Figure 129. Oneline of system with ATS.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 129
Figure 130. EMERG GEN data.
Figure 131. TX-2 stability data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 130
Figure 132. ATS stability data.
Figure 133. Motor M-2 data.
Figure 134. Motor M-1 Data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 131
In addition to the data definitions, once DS Focus was entered, we also defined a script and
several plots channels in order to perform and view our simulation respectively. The plot
channels defined are shown in Figure 135, for plots 1 and 2. This includes the response of the
generator and the response of the load bus. If you have not learned how to set up plot definitions,
refer to section 2.11 Plot Definitions to learn how to specify them.
Figure 135. Plot Definitions.
The script for our simulation has been labeled Drop Source, and has been created using the
script editor (Figure 136). This script includes 0.5 seconds of steady-state, loss of the ATS
Normal source, running to 7.0 seconds after loss of the source, restarting motor M-2, and running
out to 10.0 Seconds. If you are unfamiliar with creating a script, refer to section 2.12 Scripts in
this manual for more information.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 132
Figure 136. Script Drop Source.
3.8.3 Running the Simulation

To run the simulation, first enter the DS Focus with the fully defined system. If you have not
made the plot definitions and script noted just above, do that first before running the simulation.
Click on the Save button to save your definitions.
Next, select the defined script Drop Source from the drop down list on the DS toolbar, as
shown in Figure 137. Once selected, click on the Run button. The result of the simulation will
be displayed, as shown in Figure 138.
Figure 137. Selection of script Drop Source.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 133
Figure 138. Results of dropping source, Plot 1.
In Figure 138, we see the response from channels defined in Plot 1. In Figure 139, we can also
see the results for the same simulation, but for definitions made in Plot 2. From both of these
plots we get insight into how the system responds after a loss of source and then automatic
transfer to the emergency generator.
In Figure 138, the generator terminal voltage shows a significant impact placed upon the
generator due to transformer inrush, application of static load (lighting and other loads), and the
20 HP motor start. The excitation system is shown to have an excellent response. The motor M-2
restart also impacts voltage, but not as severely as conditions just after the transfer.
In Figure 139, we see the LOAD bus terminal voltage, as well as the current fed into the bus.
The characteristic is similar to Figure 138, but with more detail of the entire event as seen by
the load.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 134
Figure 139. Results of dropping source, Plot 2.
3.9 DS Quick Advantage Methods

The following methods are immediately available to a user who has the EasyPower DS tool,
without any or with minimal addition of DS specific data (motor, generator, exciter, governor
data, etc.). Thus, having the DS tool will supply a host of features for improving your system
model, and gaining insight into your system models behavior without spending significant time
on data addition.
3.9.1 Steady State Run Checks All Device Pickups, Proper CT Selection
In one actual instance, an EasyPower user decided to enter the DS Focus simply to see how a
large case performed. That case was really meant only for an Arc Flash study. After entering and
running a simple 5 second steady run (which is supposed to do nothing but plot a flat line), a host
of protective devices tripped off, filling the message log. Further investigation showed that each
device that tripped had an improperly specified CT. Thus, DS can be one additional validation
check on your system model, without any DS specific data entered.
3.9.2 Symmetrical Fault Simulation Check on Protective Device Selectivity

You can use DS to do a quick check on simulated device selectivity. First, enter DS with your
case. Next, go to DS Options and set the Double Click action for bus faults to keep the fault on
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 135
past the time of the simulation. If the simulation end time is 6 seconds, set the fault time to 7
seconds. Finally, fault the applicable bus. DS will simulate the fault and all protective device
action to clear the fault. The Message Log will contain a detailed list of devices that operated and
the times at which they operated.
3.9.3 Balanced Switching Fault Voltage Depression Check

You can use DS to do a quick voltage depression check on your system. First, enter DS with
your case. Next, go to DS Options and set the Double Click action for bus faults to keep the fault
on past the time of the simulation. If the simulation end time is 6 seconds, set the fault time to 7
seconds. Finally, fault the applicable bus. After the simulation is complete, pan about on the
oneline to see the voltage conditions in your system. Note that the voltages shown are those that
would exist on your system immediately after the fault was applied before any machines (motors
or generators) respond to the fault.
3.9.4 Balanced Switching Fault Contactor Action Check

With a minimal amount of data additions, you can get a quick check on motor contactor action.
First, go to one contactor in your system, the stability tab, and enable the contactor with some
default settings. You can use the ones already there, or set the dropout voltage and time as you
think best represents your plant devices. Click on OK and exit the dialog. Now copy this
contactor to all of the contactors you want to check, making all of them use the same default
setting (use copy, and select all other contactors, and then paste). You may want to avoid saving
this case if you had other specific information in each of the contactors. Next, enter DS, and go
to DS Options. Set the Double Click action for bus faults to keep the fault on past the time of the
simulation. If the simulation end time is 6 seconds, set the fault time to 7 seconds. Finally, fault
the applicable bus. Your protective devices should clear that fault, and, if the clearing is delayed
or too long, you should see contactors trip on motors that satisfied both the voltage and time
setting of the contactor.
3.9.5 Fuse I2T Percentage to Blow to Predict Fuse Fatiguing

A feature unique to EasyPowers DS tool is I2T percentage of blow in a fuse. To use this feature,
have a system with a fuse or fuses properly specified in part of your system where other downstream devices should clear the fault first. Next, go to DS Options and set the Double Click
action for bus faults to keep the fault on past the time of the simulation. If the simulation end
time is 6 seconds, set the fault time to 7 seconds. Finally, fault a bus on the load side of all the
protective devices that will be seeing the fault current. After the simulation is complete, review
the Message Log and find the message for the fuse in question. You will see a percentage of I2T
that the fuse was exposed to during the fault. If the value is above 90%, you may have a
condition where the fuse may fatigue from exposure to the fault current. This may cause false
operation of the fuse later when exposed to later short circuit currents.
3.9.6 Check Relay Travel to Predict Device Racing

A feature unique to EasyPowers DS tool is percentage of travel in a relay. To use this feature,
have a system with a relay or relays properly specified in part of your system where other downstream device should clear the fault first. Next, go to DS Options and set the Double Click action
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 136
for bus faults to keep the fault on past the time of the simulation. If the simulation end time is 6
seconds, set the fault time to 7 seconds. Finally, fault a bus on the load side of all the protective
devices that will be seeing the fault current. After the simulation is complete, review the
Message Log and find the message for the relay in question. You will see a percentage of disk
travel that the relay was exposed to during the fault. If the value is above 90%, you may have a
condition where devices are racing and competing to clear the fault. A system designed with
conditions like this may make root cause determination more difficult, as the system may not
have been truly selective.
3.9.7 Real-Time Simulated Arc Flash to Symmetrical Currents

A feature unique to EasyPowers DS tool is simulation of real-time arc flash behavior. This has
most of its real application after dynamics data has been supplied for motors and generators, but
still supplies you with useful insight with no dynamics data at all. To use this feature, have a
system with protective devices already specified, just as you would do for an Arc Flash study.
Next, go to DS Options and set the Double Click action for bus faults to keep the fault on past
the time of the simulation. If the simulation end time is 6 seconds, set the fault time to 7 seconds.
Also, go to the Arc Flash tab, and check the box that says Use Arc Flash Simulation for Faults.
Finally, fault a bus at the location you desire to check. After the simulation is complete, review
the Message Log and find the list of messages at the end of the simulation that supply detail on
the arc flash results. These results will include arc flash energies and PPE for a simulation that
included real-time tripping behavior of any number of devices in your system. The Message Log
also shows you which devices tripped, and the times they tripped.
3.9.8 Balanced Switching Analysis for Switching of Any Device

If you desire to see the voltage and flow conditions in your system that occur immediately after a
switching even, you can by following this method. First, enter DS. Next, double click on the
breaker or switch that will create the change in the system. After the simulation is complete,
review the oneline to see how voltage and flows have changed in the system. These conditions
are also called To+ conditions, as they represent the system network condition immediately (+)
after the switching event at time To (time T-zero) before any dynamic behavior of machines have
manifested.
3.9.9 Run Power Flow with Motors Showing Correct PQ Loading

When a motor is partially loaded in real life, the kw loading drops while the var loading can
remain fairly constant. Thus, there is a reduction in power factor as mechanical loading
decreases. The Power Flow focus however does not do this, and simply scales watts and vars
down by the Power Flow scaling factor. To see how the actual motor responds to reduced
mechanical load, first add some generic data to your motor in the DS tab in the motor data
dialog. As best as you are able, try to match the data in the library with your actual motor HP etc.
Next, scale down the motor in the Power Flow tab. This is done using the Power Flow Tab
Scaling Factor. This will in essence only scale the mechanical loading of the motor down as the
pre-event power flow is solved upon entering DS Focus. Next, enter DS and simply look at the
results on the one line.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 137
3.10 Changing From Droop to Isochronous Mode

When an industrial has cogeneration as a significant energy source where it can be used in an
islanded mode, we find a number of automatic systems put in place to handle the transition. This
typically includes automatic and/or under and over-frequency load shedding as well as changing
a governor from droop to isochronous control model.
When in droop mode, a generating unit is set up to share loading on the grid for a significant
change in speed. When there is a large loss of generation on the grid for example, the speed of all
connected units will drop, and will trigger them to each contribute energy to make up for the
loss. Upon settling out after a disturbance, the speed of all units would have dropped (or
drooped) to a new condition depending upon the net generation loss and the droop setting
(controlling how each unit shares) on each gen. The grid wide automatic generation control
system would then send signals out to generators to increase their output to bring the grid speed
back up to nominal conditions.
When in isochronous mode, a generating unit is set up to control frequency, and keep it at the
nominal condition. This is not a sharing mode of control. Thus if more than one generator is
connected on an islanded system, only one will be put in isochronous mode. The rest will be put
in droop mode. Backup generators that are a single source of power are always specified to be in
isochronous control mode.
Cogeneration that is used in islanding conditions needs to be able to accommodate both modes of
operation. When connected to the grid, the unit needs to operate in droop mode so that it can
share under severe grid events, and when in an island condition needs to operate in isochronous
mode to hold frequency. Automatic controls perform this control mode change, and thus there is
a need to do the same in a dynamic simulation. The feature in the scripting tool that allows us to
make changes to model data at runtime gives us the ability to change a governors control mode
if it has this feature; i.e. the ability to simulate both droop and isochronous modes of control. The
two examples that follow illustrate this method.
3.10.1 Diesel Generator Example

In this example, we have a simple one bus system with a diesel generator, and the governor
system is specified to be the Woodward Diesel. The test system is show in Figure 140. The test
system also includes a base load of 500 kW as well as a load to add (and thus step load the unit)
of 200 kW.
We will use the scripting feature to both step load the generator as well as to make the governor
change its control mode from droop to isochronous. Thus, the unit is pre-set to operate in droop
mode initially, which is a common control mode setting when online with the grid prior to an
islanding event. For this example however, this unit is already isolated, and we have elected to
put it in droop mode to simple prove out correct behavior. Such an isolated test also makes
interpretation of results easier. Our script to run this test will be as shown here:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 138
Command
Equipment
Value 1
Value 2
Run to Time
Time
1.0
Close Switch
S-2
Run for Time
10.0
GEN-1
0.0
GEN-1
12
-1.0
GEN-1
0.0
Run for Time
10.0
This can be interpreted to mean:
Run the Simulation at Steady-State to 1.0 Second
Close Switch S-2 at 1.0 Second which Closes in the 200 kW Load
Run the Simulation for 10.0 Seconds
Set the Governor Parameter on Generator GEN-1 in Row 1 to 0.0
Set the Governor Parameter on Generator GEN-1 in Row 12 -1.0
Set the Governor Speed Setpoint on Generator GEN-1 to 0.0
Run the Simulation for Another 10.0 Seconds
0.
48
kV
GEN-1
1 MVA
12%
12%
12%
BUS-1
OPEN
L-1
0.5 MW
0 MVAR
L-2
0.2 MW
0 MVAR
Figure 140. Example system for diesel gen.
After entering DS Focus and running the script, we find that the message log has the output as
shown in Figure 141. The message log shows the response of the system model to the script
actions applied. Notice also how each parameter change is echoed with a Runtime response from
the actual model. Thus, we can get validation of whether or not our parameter change was
successful.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 139
Figure 141. Message Log for example diesel system.
The plotted results of the simulation are shown in Figure 142.
Figure 142. Plot output for example diesel system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 140
At 1.0 second, the fourth purple curve (kW) shows the 200 kW step-load to the unit. The third
green curve (Speed) shows the units quick response to the step load, and shows the unit settling
out at a speed below nominal; i.e. below its initial operating speed. This is due to droop.
At 11.0 seconds we initiate commands to put the governor in isochronous control mode, and the
plot of speed shows a step response and final settling out at nominal speed. Note that more than
just a simple setting to change control modes is required. To properly transfer into isochronous
control mode (and this is also the case for actual generating units in the field), we not only
change a control mode setting, but we also set the Speed Reference Setpoint to 0.0 pu, and we
change the droop setting from 0.05 to 0.0. Without these additional changes, the unit will not
respond correctly and pull the speed back up to nominal conditions.
The second red curve is the mechanical power output of the diesel engine. It shows the
mechanical power pickup needed after the load step at 1.0 second, and then shows the additional
pulse of power needed to get the unit up to nominal speed after switching to isochronous mode.
The first blue curve is the terminal voltage of the unit, and it shows the AVR responding by
always bringing the unit back to nominal voltage.
3.10.2 Gas Turbine Generator Example

In this example, we have used the same simple one bus system shown in Figure 140, but have
replaced the diesel governor with the Pratt & Whitney FT8 gas turbine model.
As before, we will use the scripting feature to both step load the generator as well as to make the
governor change its control mode from droop to isochronous. Our script to run this test will be as
shown here:
Command
Equipment
Value 1
Value 2
Run to Time
Close Switch
Time
1.0
S-2
Run for Time
10.0
GEN-1
0.0
GEN-1
14.0
GEN-1
1.0
GEN-1
1.0
Run for Time
10.0
This can be interpreted to mean:
Run the Simulation at Steady-State to 1.0 Second
Close Switch S-2 at 1.0 Second which Closes in the 200 kW Load
Run the Simulation for 10.0 Seconds
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 141
Set the Governor Speed Setpoint on Generator GEN-1 to 1.0
Run the Simulation for Another 10.0 Seconds
After entering DS Focus and running the script, we find that the message log has the output as
shown in Figure 143. As with the diesel generator example, the message log shows the response
of the system model to the script actions applied. Again, notice also how each parameter change
is echoed with a Runtime response from the actual model. Thus, we can get validation of
whether or not our parameter change was successful.
Figure 143. Message Log for example gas turbine system.
The plotted results of the simulation are shown in Figure 144.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 142
Figure 144. Plot output for example gas turbine system.
At 1.0 second, the fourth purple curve (kW) shows the 200 kW step-load to the unit. The third
green curve (Speed) shows the units quick response to the step load, and shows unit settling out
at a speed below nominal; i.e. below its initial operating speed. Again, this is due to the droop
setting in the governor model.
At 11.0 seconds we initiate commands to put the governor in isochronous control mode, and the
plot of speed shows a step response and final settling out at nominal speed. As before, note that
more than just a simple setting to change control modes is required. To properly transfer into
isochronous control mode for this governor (and this is also the case for actual generating units
in the field), we set the Speed Reference Setpoint to 1.0 pu, change the droop setting from 0.04
to 0.0, and change two other settings (Kpt and Tpt) which alter the tuning of the governor.
Without these additional changes, the unit will not respond correctly and pull the speed back up
to nominal conditions.
The second red curve is the mechanical power output of the gas turbine. It shows the mechanical
power pickup needed after the load step at 1.0 second, and then shows the additional pulse of
power needed to get the unit up to nominal speed.
The first blue curve is the terminal voltage of the unit, and it shows the AVR responding by
always bringing the unit back to nominal voltage.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 143
4.0 Models
As noted in the first section of this document, dynamic models operate in a modular behavior,
where they respond to input and output. In EasyPower, all DS models are built into the DS
Engine, and then interact via terminal conditions (generators, motors, excitation systems) and
network conditions (protective devices). As noted earlier, models available in the EasyPower DS
Engine are:
Generator Models
Round Rotor Flux Synchronous

PV1G - Photovoltaic Array and Inverter
WT4G - Wind Turbine Generator and Inverter
Excitations System Models
Basler AVC1
IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type AC1A
IEEE Type AC2
IEEE Type AC2A
IEEE Type AC3A
IEEE Type AC4A
IEEE Type AC5A
IEEE Type AC6A
IEEE Type AC7B
IEEE Type AC8B
IEEE Type DC1A
IEEE Type DC2A
IEEE Type DC3A
IEEE Type DC4B
IEEE Type ST1A
IEEE Type ST2
IEEE Type ST2A
IEEE Type ST3A
IEEE Type ST4B
IEEE Type ST5B
IEEE Type ST6B
IEEE Type ST7B
IEEE Type AC8B
Inverter Q Control (for WT4G and PV1G models only)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 144
STAMFORD 1
Governor System Models
Cummins Diesel 1
Gas Turbine
Gas Turbine 2
Hydro
IEEE Hydro 2
IEEE Hydro 3
IEEE Steam
Steam Turbine
WECC Gas Turbine
Woodward Diesel
Power System Stabilizer Models
IEEE Type PSS1A

IEEE Type PSS2B
IEEE Type PSS3B
IEEE Type PSS4B
Motor Models
Double Cage Flux Induction

Protective Device Models
Contactors - Automatic Drop Out Action

ATS - Automatic Transfer Action
All Protective Devices in EasyPower Power Protector Relays, LV Breakers, Fuses
Over-Voltage Relays
Under-Voltage Relays
Under-Frequency Relays
Source Inverter Solid State Blocking for Faults
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 145
In this section, each model is documented in detail, so that users are aware of a models
behavior, best application and simulation response.
4.1 Generator Models

The synchronous generator you are going to simulate in EasyPower is either of a round rotor or a
salient pole design. The EasyPower DS Engine includes both models. To choose which model to
use, you need to ascertain if its rotor is solid iron (round rotor), or a water-wheel low speed
design (salient pole). Figure 145 shows a round rotor without windings, and Figure 146 shows
a salient pole rotor. The two following sections supply details on both the salient pole and round
rotor generator models.
Figure 145. Round rotor with no windings showing solid iron construction (from Design of Electrical
Apparatus, 3rd Edition, John H. Kuhlmann).
Figure 146. Salient pole rotor showing water wheel type construction (from Design of Electrical
Apparatus, 3rd Edition, John H. Kuhlmann).
Two additional models, the PV1G and WT4G are simulated as a generator in EasyPower as of
Version 9.5. Thus, to include inverter dynamic behavior, a generator model must be used, and
the PV1G or WT4G model specified in the stability tab. These models are also only supplied in a
Grid Connected form. This means that they are not intended for use in a stand-alone mode.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 146
4.1.1 Round Rotor Synchronous Generator

Introduction
The Round Rotor Synchronous Generator model in the DS Engine has been developed with the
help of Mr. F. Paul deMello, a noted machines and dynamic stability expert. Material written on
the subject of classic sub-transient machine models can be found in many textbooks and papers.
For EasyPower, this model was developed using classic materials written by Mr. deMello, as
well as detailed development and critical review time with him. Suffice it to say, the models
developed here fall in line with methods that are not new, and which have been in use for
decades to simulate the detailed action of a synchronous machine.
The Circuit Model
The classic block diagram of the round rotor generator is shown in Figure 147. From Figure
147, we see that the model includes transient and sub-transient effects, d and q axis modeling,
saturation on both axes, and excitation field effects as an input from an external excitation
system. The model produces as its output air-gap flux, which then can be used to produce a
Thevenin driving voltage behind an internal machine impedance for connection with the
network. The EasyPower model also produces (as will be seen later) machine speed from a
separate inertia model. In Figure 147, we also see that the model has an input from the terminal
current of the machine (Id and Iq). These values, of course, must be converted from terminal form
to d and q-axis form, for input into the model.
In Table 5, all of the parameters necessary for the model are tabulated, and given brief
descriptions. These correspond to parameters seen in the Figure 147 blocks, as well as the
machine rating (for proper scaling in the DS Engine), and the inertia component. In ALL cases
in the DS Engine (generators and motors), inertia is a combined value of inertia. For generators,
it represents the total inertia of the generator rotor and prime mover (turbine or engine). For a
motor, it represents the total inertia of the motor rotor and load (pump, fan, etc.).
Another important note about Figure 147, is that the circuit shown is, in reality, only for the
rotor of the generator. We can thus conclude that the majority of the time constant effects, etc.
take place in the rotor. Now, there are effects that take place in the stator, but given that DS
simulations are typically not used to simulate any transient effects in the stator (DC offset,
transient Ldi/dt effects, etc.), and the network is solved as a simple set of network equations (i.e.
not including transient Ldi/dt and C(dv/dt) effects), the rotor is where the predominant effects are
located. Thus, the generator model presented here does not include any transient stator effects.
Why a D-Q Axis Model
As can be seen in Figure 147, all modeling of the rotor is performed using a form broken into a
d-axis section and q-axis section. The d and q-axis formulation is simply a mathematical
technique used to simplify modeling so that equations can readily be formed on the rotor
independent of rotor position (angle), and so that parameters can be created that are easy to
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 147
determine. A quick look at the simple 2-pole rotor shown in Figure 147 shows why a d and qaxis formulation is appropriate and why it is an excellent method to simplify modeling.
X
X
Eq'
E fd
'
Tdo s
'
d
'
d
kd
Tdo'' s
X
X
X ad I fd
X
X
X d X d'
X d''
Xl
'
d
''
d
Xl
'
d
Xl
'
d
X d''
'
d
Xl
d''
Xl
Id
d''
''
Saturation
'' ''
2
''
q'' X q X l
'' X d X l
X aq I kd
X q'
X
X
'
q
'
q
'
Tqo s
Iq
X q''
Xl
'
q
Xl
1
''
Ed'
Tqo s
kq
X
X
X
X
'
q
X q''
'
q
Xl
''
q
Xl
'
q
q''
Xl
Figure 147. Round Rotor Generator model block diagram.
In Figure 148, we see that for definition purposes, the d-axis (direct axis) is defined along the
center of the rotor, and the q-axis (quadrature axis) is defined 90 degrees away in an orthogonal
relationship. Thus, effects on the d-axis do not affect the q-axis, and vice versa, lending to a
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 148
mathematical simplification. Each axis can be analyzed independently. Now, in reality, any
relationships between the rotor and the stator are linked across the air-gap. Thus, if we were to
write coupling equations, we would need to write them in a distributed manner all along the
circumference of the air-gap. This would necessitate a very complex and detailed set of
equations, based on construction and the physical relationships between the rotor and stator
Power Angle
d-Axis
Center Line of
Phase A
Center Line of
Phase B
q-axis Air Gap
q-axis
d-axis Air Gap

Center Line of
Phase C
Figure 148. Synchronous generator rotor positional definitions.
To simplify this work, engineers (notably R. H. Park in 1929) determined that the reaction of the
rotor could be broken into two orthogonal terms, denoted as the d and q-axis. The construction of
the rotor worked well with this simplification, where the physical differences in the rotor from
top to bottom are accumulated into two quadrature effects. Notice in Figure 148 how, due to the
need for adding windings on the rotor, the rotor mechanically breaks somewhat into two pieces.
The air-gap on the d-axis is somewhat consistent all along the top of the pole piece, and the qaxis air-gap has a deeper air-gap (due to windings). The quadrature d and q-axis formulation
method is the method used in the EasyPower round rotor generator model. That model uses a
separate d and q-axis set of equations, and relates them to the stator through the angle of the rotor
relative to the centerline of Phase A, which we denote as top dead center of the machine. Thus,
as the rotor rotates relative to the stator, the flux linkages across the air-gap are constantly
changing based on the angle of the rotor. In essence, we have a transformer with an air-gap in its
core, where the one winding is constantly rotating relative to the other. As the winding rotates,
the air-gap changes due to the physical construction of the rotor.
It is unfortunate that we only have time and space in this manual for a brief overview of the
reasons and methods involved in creating formulations for the synchronous machine model.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 149
There are many texts that can help you in this area, if you choose to do further study. There is
also much technical content and history that one would be wise to at least perform a casual read
to gain insight into the behavior of the synchronous machine. As an overall method, the self and
mutual inductances of the rotor and stator are built into a set of equations. Those equations are
then formulated into a block diagram as shown in Figure 147, for simulation in a time step
oriented integration method. Machine reactances represent the mutual and self-inductances of the
machine, and the time constants include the effect of resistance.
Table 6. Round Rotor Generator Model Parameters.
Parameter
Units
Rated MVA
Rated Efficiency
Rated Speed
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
Rated PF
MVA
Percent
RPM
Volts LL
Amps
Ra
Xl
pu
pu
Stator winding resistance (armature resistance)

Stator winding leakage reactance
Xd
Xq
Xd
Xq
Xd = Xq
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
d-axis unsaturated synchronous reactance

q-axis unsaturated synchronous reactance
d-axis unsaturated transient reactance
q-axis unsaturated transient reactance
d & q-axis unsaturated sub-transient reactance
Tdo
Tqo
Tdo
Tqo
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
d-axis transient OC time constant

q-axis transient OC time constant
d-axis sub-transient OC time constant
q-axis sub-transient OC time constant
E1
E2
S( E1 )
S( E2 )
pu
pu
pu
pu
First voltage to define saturation

Second voltage to define saturation
Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
H
D
Windage
kW-Sec / kVA
pu
pu

Machine friction and windage
Note:
Description
OC means Open Circuit
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 150
Finally (and to illustrate the importance of further study into synchronous machine modeling),
we supply some discussions of interest in regards to the round rotor generator and machines in
general.
Transient. The transient terms on the d-axis correspond to the field winding.
Transient is used, since the field winding supplies a changing reaction as the field
voltage is changed. In fact, the transient open circuit time constant Tdo, can be
measured by switching a DC source on the field of the generator. The current in
the field will gradually grow according to an exponential time constant, over 2 to
10 seconds. The plot in Figure 149 shows an actual test, where 12 V DC was
applied to the field of a generator. The time constant is the time it takes the
current to grow to 63% of its final value.
Sub-Transient. Note that the sub-transient nature of the model on the d-axis is
due solely to amortisseur effects in the rotor. In the round rotor generator, these
are due to the solid nature of the rotor. Currents flow in a distributed fashion in
the rotor iron, when there is slip between the stator rotating mmf (created by the
stator currents) and the rotors rotating mmf (the field). Under a dynamic
response, currents can be generated in the rotor iron (a reluctance effect), and thus
can impact the response of the generator. In a salient pole machine, amortisseur
windings or bars are added in and through the pole face of the rotor (parallel to
the shaft), to supply needed damping (induction motor reluctance effect). Thus,
the sub-transient nature of the model has been created to specifically model
physical amortisseur components of the generator.
The name sub-transient is also a bit misleading, as we have come to re-write its
definition in terms of short circuit current magnitude and the smallest machine
impedance in mind. In reality, the sub-transient term on the d-axis is the
amortisseur term of the machine, and due to construction simply has the shortest
time constant and lowest machine reactance. As noted in Concordias text, The
name sub-transient is used in order to distinguish these reactances from the
transient reactances, which are defined in the same way except that the presence
of the amortisseur windings is ignored. Historically, the machine without
amortisseur was analyzed first and the name transient appropriated for that case.
Q-Axis. The q-axis circuit in the round rotor generator looks like a symmetrical
version of the d-axis. This is due to actually simulating two equivalent
amortisseur windings for the q-axis. Since the q-axis does not involve the field,
there is actually no transient effect on the q-axis. However, due to solid rotor
effects of the round rotor generator, an equivalent transient effect still occurs, but
is due solely to amortisseur effects. As is noted for the salient pole generator in
the next section, that machine does not have any transient q-axis effect, as there
are no solid rotor effects, and no field linkage on the q-axis.
Xd = Xq. Refer to Synchronous Motor Modeling for more detail on
synchronous machine data, and for specific reasons why Xd and Xq are
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 151
specified equal. This is a requirement for the all generator models used in the
EasyPower.
(Applied DC Voltage VR and Measured Current Ife)

Figure 149. Test measurement of field time constant.
Some Linking Relationships

The model displayed in Figure 147 shows field voltage Efd, Id and Iq as inputs, and air-gap flux
(d and q) as outputs. These seem all well and good, but a few defining relationships will
help in understanding the interconnected nature of the model.
Field voltage, Efd, is an input from an excitation system model, and thus is generated externally.
This represents an actual separate piece of equipment that is producing a field voltage to supply
current to the windings of the field. Without the input field voltage, the generator cannot be
excited, and thus it will not produce any voltage. The EasyPower round rotor model assumes that
if Efd is zero, that no terminal voltage will be created in an open circuit condition. This is the
theoretical response. In reality, some residual magnetism will exist in the field, which will then
create a small terminal voltage on the machine when rotating with no field applied.
In the next section we will discuss the units inertia model, which necessitates an input of
electrical air-gap torque from the generator model. The air-gap torque is calculated using the airgap flux and current in the stator windings of the generator. This calculation can be performed as
a d and q-axis calculation on rotor convention, or after conversion of the air-gap flux onto the
stator reference. Due to the fact that we already have stator currents on a d and q-axis reference
(needed as input into the model), we will calculate air-gap torque using d and q-axis components.
This calculation is:
TAirgap I q d" I d q"
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 152
This equation may not seem logical, as there is an intermixing of d and q-axis components;
however, it is correct when the detail of the formulations are included. This equation is supplied
in per unit (all EasyPower machine modeling is internally performed in per unit).
Finally, as noted in the first sections in this manual, the Thevenin equivalent voltage is needed
for the network model. As noted earlier, the network includes a Thevenin equivalent voltage
source, where the source impedance is defned as RA + jXd. This source then needs a voltage to
drive the network. This voltage is the airgap flux times the speed of the machine:
Ed" "q 1 p
Eq" "d 1 p
For these equations, the per unit speed (1+ p) corresponds to 1.0 at rated speed of the generator
(see definition of p below). Again, the mixture of d and q-axis components is seen, which is the
correct implementation. To complete the calculation, a conversion from the d and q-axis domain
back to the stator refererence is needed as well, which as seen from Figure 148, simply involves
knowing the position of the rotor, relative to the stator. As with most DS machine models that
are simulating dynamics without transient effects (network and stator Ldi/dt etc. effects), rotor
position at rated speed (which is the defined condition at initialization of the model) is assumed
to be stationary and equal to the power angle, determined by machine loading. This is due to the
fact that the network and rotor speed are the same, and makes modeling easier to formulate.
Internally, all EasyPower machine models assume that initialization occurs at rated speed (and
thus frequency), and that the system is operating at rated frequency. This simplification generates
a fixed angle (i.e. power angle is not changing) assuming there are no imbalances in delivered
and generated power.
Inertia Model
The inertia modeling used in the round rotor generator is formulated according to classical inertia
modeling in machines, and is shown in Figure 150. In Figure 150, we see the speed of the
machine (p) being controlled by torque difference across the machines shaft, and being
integrated (1/s) via the machine inertia (H). All values in Figure 150 are in per unit.
We also see that we have elected to include friction and windage losses, modeled as a constant
torque. Without modeling friction and windage, if the unit is tripped, it will not be able to have a
speed recovery. Simply put, when the valve on the governor system is fully shut (PMech = 0.0),
the only way to slow the unit down is via friction and windage. This is typically compensated for
in other stability packages by allowing the governor to output a slight negative power. This is the
case if you ever notice a governor having a small negative limit specified instead of zero power.
Figure 151 is supplied to illustrate this. That figure shows generator frequency for an actual unit
trip (Meas) overlaid with a simulated response (Sim). This test is typically called a partial load
rejection, as the unit was loaded to a small fraction of its rated output before tripping the unit.
After the steam valve goes fully closed, the frequency of the unit turns around (starts to drop).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 153
The flat line slope during the speed reduction is the slowing down of the unit from friction and
windage losses, where the slope of the response can be used to calculate the percent friction and
windage losses of the machine. The simulated response in Figure 151 was created using the
Steam Turbine Governor model in EasyPower, with a matching generator with properly set
inertia (H), and friction and windage torque.
Finally, load damping (D) is included, if desired, as a feedback from speed if there is no damping
from system load. In most simulations, this value is left equal to zero, the default value in
EasyPower.
TFric Wind
TAirgap
Generator Air Gap Torque
TMech
PMech
From Prime Mover
1
2H
1
1 p
1
s
Figure 150. Inertia vs. Speed Integral Model.
By definition, p is the per unit difference in speed from rated synchronous speed. For example,
if the rated speed of the machine were 3600 RPM, and the actual speed were 3600 RPM, then p
would be:
p
3600
1.0 0.0
3600
If the actual speed were 3590 RPM, then p would be:

p
3590
1.0 0.00277
3600
If the actual speed were 3630 RPM, then p would be:

p
3630
1.0 0.00833
3600
You can also see that PMech from the governor system (prime mover and governor combination)
is divided by speed to convert its output to torque.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 154
1.025
Freq - Meas
Freq - Sim
1.020
Speed (pu)
1.015
1.010
1.005
1.000
0.995
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
Time (Seconds)
Figure 151. Partial load rejection of actual machine measurement with simulated response.
Inertia Constant
The inertia constant H, is defined in kW-sec/kVA. With this per unit form of definition, we can
directly simulate speed change according to the inertia equations just discussed. This value,
however, is rarely supplied; instead, other forms (units) of inertia are supplied. The most typical
English units value is WK2 or WR2, both in lb-ft2. The constant H can easily be calculated from
lb-ft2 using the following equation:
0.231 wk 2 RPM 2 1x10 6

Base kVA
Again, as noted earlier, the value of inertia calculated here must include the inertia of the
generator rotor, rotor (or engine) of the prime mover, and all connecting shafts and equipment.
Though machine speed is calculated within the generator model, it represents the speed of the
combined generator and prime mover.
For those accustomed to having inertia specified in metric units, the following equation can be
used:
H
EasyPower LLC 2016
5.482 kg m 2 RPM 2 1x10 6

Base kVA
Page 155
Calculation of Inertia Constant from Test

To calculate the inertia constant from test, one must monitor machine speed or output frequency
while subjecting the unit to a partial load rejection. Between 10 and 20% of rated load is typical.
If the test shown above in Figure 151 is looked at much closer from 2 to 5 seconds, one will
discern a clear initial slope as shown in Figure 152. This initial slope is the units change in
frequency vs. time with no governor operation, or with the input shaft power remaining constant.
Using this slope (df/dt), the Rated MVA of machine, the initial power Po before the rejection test
and an equation that relates these, we can determine the machine inertia constant.
For this example test, the real and reactive power before tripping was 10.681 MW and 5.53
MVar. The frequency was 60 Hz before the trip and the final frequency oscillated between 60.18
and 60.23 Hz after the trip. From the figures, we derive the machine inertia from the initial slope
of the speed response to be:
df pu
dt
61.88 - 61.09
60.0
= 0.026318 pu
=
3.4912 - 2.9909
sec
Po
10.681
kw - sec
Rated MVA
66.916
Machine Inertia H =
=
= 3.03
df
2 0.026318
kVA
2 pu
dt
Figure 152. Zoom in of partial load rejection to discern slope.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 156
Initialization
Initialization for generator models should only be performed in an online condition. No provision
is made in the EasyPower DS Engine to start a generator from an offline condition. The reason
for this is simple; to actually start up a generator, there are a host of automatic controls and
operator actions that spin the unit up and synchronize it with the grid. These are not being
simulated. The process is not like a simple, close the breaker and go motor start simulation. If
the generator is offline it will initialize with all states, Efd, and PMech set to zero. Closing the
generator breaker will start the unit like an induction motor; however, no field will ever be
applied, and thus doing such a simulation is basically unusable. We suggest only closing into a
generator that is already online to simulate closing actions.
When the round rotor generator model is initialized, steps are taken to set all of the generators
internal States (see Dynamics 101 tutorial for a clear definition of a State), so that the generated
Thevenin voltage (discussed above) combined with the terminal voltage conditions and the
source impedance of the generator (RA + jXd) will create the same power conditions from the
initial power flow case. This is accomplished by assuming all DStates (see Dynamics 101
tutorial for a clear definition of a DState) are zero (no changes, we are at steady-state), and then
progressing back through the block diagram in Figure 147. All States and the required field
voltage (Efd) are easily determined this way - that is, if we neglect saturation. This nonlinear
effect unfortunately puts a damper on our direct initialization of the generator. Thus an iterative
process is used (called a slew run), where all of the States are set as the machine slews into
matching the terminal conditions. After the slew run is complete:
Generator terminal P (watts) will equal that required of the power flow.
Generator terminal Q (vars) will equal that required of the power flow.
The angle of the generator rotor will be set.
Field voltage (Efd) will be set.
All internal States will be set.
The slew run performs the updates shown in Figure 153 while running the generator through a
slightly modified time simulation. As seen in Figure 153, DStates are prepared, the model is
integrated, and conditions are updated. However, we have two additional corrections being made
on each iteration. First, the field voltage is being updated using feedback error based on the
terminal var conditions. Second, the machine angle (rotor angle), is being update using a
feedback error based on the terminal watt conditions. Saturation is automatically included in the
Calc Variables update. All updates in the generator are feed forward (move forward in time),
where the feedback errors help to align the generators internal conditions including saturation
and the required terminal conditions.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 157
Start
Calc DStates
Integrate
Calc Variables
Update Terminal Conditions
PError PLF PTerm

QError QLF QTerm
E fd E fd QError AccFactorQ
Angle Angle PError AccFactorP
No
DStates < Threshold
Yes
Finished
Figure 153. Generator slew run.
Note:
PLF and QLF are generator terminal conditions specified by the initial power flow case.
AccFactorP and AccFactorQ are deceleration factors to keep the feedback stable.
Threshold is a value pre-set that is a small value to force the generator very close to
absolute steady-state (all DStates very close to zero).
Saturation
Defining the saturation model completes the equations needed for a complete generator model.
First, two new constants A and B will be defined that are used in the saturation equation used at
runtime. The constants are calculated as:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 158
S E1 E1
S E2 E2
E1 E2
A
1
S E1 E1
S E2 E2
S E1 E1
E1 A
where E1, E2, S(E1) and S(E2) are defined from the generators saturation curve. See Section 3.6
on How Do I Determine Machine Saturation for a method to generate E1, E2, S(E1), and S(E2)
values from a machine saturation curve. Once the values of A and B are determined, saturation is
calculated in real time from the magnitude of using:
pu Sat B '' A
pu Sat 0
for
'' A
for
'' A
The data supplied as input, E1, E2, S(E1), S(E2), thus helps us define a new equation that outputs
an amount of saturation. Once the constants A and B are determined for the saturation function,
we then can produce a saturation correction for the machine in real-time. For typical data of:
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
= 1.0
= 1.2
= 0.12
= 0.30
we get A and B constants of:

A
B
= 0.7268
= 1.6077
If these are put into our saturation function, we get a plot like that seen in the next figure. We can
see that this function is doing a fine job of representing our original input data. At || = 1.0,
Sat( 1.0 ) is clearly very near 0.12. At || = 1.2, Sat( 1.2 ) is roughly 0.36. So a slight error
(greater saturation) is introduced at higher values of ||.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 159
0.40
0.35
Sat( |''| ) pu
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0.80
1.00
1.20
1.40
|''| (pu)
Figure 154. Plot of Sat( || ) vs. ||.
One final note: It is interesting to notice for the machine model, that || is used as the input to
the saturation function, instead of the machines terminal voltage. This is by design, as the
machines saturation on the rotor is driven by the airgap flux (represented by ||). However,
with a little more research, we see that a machines saturation curve is defined using the terminal
voltage of the machine. The reason for what appears to be a lack of consistency is that when the
machines saturation curve is determined, the generator is open circuit. Thus no current is
flowing in the stator windings. From the open circuit condition, at rated speed, we can state that
|| = |ETerm| and can see that the saturation curve is, by open circuit definition, the conditions at
the airgap.
4.1.2 Salient Pole Synchronous Generator

As with the round rotor generator model, the salient pole generator model was developed with
the help of Mr. F. Paul deMello. This model is actually a simplification of the round rotor
generator model, due to eliminating parts of the q-axis in the circuit model. Figure 155 shows
the circuit model, where we see the following differences:
Saturation is only involved in the d-axis.
The q-axis model is simplified to include only the sub-transient amortisseur effect.
The q-axis model has no transient component, since no second amortisseur effect is
needed. The rotor is composed of laminated poles at the end of a water wheel type
structure, and thus has no solid rotor effects.
Since saturation is on the d-axis only, initialization is direct, and no slew run is needed.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 160
X
X
Eq'
E fd
'
Tdo s
1
Tdo'' s
kd
X
X
''
d
Xl
'
d
Xl
'
d
X d''
'
d
Xl
d''
Saturation
X
X
'
d
'
d
X ad I fd
X d X d'
X d''
Xl
'
d
Xl
Id
X q''
Iq
''
q''
1
Tqo s
Figure 155. Salient pole generator model block diagram.
Everything else about the salient pole generator falls in line with discussions of the round rotor
generator model in the previous section. Parameters for the model are listed in Table 6, where
brief descriptions of each are provided. Parameters there correspond to the items seen in the
Figure 155 blocks, as well as the machine rating (for proper scaling in the DS Engine) and the
inertia component.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 161
Table 7. Salient pole generator model parameters.
Parameter
Units
Rated MVA
Rated Eff
Rated Speed
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
Rated PF
MVA
Percent
RPM
Volts LL
Amps
Ra
Xl
pu
pu

Stator leakage reactance
Xd
Xq
Xd
Xd = Xq
pu
pu
pu
pu

Tdo
Tdo
Tqo
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds

E1
E2
S( E1 )
S( E2 )
pu
pu
pu
pu

Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
H
D
Windage
kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and prime mover inertia

pu
pu
Machine friction and windage
Notes:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Description
OC - Open Circuit
Page 162
4.1.3 PV1G - Photovoltaic Inverter

Converter Current Limit
I
IQcmd
2
MaxTD
-I
2
Qcmd
Min
IQmxv
1.6
I MaxTD
-I
I MaxTD = 1.7
1
1+ 0.02s
IQcmd E FD
Zerox Brkpt
Vterm
dvtrp4
dttrp4
dttrp3
dttrp2
dttrp1
PQ
= 0: Q Priority
Flag
PQ
= 1: P Priority
Flag
LVPL
1.22
dvtrp3
-1.0 pu
Min
VTerm
VTerm
dvtrp2
IQmx
IFD
Time sec
0.0 pu
dvtrp1
Vterm IQhl
2
Pcmd
dttrp5
dvtrp5
2
MaxTD
dttrp6
dvtrp6
PQFlag
Min
Min
Qmax
1.0
POrd
Min
IQmxv
I Pmx
I Pcmd
Zero Voltage Ride Through
dV
I Phl
VTerm
I Pmx
1
1+ 0.02s
IQ
High Voltage
Reactive Current
Management
LVPL
IP
1
1+ 0.02s
Rate Limit R Rpwr
Low Voltage
Active Current
Management
P I
Source
L
L
Figure 156. Photovoltaic Inverter model block diagram.
Parameter
Brkpt
Iphl
Iqhl
ImaxTD
RRpwr
Qmax
Zerox
dvtrp1
dvtrp2
dvtrp3
dvtrp4
dvtrp5
dvtrp6
dttrp1
dttrp2
dttrp3
dttrp4
dttrp5
dttrp6
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Description
LVPL characteristic breakpoint voltage
Hard active current limit
Hard reactive current limit
Max temperature dependent converter current
Active current ramp rate limit
Reactive power max
LVPL characteristic zero crossing voltage
Terminal voltage at 75%
VTerm = -0.25 pu
VTerm = -0.50 pu
VTerm = -0.70 pu
VTerm = -0.85 pu
VTerm = +0.10 pu
VTerm = +0.15 pu
The time to trip for: 0.50 pu < VTerm < 0.75 pu
The time to trip for: 1.15 pu < VTerm
Page 163
Description
Use this model to simulate:
Photovoltaic arrays using an inverter interface with the grid.
In this model:
RRpwr is a rate limit applied to the block it is displayed with.
The LVPL limit is a non-windup limit.
The IPmx limit is a windup limit.
IQcmd is supplied by the Inverter Q Control model via the EFD variable.
Notes:
The high voltage reactive current management reduces reactive current to limit terminal
voltage to 1.2 pu.
The low voltage active current management emulates a phase locked loop, which reduces
active current at low voltage conditions.
The LVPL (low voltage power logic) block caps active current. Together with the ramp
rate limit RRpwr, this affects the voltage recovery behavior.
References:
1. Western Electricity Coordinating Council Renewable Energy Modeling Task Force
Progress Report to MVWG on PV System Modeling July 8, 2010.
2. Western Electricity Coordinating Council Modeling and Validation Work Group, WECC
Wind Power Plant Dynamic Modeling Guide (DRAFT) Prepared by WECC Renewable
Energy Modeling Task Force, August 2010
3. K. Clark, N. Miller, R. Walling, Modeling of GE Solar Photovoltaic Plants for Grid
Studies, April 2010. Copyright2009 GE Energy. All rights reserved.
4. K. Clark, N. Miller, R. Walling, Modeling of GE Wind Turbine-Generator for Grid
Studies, April 2010.
5. FINAL PROJECT REPORT WECC WIND GENERATOR DEVELOPMENT Prepared
for CIEE By: National Renewable Energy Laboratory. March, 2010
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 164
4.1.4 WT4G - Wind Turbine with Inverter

Converter Current Limit
2
I 2MaxTD - IQcmd
IQcmd
Min
IQmxv
1.6
PElec
1
1 + sTpw
dPmx
PRef
K ip
P
Ord

K pp +
dvtrp2
IQmx
IFD
I MaxTD = 1.7
VTerm
1
1+ 0.02s
1
1+ 0.02s
IQcmd E FD
1.22
Zerox Brkpt
dvtrp4
dttrp4
dttrp3
dttrp2
dttrp1
PQ
= 0: Q Priority
Flag
PQ
= 1: P Priority
Flag
LVPL
sK f
1 + sTf
dvtrp3
-1.0 pu
Min
VTerm
dPmn
Time sec
0.0 pu
dvtrp1
Vterm IQhl
2
I 2MaxTD - I Pcmd
dttrp5
dvtrp5
PQFlag
Min
0
1.0
dttrp6
dvtrp6
I MaxTD
Min
Qmax
I Pmx
I Pcmd
Min
IQmxv
PRef
Zero Voltage Ride Through

dV
I Phl
VTerm
I Pmx
0
IQ
High Voltage
Reactive Current
Management
LVPL
Vterm
IP
1
1+ 0.02s
Rate Limit R Rpwr
I Pcmd
Low Voltage
Active Current
Management
P I
Source
L
L
Figure 157. Wind Turbine Inverter model block diagram.
Parameter
Tpw
Tf
Brkpt
Iphl
Iqhl
ImaxTD
Kf
Kip
Kpp
RRpwr
Qmax
Zerox
dPmx
dPmn
dvtrp1
dvtrp2
dvtrp3
dvtrp4
dvtrp5
dvtrp6
dttrp1
dttrp2
dttrp3
dttrp4
dttrp5
dttrp6
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Description
Real power transducer time constant
Real power control rate feedback time constant
LVPL characteristic breakpoint voltage
Hard active current limit
Hard reactive current limit
Max temperature dependent converter current
Real power control rate feedback gain
Real power control integral gain
Real power control proportional gain
Active current ramp rate limit
Reactive power max
LVPL characteristic zero crossing voltage
Real power control limit max
Real power control limit min
VTerm = -0.25 pu
VTerm = -0.50 pu
VTerm = -0.70 pu
VTerm = -0.85 pu
VTerm = +0.10 pu
VTerm = +0.15 pu
The time to trip for: 1.15 pu < VTerm
Page 165
Description
Wind turbines with an inverter interface with the grid.
In this model:
RRpwr is a rate limit applied to the block it is displayed with.
The LVPL limit is a non-windup limit.
The dPmx and dPmn limit is a non-windup limit.
The IPmx limit is a windup limit.
IQcmd is supplied by the Inverter Q Control model via the EFD variable.
Notes:
The high voltage reactive current management reduces reactive current to limit terminal
voltage to 1.2 pu.
The low voltage active current management emulates a phase locked loop, which reduces
active current at low voltage conditions.
The LVPL (low voltage power logic) block caps active current. Together with the ramp
rate limit RRpwr, this affects the voltage recovery behavior.
References:
Energy Modeling Task Force, August 2010
for CIEE By: National Renewable Energy Laboratory. March, 2010
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 166
4.2 Excitation System Models

In the previous section on generators, it was noted that the field voltage (Efd) was an input to
both the generator models. Also, during initialization, Efd was determined after properly
initializing the model. The value of Efd is controlled and supplied from the excitation system.
EasyPower DS includes 26 excitation system models.
Basler AVC1
IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type AC1A
IEEE Type AC2
IEEE Type AC2A
IEEE Type AC3A
IEEE Type AC4A
IEEE Type AC5A
IEEE Type AC6A
IEEE Type AC7B
IEEE Type AC8B
IEEE Type DC1A
IEEE Type DC2A
IEEE Type DC3A
IEEE Type DC4B
IEEE Type ST1A
IEEE Type ST2
IEEE Type ST2A
IEEE Type ST3A
IEEE Type ST4B
IEEE Type ST5B
IEEE Type ST6B
IEEE Type ST7B
IEEE Type AC8B
Inverter Q Control
STAMFORD 1
The majority of these models are specified by the IEEE. The most recent version of the IEEE
Standard on excitation systems is IEEE Standard 421.5 2005, and it is entitled, IEEE
Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models. We highly recommend obtaining a copy
and referencing that standard for details on modeling excitation systems. It is an excellent
reference.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 167
In addition, the reference includes details on how each of the component blocks are modeled.
This is especially useful when trying to understand windup and non-windup limits. Refer to
Annex E in the standard for an excellent discussion on the application of limits.
All of the IEEE type models listed above are presently defined in the 421.5 Standard with
exception only to the IEEE Type 1 and Type 2 models, which are historical IEEE models. Each
model is functionally specified to model a particular form of excitation system, of which there
are many. Each sub-section in this section that documents a particular excitation system will note
the intended excitation system to be simulated, and we have supplied a table below that
correlates manufacturer excitation systems and AVRs to the model names above.
As noted, the excitation systems purpose is to supply and control the field of the generator so
that the terminal voltage of the generator is controlled. The excitation system includes several
components depending upon type (AC, DC, bus fed, separately excited, etc.), and we will
purpose to note each component included in each model. These components could be but are not
limited to:
The AVR (automatic voltage regulator). This is the main control section where control
blocks are implemented on purpose to obtain satisfactory generator terminal voltage
response.
The Amplifier. This is typically blended in with the AVR, but is the section that takes
the low level control voltages and boosts them to levels either for the field of the exciter,
or for the field of the generator. Often a simple limit simulating the min and max range of
the amplifier system is all that is included, and the gain of the amplifier washes into the
main gain of the excitation system.
The Exciter. The exciter is a rotating machine or static amplifier used to amplify a low
level signal up to the voltage and current needed to drive the field of the generator. The
time constant TE has historically been reserved for the time constant simulating the
exciter. If a unit is brushless, then the exciter is typically an alternator with a rectifier on
its output, all on the shaft of the generator. Hence the term, rotating rectifier.
As seen in every excitation system model documented in this section, terminal voltage is fed
back into the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) portion of the excitation system. Thus, the
excitation system is simply a means to an end. It holds and forces conditions that satisfy the
AVR set-point (referred to as VRef or Vee Ref or the voltage reference) requirement, thus
maintaining generator terminal voltage.
In Table 8, we have supplied an exciter mapping from Manufacturer to EasyPower exciter
model. This is not exhaustive, and we would encourage feedback from our users with additional
mappings that we can include in this table.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 168
Table 8. Exciter Mapping - Manufacturer to Exciter Model.

Manufacturer
Exciter Type
Model
ABB
UNITROL
UNITROL D
UNITROL P
UNITROL F
UNITROL 5000
Stabilizer Option
Stabilizer Option
MB-PSS (Multi-band)
ST1A
ST5B
ST5B
ST5B
ST5B
PSS2B
PSS3B
PSS4B
ABB-Westinghouse
Mag-A-Stat
Rototrol
Silverstat
TRA
AB
KC (with some approximations)
DC1A
DC1A
DC1A
DC1A
DC1A
DC1A
Allis Chalmers
Regulex
DC1A
Alstom
Static Excitation Systems

Eurorec
Micrrec K4.1
ALSPA P320
ST1A
ST7B
ST7B
ST7B
Asea
ST1A
Brown Boveri
ST1A
Basler
DECS applied to DC Commutator Exciter

Some generic Basler AC exciters
DECS applied to AC rotating rectifier
DECS
SSE
DECS applied to static excitation
Stabilizer Option
PSS-100
AVC63-12
AVC125-10
DC4B
AC5A
AC7B
AC8B
ST1A
ST4B
PSS2B
PSS2B
Basler AVC1
Basler AVC1
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 169
Table 8 Continued.
Manufacturer
Exciter Type
Model Type
Brush
PRISMIC A50-B
PRISMIC A30
PRISMIC A10
PRISMIC A50-S
PRISMIC A50-A
DCP
PRISMIC T20
AC7B
AC8B
AC8B
ST4B
ST4B
ST5B
PSS2B
Canadian GE
Silcomatic
Silcomatic 5
ST1A
ST4B
C. A. Parsons
Stationary Diode System
AC6A
Cutler Hammer
Westinghouse Type WDR Retrofit
AC1A
Eaton
ECS2100 applied to AC Rotating Rectifier

ECS2100 static excitation system
ECS2100 static excitation system
AC7B
ST4B
ST6B
Eaton Cutler Hammer
Westinghouse Type WDR Retrofit

ECS2100 applied to DC Commutator
Stabilizer Option
DC2A
DC4B
PSS2B
Electric Machinery
Some generic EM AC exciters
AC5A
GE
Amplidyne
GDA
SVR
GFA 4
ALTERREX
ALTHYREX with rotating thyrsitor
ALTERREX regulator replacement
EX2000/2100
Potential Source Static Excitation System
SCT-PPT
SCT-SCPT
GENERREX with Compound Power Source
GENERREX with Potential Power Source
EX2000/2100 Bus-Fed Potential Source
EX2000/2100 Bus-Fed Static Source
GENERREX-PPS
GENERREX-CPS
Stabilizer Option
STATIC EX2000BR
DC1A
DC1A
DC2A
DC3A
AC3A
AC4A
AC7B
AC7B
ST1A
ST2A
ST2A
ST3A
ST3A
ST4B
ST4B
ST4B
ST4B
PSS2B
ST2
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 170
Table 8 Continued.
Manufacturer
Exciter Type
Model Type
GEC-Elliot
Static Excitation System
ST1A
Hitachi
ST1A
Mitsubishi
ST1A
Rayrolle-Parsons
ST1A
Siemens
RG3
THYRISIEM
AG THYRIPOL
AG THYRIPOL
Stabilizer Option
AC7B
AC7B
ST1A
ST6B
PSS3B
Toshiba
ST1A
Westinghouse
PRX-400
BJ30
Brushless Excitation System
High Initial Response Brushless System
Type PS with Type WTA Voltage Regulator
Type PS with Type WTA-300 Voltage Regulator
Type PS with Type WHS Voltage Regulator
WDR
MGR
DC2A
DC3A
AC1A
AC2A
ST1A
ST1A
ST1A
ST1A
ST1A
Westinghouse Canada
Solid State Thyristor Excitation System
ST1A
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 171
4.2.1 Basler AVC1

VPMG
K VS 1
K VS 0
VRef
VT
IT
1
1+sTR
VC1 VT RC jX C IT
1+sTR2
1+sTR1
K VP
VR Max
KA
s
1+sTC
1+sTB
VR
VFE
VR Min
VPSS
1
sT
E
E FD
KE
VF
sK F
1+sTF1 1+sTF2
VX
VX = E FD SE E FD
Figure 158. Basler AVC1 Exciter model block diagram.
Parameter
RC
XC
TB
TC
TE
TF1
TF2
TR
TR1
TR2
KA
KE
KF
KVP
KVS
VR Min
VR Max
VPMG
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Load compensation resistance
Load compensation reactance
AVR second Lead/Lag block lag time constant
AVR second Lead/Lag block lead time constant
Exciter time constant
AVR feedback time constant
Signal transducer time constant
AVR first Lead/Lag block lag time constant
AVR first Lead/Lag block lead time constant
AVR gain
Exciter gain
AVR feedback gain
Voltage source gain
If 0, Use Term Voltage; If 1, Use PMG Voltage
AVR min limit
AVR max limit
Voltage of PMG output
EFD voltage 1 for saturation
Exciter saturation at E1
Page 172
Description
Use this model to simulate a Basler excitation system as noted in Basler documentation:
* This model is for the Basler AVC63-12 and AVC125-10 excitation system used with a
brushless rotating exciter. It is assumed that the exciter rectifier power is either supplied from
a PMG (permanent magnet generator) or taken from generator terminals.
In this model:
The AVR is simulated from the TR block up to the output voltage VR.
The block before the TR block simulates load compensation, a form of line drop
compensation.
The brushless exciter is simulated to the right of VR, and is a simplified model that
excludes field current feedback. See the IEEE AC1A model for more information
regarding a more detailed simulation of the rotating rectifier.
The switch KVS allows the amplifier (which feeds the field of the exciter) to have its
power supplied from either the terminals of the generator or from a separate permanent
magnet generator.
The AVR limits on block KA are non-windup.
The feedback loop incorporates rate feedback.
* From Basler supplied documentation entitled, Mathematical Per-Unit Model of the AVC6312 and AVC125-10 Regulator, June 11, 2002.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 173
4.2.2 IEEE Type 1 Excitation System
SE
VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VR Max
KA
1+sTA
1
K E + sTE
E FD
VR Min
VPSS
sK F
1+sTF
Figure 159. IEEE Type 1 model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TE
TF
TR
KA
KE
KF
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
AVR time constant

Field voltage feedback time constant
Transducer time constant
AVR gain
Exciter KE
Field voltage feedback gain
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 174
Description
Use this model to simulate excitation systems with:
DC exciters.
In this model:
The first block models the transducer time constant.
The second block models the AVR.
The third block simulates a rotating exciter.
The saturation block simulates saturation in the rotating exciter.
The limit on the second block is non-windup.
The feedback block employs rate feedback.
Notes:
The IEEE Type 1 excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations of

1969.
This model is included for those with historic model data for an IEEE Type 1 system.
This model matches the updated IEEE DC1A model very closely, and can be used for a
DC1A. Refer to the discussion below for more information on how to apply the DC1A,
which is adequate for application of the IEEE Type 1 as well.
The EasyPower implementation of the IEEE Type 1 model does not include any
automatic calculation of exciter limits VRMax and VRMin, or the value KE, as noted below
in the IEEE 421.5 Standard. All parameters shown in Table 8 above are fixed. This autocalculation feature will be added in a later version.
From IEEE Standard 421.5, Section 5.1, discussing the DC1A model:
* This model, described by the block diagram of Figure 5-1, is used to represent fieldcontrolled dc commutator exciters with continuously acting voltage regulators (especially
the direct-acting rheostatic, rotating amplifier, and magnetic amplifier types).5 Because
this model has been widely implemented by the industry, it is sometimes used to
represent other types of systems when detailed data for them are not available or when a
simplified model is required.
* From IEEE Standard 421.5 2005. Copyright 2006, by IEEE. All rights reserved.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 175
* The principal input to this model is the output, VC, from the terminal voltage transducer
and load compensator model previously described. At the summing junction, terminal
voltage transducer output, VC, is subtracted from the set point reference, VREF. The
stabilizing feedback, VF, is subtracted and the power system stabilizing signal, VS, is
added to produce an error voltage. In the steady state, these last two signals are zero,
leaving only the terminal voltage error signal. The resulting signal is amplified in the
regulator. The major time constant, TA, and gain, KA, associated with the voltage regulator
are shown incorporating non-windup limits typical of saturation or amplifier power
supply limitations. A discussion of windup and non-windup limits is provided in Annex
E. These voltage regulators utilize power sources that are essentially unaffected by brief
transients on the synchronous machine or auxiliary buses. The time constants, TB and TC,
may be used to model equivalent time constants inherent in the voltage regulator, but
these time constants are frequently small enough to be neglected and provision should be
made for zero input data.
* The voltage regulator output, VR, is used to control the exciter, which may be either
separately excited or self-excited as discussed in the IEEE Committee Report [B20].
When a self-excited shunt field is used, the value of KE reflects the setting of the shunt
field rheostat. In some instances, the resulting value of KE can be negative and allowance
should be made for this.
* Most of these exciters utilize self-excited shunt fields with the voltage regulator
operating in a mode commonly termed buck-boost. The majority of station operators
manually track the voltage regulator by periodically trimming the rheostat set point so as
to zero the voltage regulator output. This may be simulated by selecting the value of KE
so that initial conditions are satisfied with VR = 0, as described in the IEEE Committee
Report [B20]. In some programs, if KE is entered as zero, it is automatically calculated by
the program for self-excitation.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 176
* If a nonzero value for KE is provided, the program should not recalculate KE, as a fixed
rheostat setting is implied. For such systems, the rheostat is frequently fixed at a value
that would produce self-excitation near rated conditions. Systems with fixed field rheostat
settings are in widespread use on units that are remotely controlled. A value for KE = 1 is
used to represent a separately excited exciter.
* The term SE[EFD] is a nonlinear function with values defined at two or more chosen
values of EFD, as described in Annex C. The output of this saturation block, VX, is the
product of the input, EFD, and the value of the nonlinear function SE[EFD] at this exciter
voltage.
* A signal derived from field voltage is normally used to provide excitation system
stabilization, VF, via the rate feedback with gain, KF, and time constant, TF.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 177
4.2.3 IEEE Type 2 Excitation System

SE
VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VR Max
KA
1+sTA
1
K E + sTE
E FD
VR Min
VPSS
sK F
1+sTF2 1+sTF1
Figure 160. IEEE Type 2 model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TE
TF1
TF2
TR
KA
KE
KF
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
AVR time constant

Field voltage feedback time constant 1
Field voltage feedback time constant 2
AVR gain
Exciter KE
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 178
Description
Brushless, AC Exciters.
In this model:
The second block models the AVR.
The third block simulates an AC exciter and rotating rectifier.
The saturation block simulates saturation in the exciter.
Notes:
The IEEE Type 2 excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations of

1969.
Updated models (IEEE AC1A, AC6A, AC8B) for brushless systems will include more
detail in modeling field current feedback effects.
The new IEEE AC5A comes closest to matching this model. The IEEE Type 2 includes
an additional transducer time constant block, and the AC5A includes an additional lead
term in the AVR rate feedback loop. Refer to the discussion below for more detail on the
AC5A, which is adequate discussion for the IEEE Type 2 as well.
This model is included for those with historic model data for an IEEE Type 2 system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 179
From IEEE Standard 421.5, Section 6.5, discussing the AC5A model:
* The model shown in Figure 6-5, designated as Type AC5A, is a simplified model for
brushless excitation systems. The regulator is supplied from a source, such as a
permanent magnet generator, which is not affected by system disturbances. Unlike other
ac models, this model uses loaded rather than open circuit exciter saturation data in the
same way as it is used for the dc models (Annex C). Because the model has been widely
implemented by the industry, it is sometimes used to represent other types of systems
when either detailed data for them are not available or simplified models are required.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 180
4.2.4 IEEE Type AC1A Excitation System

VRef
VA Max
VT
1
1+sTR
VR Max
1+sTC
1+sTB
KA
1+sTA
LV
Gate
HV
Gate
VR Min
VA Min
VPSS
VR
1
sTE
VE SE VE
sK F
1+sTF
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
0.75- I
E FD
VOEL
VUEL
VE
FEX = f I N
VFE
KE
IN =
K C I FD
VE
KD
I FD
FEX = 0
Figure 161. IEEE Type AC1A model block diagram.
Parameter
TR
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
KA
KC
KD
KE
KF
VAMax
VAMin
VRMax
VRMin
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Sensor time constant
Main AVR time constant
AVR Lead/Lag block lag time constant
AVR Lead/Lag block lead time constant
Feedback lag time constant
First block main AVR gain
Exciter KC Field current feedback
Exciter KD Field current feedback
Exciter KE
Feedback gain
AVR control max
AVR control min
Regulator max - Amplifier
Regulator min - Amplifier
Page 181
Description
In this model:
The second and third blocks model the AVR.
The fourth block (TE) simulates a rotating exciter.
The saturation block simulates saturation in the rotating exciter.
The limit on the third block is non-windup.
Notes:
The IEEE Type AC1A excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations
of 2005.
The UEL (under excitation limiter) and OEL (over excitation limiter) inputs are disabled.
In a future revision, these will be connected to modeled limiters.
This model includes field current feedback effects, as IFD is fed back into the model from
the generator.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 182
From IEEE Standard 421.5, Section 6.1:

* The model shown in Figure 6-1 represents the field-controlled alternator-rectifier
excitation systems designated Type AC1A. These excitation systems consist of an
alternator main exciter with non-controlled rectifiers. The exciter does not employ selfexcitation, and the voltage regulator power is taken from a source that is not affected by
external transients. The diode characteristic in the exciter output imposes a lower limit of
zero on the exciter output voltage, as shown in Figure 6-1.
* For large power system stability studies, the exciter alternator synchronous machine
can be represented by the simplified model shown in Figure 6-1. The demagnetizing
effect of load current, IFD, on the exciter alternator output voltage, VE, is accounted for in
the feedback path that includes the constant, KD. This constant is a function of the exciter
alternator synchronous and transient reactances, see Ferguson, Herbst, and Miller [B12]
and Gayek [B13].
* Exciter output voltage drop due to rectifier regulation is simulated by inclusion of the
constant KC (which is a function of commutating reactance) and the rectifier regulation
curve, FEX, as described in Annex D.
Brushless Modeling Detail
The AC1A excitation system is brushless and thus has an alternator with rotating rectifier on the
shaft of the unit. To properly include the dynamic behavior of the alternator (which is a machine
with reactances and time constants), it should be modeled with a detailed alternator model, much
as is the main generator. It is known, however, that no model presently available in the IEEE
model library fully models the effects of the alternator, and its impact on the field of the
generator. The IEEE AC1A model only includes moderate detail, with parameters and functions
(KD, KC, KE, TE, etc), via equations instead of an additional machine model.
A paper published by deMello, et al., Dynamic Aspects of Excitation Systems and Power
System Stabilizers, published in 1987, and presented at a Brazilian conference of Specialists in
Planning and Operations, notes that an accurate model of the alternator behavior should be
modeled with a separate machine model. However, since few will have the required additional
data (machine impedances and time constants) to include detailed modeling of such a nature, we
have elected to use the moderate detail included in the AC1A, AC6A and AC8B excitation
system models defined by IEEE.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 183
4.2.5 IEEE Type AC2 Excitation System

VRef
VA Max
VT
VPSS
1+sTC
1+sTB
VR Max
KA
1+sTA
VA
LV
Gate
VH
VF
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.75- I 2N
0.433 1.000
VR
KL
1
sTE
VR Min
VL
VA Min
I N < 0.433
KB
VE
E FD
FEX
FEX = f I N
VLR
KH
sK F
1+sTF
VFE
K E SE VE
IN =
KD
K C I FD
VE
I FD
FEX = 0
Figure 162. IEEE Type AC2 model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KH
KL
VAMax
VAMin
VLR
VRMax
VRMin
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Feedback time constant
Third block AVR gain
Exciter KE
Feedback gain
Feedback gain
Feedback gain
AVR control max
AVR control min
Field current feedback limit setting
Page 184
Description
Brushless, AC Exciters or as a general purpose excitation system.
In this model:
The first block models the AVR lead / lag.
The second through fifth blocks model the rest of the AVR.
The sixth block (TE) is meant to simulate a simplistic rotating exciter.
The saturation block is meant to simulate saturation in the rotating exciter.
The first and third limits are non-windup.
The second limit is windup.
The feedback block employs rate feedback and is a part of the AVR.
Notes:
The IEEE Type AC2 excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations of
1981. It has been superseded by the AC2A model of 2005. Refer to the AC2A model for
more notes describing components of this model from IEEE Standard 421.5 - 2005.
the generator.
See Brushless Modeling Detail for the AC1A model for discussion on all model
components after VR.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 185

VRef
VFE Max - K D I FD
VA Max
VT
VPSS
K E +SE (VE )
VR Max
1+sTC
1+sTB
KA
1+sTA
VA
VA Min
KB
LV
Gate
HV
Gate
VR Min
VUEL
VH
VR
1
sTE
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
E FD
VOEL
VE SE VE
KH
VF
VE
sK F
1+sTF
FEX = f I N
VFE
KE
IN =
KD
K C I FD
VE
I FD
FEX = 0
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KH
VAMax
VAMin
VRMax
VRMin
VFEMax
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Third block AVR gain
Exciter KE
Feedback gain
Feedback gain
AVR control max
AVR control min
Exciter max characteristic
Page 186
Description
In this model:
The second through fifth blocks model the rest of the AVR.
The sixth block (TE) is meant to simulate a simplistic rotating exciter.
The first and third limits are non-windup.
The second limit is windup.
The feedback block employs rate feedback and is a part of the AVR.
Notes:
of 2005.
the generator.

* The model shown in Figure 6-2, designated as Type AC2A, represents a high initial
response field-controlled alternator-rectifier excitation system. The alternator main exciter is
used with non-controlled rectifiers. The Type AC2A model is similar to that of Type AC1A
except for the inclusion of exciter time constant compensation and exciter field current
limiting elements. The exciter time constant compensation consists essentially of a direct
negative feedback, VH, around the exciter field time constant, reducing its effective value and
thereby increasing the small signal response bandwidth of the excitation system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 187
* The time constant is reduced by a factor proportional to the product of gains, KB and KH, of
the compensation loop and is normally more than an order of magnitude lower than the time
constant without compensation. To obtain high initial response with this system, a very high
forcing voltage, VRMAX, is applied to the exciter field. A limiter sensing exciter field current
serves to allow high forcing but limit the current.
By limiting the exciter field current, exciter output voltage, VE, is limited to a selected value,
which is usually determined by the specified excitation system nominal response. Although
this limit is realized physically by a feedback loop as described in Annex F, the time
constants associated with the loop can be extremely small and can cause computational
problems. For this reason, the limiter is shown in the model as a positive limit on exciter
voltage back of commutating reactance, which is in turn a function of generator field current.
For small limiter loop time constants, this has the same effect, but it circumvents the
computational problem associated with the high gain, low time constant loop. The limits on
VE are used to represent the effects of feedback limiter operation, as described in Annex F.
* Figure 6-2Type AC2AHigh initial response alternator-rectifier excitation

system with non-controlled rectifiers and feedback from exciter field current
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 188

KR
VRef
VFE Max - K D I FD
VA Max
VT
1+sTC
1+sTB
VPSS
HV
Gate
KA
1+sTA
VA
K E +SE (VE )
VR
1
sTE
VE SE VE
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
FEX =
0.75- I
E FD
VE Min
VA Min
VUEL
VE
VF
VFE
FEX = 1.732 1- I N
FEX = f I N
KE
IN =
K C I FD
VE
FEX = 0
VN
KD
KN
VN
s
1+sTF
I FD
KF
E FD
E FDN
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
KA
KC
KD
KE
KF
KN
KR
VAMax
VAMin
VEMin
VFEMax
EFDN
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Main AVR gain
Exciter KE
Feedback gain From EFD = 0 to EFDN
Feedback gain From EFDN up
Self excitation feedback gain
AVR control max
AVR control min
Exciter min output limit
Exciter max characteristic
Feedback gain breakpoint
Page 189
Description
Self-Excited Brushless, AC Exciters.
In this model:
KR is a feedback multiplier to simulate self-excitation.
The TE block simulates the rotating exciter.
All limits are non-windup.
The feedback block employs rate feedback and a non-linear saturation effect.
Notes:
of 2005.
the generator.

* The model shown in Figure 6-3, represents the field-controlled alternator-rectifier
excitation systems designated Type AC3A. These excitation systems include an alternator
main exciter with non-controlled rectifiers. The exciter employs self-excitation, and the
voltage regulator power is derived from the exciter output voltage. Therefore, this system has
an additional nonlinearity, simulated by the use of a multiplier whose inputs are the voltage
regulator command signal, VA, and the exciter output voltage, EFD, times KR. This model is
applicable to excitation systems employing static voltage regulators. For large power system
stability studies, the exciter alternator synchronous machine model is simplified. The
demagnetizing effect of load current (IFD) on the dynamics of the exciter alternator output
voltage, VE, is accounted for. The feedback path includes the constant KD, which is a function
of the exciter alternator synchronous and transient reactances.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 190
Figure 6-3Type AC3AAlternator-rectifier exciter with alternator field current

limiter
* Exciter output voltage drop due to rectifier regulation is simulated by inclusion of the
constant, KC (which is a function of commutating reactance), and the regulation curve, FEX,
as described in Annex D. The excitation system stabilizer in this model has a nonlinear
characteristic. The gain is KF with exciter output voltage less than EFDN. When exciter output
exceeds EFDN, the value of this gain becomes KN. The limits on VE are used to represent the
effects of feedback limiter operation, as described in Annex F.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 191

VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VR Max - K C I FD
VI Max
1+sTC
1+sTB
VPSS VI Min
HV
Gate
VUEL
VR
KA
1+sTA
E FD
VR Min
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TR
KA
KC
VI Max
VI Min
VR Max
VR Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
AVR time constant

AVR gain
Loading effect gain for exciter limit
AVR input limit max
AVR input limit min
AVR / Exciter limit max
AVR / Exciter limit min
Page 192
Description
AC Exciters with controlled rectifier exciter.
In this model:
The second block models the AVR lead / lag.
The third block simulates the overall gain and time constant.
The first limit is an input limit, and is a wind-up limit.
The second limit is an non-windup limit.
No AVR feedback circuit is employed.
Notes:
of 2005.
The UEL (under excitation limiter) input is disabled. In a future revision, this will be
connected to modeled limiters.

* The Type AC4A alternator-supplied controlled-rectifier excitation system illustrated in
Figure 6-4 is quite different from the other type ac systems. This high initial response
excitation system utilizes a full Thyristor bridge in the exciter output circuit.
Figure 6-4Type AC4A alternator-supplied controlled-rectifier exciter
* The voltage regulator controls the firing of the thyristor bridges. The exciter alternator
uses an independent voltage regulator to control its output voltage to a constant value.
These effects are not modeled; however, transient loading effects on the exciter alternator
are included.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 193
* Exciter loading is confined to the region described as mode 1 in Annex D, and loading
effects can be accounted for by using the exciter load current and commutating reactance to
modify excitation limits. The excitation system stabilization is frequently accomplished in
thyristor systems by a series lag-lead network rather than through rate feedback. The time
constants, TB and TC, allow simulation of this control function. The overall equivalent gain
and the time constant associated with the regulator and/or firing of the thyristors are
simulated by KA and TA, respectively.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 194

VRef
VR Max
VT
VR
KA
1+sTA
1
sTE
VFE
VR Min
VPSS
E FD
KE
VF
sK F 1+sTF3
1+sTF1 1+sTF2
VX
VX = E FD SE E FD
Parameter
TA
TE
TF1
TF2
TF3
KA
KE
KF
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
AVR time constant

AVR feedback block first lag time constant
AVR feedback block second lag time constant
AVR feedback block lead time constant
AVR gain
Exciter KE
AVR feedback gain
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 195
Description
Brushless AC Exciters.
In this model:
The first and feedback blocks model the AVR.
The only limit is a non-windup limit.
Everything to the right of VR models the exciter.
Notes:
of 2005.

* The model shown in Figure 6-5, designated as Type AC5A, is a simplified model for
brushless excitation systems. The regulator is supplied from a source, such as a permanent
magnet generator, which is not affected by system disturbances.
Figure 6-5Type AC5ASimplified rotating rectifier excitation system representation
* Unlike other ac models, this model uses loaded rather than open circuit exciter saturation
data in the same way as it is used for the dc models (Annex C). Because the model has been
widely implemented by the industry, it is sometimes used to represent other types of systems
when either detailed data for them are not available or simplified models are required.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 196

VRef
VUEL
VA Max
VT
1
1+sTR
1+sTK
KA
1+sTA
VT VR Max
1
sTE
VT VR Min
VA Min
VPSS
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
1+sTC
1+sTB
VE
E FD
VE SE VE
VH Max
1+sTJ
1+sTH
FEX = 0
KH
VFE LIM
FEX =f I N
KE
IN =
K C I FD
VE
KD
I FD
Parameter
TR
TK
TA
TB
TC
TE
TJ
TH
KA
KC
KD
KE
KH
VFELim
VHMax
VAMax
VAMin
VRMax
VRMin
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Sensor time constant
First Lead/Lag block lead time constant
First Lead/Lag block lag time constant
Second Lead/Lag block lag time constant
Second Lead/Lag block lead time constant
Feedback block lead time constant
Feedback block lag time constant
First block gain
Exciter KE
Feedback gain
VFE limit value
Feedback max
AVR control max
AVR control min
Saturation voltage point 1
Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
Page 197
Description
In this model:
The second and third blocks model the AVR.
The fourth block (TE) models the exciter time constant.
The VTVRMax limit block models an AVR amplifier output powered by the terminals of
the generator. This limiter is a windup limiter.
The saturation component simulates saturation in the AC exciter.
The feedback block employs a lead-lag element.
The zero limit on the 1/sTe block is non-windup.
The VHMax limit is a windup limiter.
Notes:
of 2005.
the generator.

* The model shown in Figure 6-6 is used to represent field-controlled alternatorrectifier excitation systems with system-supplied electronic voltage regulators. The
maximum output of the regulator, VR, is a function of terminal voltage, VT. The field
current limiter included in the original model AC6A remains in the 2005 update of
this document, although over-excitation and under-excitation limiters are now
described more fully in Clause 9 and Clause 10 respectively.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 198
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 199
4.2.11 IEEE Type AC7B Excitation System

VR Max
VRef
VOEL
VT
VPSS
K IR
K DR
1
s
VR
K PA
K IA
s
VA
VA Min
1+sTDR
VFE Max - K D I FD
K P VT
VA Max
K PR
K E + SE (VE )
1
sTE
VE
E FD
VE Min
-K L VFE
K F2
SE VE
FEX = f I N
VR Min
VFE
sK F
1+sTF
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1 - 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
KE
IN =
K C I FD
VE
KD
I FD
K F1
FEX = 0
Figure 168. IEEE Type AC7B model block diagram.
Parameter
TDR
TE
TF
KC
KD
KE
KF
KF1
KF2
KL
KP
KPA
KIA
KPR
KIR
KDR
VFE Max
VE Min
VA Max
VA Min
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR Differential control time constant
Field current feedback gain
Exciter KE
AVR feedback gain
Exciter feedback gain 1
Exciter feedback gain 2
Amplifier min limit
Amplifier gain on terminal voltage
Amplifier proportional gain
Amplifier integral gain
AVR proportional control gain
AVR integral control gain
AVR differential control gain
Exciter max
Exciter min
Amplifier max
Amplifier min
AVR max
AVR min
Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
Page 200
Description
Brushless, AC Exciters with PID control.
In this model:
The AVR is modeled by the large PID block and the rate feedback block with KF.
The block with KPA models the amplifier.
Everything to the right of VFE models the rotating alternator/rectifier.
The block with TE models the alternator time constant.
The saturation component simulates saturation in the alternator.
All limits on block are non-windup limits.
The min limit with KL is a windup limit.
Notes:
of 2005.
The OEL (over excitation limiter) input is disabled. In a future revision, this will be
the generator.

* These excitation systems consist of an AC alternator with either stationary or rotating
rectifiers to produce the dc field requirements. Upgrades to earlier ac excitation systems,
which replace only the controls but retain the ac alternator and diode rectifier bridge, have
resulted in this new model, as shown in Figure 6-7. Some of the features of this excitation
system include a high bandwidth inner loop regulating generator field voltage or exciter
current (KF2, KF1), a fast exciter current limit, VFEMAX, to protect the field of the ac alternator,
and the PID generator voltage regulator (AVR). An alternative rate feedback loop (KF, TF) is
provided for stabilization if the AVR does not include a derivative term. If a PSS control is
supplied, the Type PSS2B or PSS3B models are appropriate.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 201
Figure 6-7Type AC7BAlternator-rectifier excitation system
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 202
4.2.12 IEEE Type AC8B Excitation System
K PR
VRef
VE Max - K D I FD
VR Max
VT
1
1+sTR
K IR
1
s
K DR
s
1+sTDR
KA
1+sTA
K E + SE (VE )
1
sTE
VR Min
VPSS
I N 0.433
SE VE
FEX 0.75 I
0.750 I N 1.000
FEX 1.732 1 I N
2
N
E FD
FEX = f I N
FEX 1 0.577 I N
FEX 0
VE Min
VFE
0.433 I N 0.750
I N 1.000
VE
KE
IN =
K C I FD
VE
KD
I FD
Figure 169. IEEE Type AC8B model block diagram.
Parameter
TR
TA
TE
TDR
KPR
KIR
KDR
KA
KC
KD
KE
VR Max
VR Min
VE Max
VE Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Differential time constant for PID control
Proportional gain for PID control
Integral gain for PID control
Differential gain for PID control
Exciter KE
Exciter max
Exciter min
Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
Page 203
Description
Brushless, AC Exciters and PID AVR control.
In this model:
The second group of blocks (PID group) and the third block (with KA) models the AVR.
The fourth block (TE) models the exciter time constant.
The limit on the fourth block models the exciter limit and includes field current feedback
effects. This limiter is a non-windup limiter.
The saturation component simulates saturation in the AC exciter.
Notes:
The IEEE Type AC8B excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations
of 2005.
the generator.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 204

* The block diagram of the AC8B model is shown in Figure 6-8. The AVR in this model
consists of PID control, with separate constants for the proportional (KPR), integral (KIR),
and derivative (KDR) gains. The values for the constants are chosen for best performance
for each particular generator excitation system. The representation of the brushless
exciter (TE, KE, SE, KC, KD) is similar to the model Type AC2A. Sample data for this
model is shown in Annex H. The Type AC8B model can be used to represent static
voltage regulators applied to brushless excitation systems. Digitally based voltage
regulators feeding dc rotating main exciters can be represented with the AC Type AC8B
model with the parameters KC and KD set to 0. For thyristor power stages fed from the
generator terminals, the limits VRMAX and VRMIN should be a function of terminal voltage:
VT VRMAX and VT VRMIN. This may be accommodated in simulation programs using an
additional logic state to identify bus or PMG fed systems from terminal fed systems. The
limits on VE are used to represent the effects of feedback limiter operation, as described
in Annex F.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 205
4.2.13 IEEE Type DC1A Excitation System

VUEL1
VUEL 0
VRef
Alternate
VR Max
UEL
VT
VPSS
1+sTC
1+sTB
KA
1+sTA
HV
Gate
VR Min
VF
VR
1
sTE
VFE
E FD
KE
VX
VX = E FD SE E FD
sK F
1+sTF
Figure 170. IEEE Type DC1A model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
KA
KE
KF
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR time constant
AVR and Exciter gain
Exciter KE
AVR feedback gain
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 206
Description
DC Exciters.
In this model:
The blocks up to VR and the feedback block model the AVR.
Notes:
The IEEE Type DC1A excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations
of 2005.

* This model, described by the block diagram of Figure 5-1, is used to represent fieldcontrolled dc commutator exciters with continuously acting voltage regulators (especially the
direct-acting rheostatic, rotating amplifier, and magnetic amplifier types).5 Because this
model has been widely implemented by the industry, it is sometimes used to represent other
types of systems when detailed data for them are not available or when a simplified model is
required.
* The principal input to this model is the output, VC, from the terminal voltage transducer and
load compensator model previously described. At the summing junction, terminal voltage
transducer output, VC, is subtracted from the set point reference, VREF. The stabilizing
feedback, VF, is subtracted and the power system stabilizing signal, VS, is added to produce
an error voltage. In the steady state, these last two signals are zero, leaving only the terminal
voltage error signal. The resulting signal is amplified in the regulator. The major time
constant, TA, and gain, KA, associated with the voltage regulator are shown incorporating nonwindup limits typical of saturation or amplifier power supply limitations. A discussion of
windup and non-windup limits is provided in Annex E. These voltage regulators utilize
power sources that are essentially unaffected by brief transients on the synchronous machine
or auxiliary buses. The time constants, TB and TC, may be used to model equivalent time
constants inherent in the voltage regulator, but these time constants are frequently small
enough to be neglected and provision should be made for zero input data.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 207
* The voltage regulator output, VR, is used to control the exciter, which may be either
separately excited or self-excited as discussed in the IEEE Committee Report [B20]. When a
self-excited shunt field is used, the value of KE reflects the setting of the shunt field rheostat.
In some instances, the resulting value of KE can be negative and allowance should be made
for this. Most of these exciters utilize self-excited shunt fields with the voltage regulator
operating in a mode commonly termed buck-boost. The majority of station operators
manually track the voltage regulator by periodically trimming the rheostat set point so as to
zero the voltage regulator output. This may be simulated by selecting the value of KE so that
initial conditions are satisfied with VR = 0, as described in the IEEE Committee Report [B20].
In some programs, if KE is entered as zero, it is automatically calculated by the program for
self-excitation.
* If a nonzero value for KE is provided, the program should not recalculate KE, as a fixed
rheostat setting is implied. For such systems, the rheostat is frequently fixed at a value that
would produce self-excitation near rated conditions. Systems with fixed field rheostat
settings are in widespread use on units that are remotely controlled. A value for KE = 1 is
used to represent a separately excited exciter.
* The term SE[EFD] is a nonlinear function with values defined at two or more chosen values
of EFD, as described in Annex C. The output of this saturation block, VX, is the product of the
input, EFD, and the value of the nonlinear function SE[EFD] at this exciter voltage. A signal
derived from field voltage is normally used to provide excitation system stabilization, VF, via
the rate feedback with gain, KF, and time constant, TF.
Figure 5-1Type DC1ADC commutator exciter
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 208

VUEL1
VUEL 0
VRef
Alternate
VT VR Max
UEL
VT
VPSS
1+sTC
1+sTB
KA
1+sTA
HV
Gate
VT VR Min
VF
VR
1
sTE
VFE
E FD
KE
VX
VX = E FD SE E FD
sK F
1+sTF
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
KA
KE
KF
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR time constant
AVR and Exciter gain
Exciter KE
AVR feedback gain
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 209
Description
DC Exciters.
In this model:
The blocks up to VR and the feedback block model the AVR.
The output limits of the AVR amplifier have an additional terminal voltage effect.
Notes:
of 2005.

* The model shown in Figure 5-2 is used to represent field-controlled dc commutator exciters
with continuously acting voltage regulators having supplies obtained from the generator or
auxiliary bus. It differs from the Type DC1A model only in the voltage regulator output
limits, which are now proportional to terminal voltage VT. It is representative of solid-state
replacements for various forms of older mechanical and rotating amplifier regulating
equipment connected to dc commutator exciters.
Figure 5-2Type DC2ADC commutator exciter with bus-fed regulator
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 210
VRef
VT
VR Max
KV
VErr
-K V
VRMax - VRMin
s K V TRH
VRH
VR Min
if VErr > K V
then VR = VRMax
if VErr < K V
then VR = VRH
if VErr < -K V
then VR = VRMin
VR
1
sT
E
VFE
E FD
KE
VX
VX = E FD SE E FD
Parameter
TE
TRH
KE
KV
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR time constant
Exciter KE
Input limit
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 211
Description
Older DC Exciters.
In this model:
The KV input limit is a windup limit.
The limit on the first block is a non-windup limit.
Notes:
of 2005.

* The systems discussed in the previous sub-clauses are representative of the first generation
of high gain, fast-acting excitation sources. The Type DC3A model is used to represent older
systems, in particular those dc commutator exciters with non-continuously acting regulators
that were commonly used before the development of the continuously acting varieties.
* These systems respond at basically two different rates, depending upon the magnitude of
voltage error. For small errors, adjustment is made periodically with a signal to a motoroperated rheostat. Larger errors cause resistors to be quickly shorted or inserted and a strong
forcing signal applied to the exciter. Continuous motion of the motor-operated rheostat
occurs for these larger error signals, even though it is bypassed by contactor action. Figure 53 illustrates this control action. The exciter representation is similar to that of systems
described previously. Note that no excitation system stabilizer is represented.
* Depending upon the magnitude of voltage error, VREF VC, different regulator modes come
into play. If the voltage error is larger than the fast raise/lower contact setting, KV (typically
5%), VRMAX or VRMIN is applied to the exciter, depending upon the sign of the voltage error.
For an absolute value of voltage error less than KV, the exciter input equals the rheostat
setting VRH. The rheostat setting is notched up or down, depending upon the sign of the error.
The travel time representing continuous motion of the rheostat drive motor is TRH. A nonwindup limit (see Annex E) is shown around this block, to represent the fact that when the
rheostat reaches either limit, it is ready to come off the limit immediately when the input
signal reverses.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 212
* Additional refinements, such as dead band for small errors, have been considered, but were
not deemed justified for the relatively few older machines using these voltage regulators.
Figure 5-3Type DC3ADC commutator exciter with non-continuously acting regulators
* The model assumes that the quick raise/lower limits are the same as the rheostat limits. It
does not account for time constant changes in the exciter field as a result of changes in field
resistance (as a result of rheostat movement and operation of quick action contacts).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 213
4.2.16 IEEE Type DC4B Excitation System

Alternate OEL Inputs
VOEL 0
VUEL 0
VOEL1
Alternate UEL Inputs
VUEL1
VRMax
KA
VT
VPSS
VT VR Max
VT
VRef
KP
KI
s
HV
Gate
LV
Gate
VA
KA
1+sTA
VT VR Min
VR
VFE
sK D
1+sTD
VF
1
sT
E
E FD
KE
VX
VRMin
KA
VX = E FD SE E FD
sK F
1+sTF
Figure 173. IEEE Type DC4B model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TE
TD
TF
KA
KD
KE
KP
KI
VR Max
VR Min
E1
E2
S(E1)
S(E2)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Main system time constant
AVR PID differential time constant
AVR rate feedback time constant
Main system gain
AVR PID differential gain
Exciter KE
AVR PID proportional gain
AVR PID integral gain
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 214
Description
Older DC Exciters.
In this model:
The KV input limit is a windup limit.
The limit on the first block is a non-windup limit.
Notes:
The IEEE Type DC4B excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations
of 2005.

* These excitation systems utilize a field-controlled dc commutator exciter with a
continuously acting voltage regulator having supplies obtained from the generator or
auxiliary bus. The replacement of the controls only as an upgrade (retaining the dc
commutator exciter) has resulted in a new model. The block diagram of this model is shown
in Figure 5-4. This excitation system typically includes a proportional, integral, and
differential (PID) generator voltage regulator (AVR). An alternative rate feedback loop (KF,
TF) for stabilization is also shown in the model if the AVR does not include a derivative
term. If a PSS control is supplied, the appropriate model is the Type PSS2B model.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 215
Figure 5-4Type DC4BDC commutator exciter with PID style regulator
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 216
4.2.17 IEEE Type ST1A Excitation System

Alternative PSS Inputs
VPSS 0
Alternative UEL Inputs
VUEL 0
VT
VUEL 2
VOEL
VUEL1
VRef
1
1+sTR
VPSS1
VI
VT VR Max - K C I FD
VA Max
VI Max
HV
Gate
1+sTC 1+sTC1
1+sTB 1+sTB1
VI Min
KA
1+sTA
VA
LV
Gate
HV
Gate
VT VR Min
I LR
VA Min
K LR
E FD
I FD
VF
sK F
1+sTF
Figure 174. IEEE Type ST1A model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TB
TB1
TC
TC1
TF
TR
KA
KC
KF
KLR
ILR
VA Max
VA Min
VR Max
VR Min
VI Max
VI Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR main time constant
AVR Lead/Lag block lag time constant 1
AVR Lead/Lag block lead time constant 1
Input transducer time constant
AVR main gain
Field loading gain
AVR rate feedback gain
Field current feedback limit start setting
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Exciter limit max
Exciter limit min
AVR input limit max
AVR input limit min
Page 217
Description
Static Exciters.
In this model:
The AVR (KA block) limit is a non-windup limit.
All other limits are windup limits.
Notes:
The IEEE Type ST1A excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations of
2005.

* The computer model of the Type ST1A potential-source controlled-rectifier excitation
system shown in Figure 7-1 is intended to represent systems in which excitation power is
supplied through a transformer from the generator terminals (or the units auxiliary bus) and
is regulated by a controlled rectifier. The maximum exciter voltage available from such
systems is directly related to the generator terminal voltage (except as noted, as follows).
* In this type of system, the inherent exciter time constants are very small, and exciter
stabilization may not be required. On the other hand, it may be desirable to reduce the
transient gain of these systems for other reasons. The model shown is sufficiently versatile to
represent transient gain reduction implemented either in the forward path via time constants,
TB and TC (in which case KF would normally be set to zero), or in the feedback path by
suitable choice of rate feedback parameters, KF and TF. Voltage regulator gain and any
inherent excitation system time constant are represented by KA and TA, respectively. The time
constants, TC1 and TB1, allow for the possibility of representing transient gain increase, in
which case TC1 would be greater than TB1.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 218
Figure 7-1Type ST1APotential-source, controlled-rectifier exciter
* The way in which the firing angle for the bridge rectifiers is derived affects the inputoutput relationship, which is assumed to be linear in the model by choice of a simple gain,
KA. For many systems a truly linear relationship applies. In a few systems, the bridge
relationship is not linearized, leaving this nominally linear gain a sinusoidal function, the
amplitude of which may be dependent on the supply voltage. As the gain is normally set very
high, a linearization of this characteristic is normally satisfactory for modeling purposes. The
representation of the ceiling is the same whether the characteristic is linear or sinusoidal.
* In many cases, the internal limits on VI can be neglected. The field voltage limits that are
functions of both terminal voltage and synchronous machine field current should be modeled.
The representation of the field voltage positive limit as a linear function of synchronous
machine field current is possible because operation of the rectifier bridge in such systems is
confined to the mode 1 region as described in Annex D. The negative limit would have a
similar current-dependent characteristic, but the sign of the term could be either positive or
negative depending upon whether a constant firing angle or constant extinction angle is
chosen for the limit. As field current is normally low under this condition, the term is not
included in the model. As a result of the very high forcing capability of these systems, a field
current limiter is sometimes employed to protect the generator rotor and exciter. The limit
start setting is defined by ILR and the gain is represented by KLR. To permit this limit to be
ignored, provision should be made to allow KLR to be set to zero. This limiter is described
here to maintain consistency with the original ST1A model. However, this document
describes over-excitation and under-excitation limiters more fully in Clause 9 and Clause 10,
respectively.
* While for the majority of these excitation systems, a fully controlled bridge is employed,
the model is also applicable to systems in which only half of the bridge is controlled, in
which case the negative field voltage limit is set to zero (VRMIN = 0).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 219
4.2.18 IEEE Type ST2 Excitation System

sK F
1+sTF
KE
VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VF
VUEL
IT
E FD Max
VE = K P V T + jK I I T
VB
VE
I FD
K I
I N = C FD
VE
IN
FEX = f I N
1
sT
E
VR Min
VPSS
VT
KA
1+sTA
HV
Gate
VR Max
E FD
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
FEX = 0
Figure 175. IEEE Type ST2 model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TE
TF
TR
KA
KC
KE
KF
KI
KP
VR Max
VR Min
EFD Max
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR main gain
Exciter KE
Load compensation gain for terminal current
Load compensation gain for terminal voltage
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Exciter output limit max
Page 220
Description
Static Exciters with a compound source.
In this model:
All limits are non-windup limit.
Notes:
This model has been superseded by the IEEE ST2A, and has been kept in the model
library for backwards compatibility. The only difference between the two models is the
circle just to the right of VR. The ST2 utilizes a Summing Function while the ST2A
utilizes a Multiplication Function.
See the IEEE ST2A model documentation for more information regarding the application
of this excitation system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 221

Alternate
UEL Inputs
VUEL 0
VUEL1
sK F
1+sTF
KE
VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VF
VR Max
IT
VE = K P V T + jK I I T
VB
VE
I FD
K I
I N = C FD
VE
IN
FEX = f I N
1
sT
E
VR Min
VPSS
VT
KA
1+sTA
HV
Gate
E FD Max
E FD
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
FEX = 0
Parameter
TA
TE
TF
TR
KA
KC
KE
KF
KI
KP
VR Max
VR Min
EFD Max
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR main gain
Exciter KE
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 222
Description
Static Exciters with a compound source.
In this model:
All limits are non-windup limit.
Notes:
2005.

* Some static systems utilize both current and voltage sources (generator terminal quantities)
to comprise the power source. These compound-source rectifier excitation systems are
designated Type ST2A and are modeled as shown in Figure 7-2. It is necessary to form a
model of the exciter power source utilizing a phasor combination of terminal voltage, VT, and
terminal current, IT. Rectifier loading and commutation effects are accounted for as described
in Annex D. EFDMAX represents the limit on the exciter voltage due to saturation of the
magnetic components. The regulator controls the exciter output through controlled saturation
of the power transformer components. TE is a time constant associated with the inductance of
the control windings.
Figure 7-2Type ST2ACompound-source rectifier exciter
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 223

VG Max
KG
VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VUEL
VI Max
VI
HV
Gate
VPSS
VI Min
IT
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
VT
KA
1+sTA
1+sTC
1+sTB
VM Max
VG
VR Max
VM
E FD
VM Min
FEX = 0
VB Max
VE
VB
K P = K P e jP
I FD
K I
I N = C FD
VE
IN
FEX = f I N
Parameter
TA
TB
TC
TM
TR
KA
KC
KG
KI
KM
KP
XL
VB Max
VG Max
VM Max
VM Min
VI Max
VI Min
VR Max
VR Min
EFD Max
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Field voltage regulator time constant
AVR main gain
Field voltage regulator feedback gain
Field voltage regulator gain
Load compensation reactance for terminal current
Field current feedback and compensation limit max
Field voltage regulator feedback limit max
Field voltage regulator limit max
Field voltage regulator limit min
AVR input limit max
AVR input limit min
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 224
Description
Static Exciters.
In this model:
The KA and KM block limits are non-windup limit.
All other limits are windup limits.
Notes:
2005.

* Some static systems utilize a field voltage control loop to linearize the exciter control
characteristic as shown in Figure 7-3. This also makes the output independent of supply
source variations until supply limitations are reached.
* These systems utilize a variety of controlled-rectifier designs: full thyristor complements or
hybrid bridges in either series or shunt configurations. The power source may consist of only
a potential source, either fed from the machine terminals or from internal windings. Some
designs may have compound power sources utilizing both machine potential and current.
These power sources are represented as phasor combinations of machine terminal current and
voltage and are accommodated by suitable parameters in the model shown. The excitation
system stabilizer for these systems is provided by a series lag-lead element in the voltage
regulator, represented by the time constants TB and TC. The inner loop field voltage regulator
is comprised of the gains KM and KG and the time constant TM. This loop has a wide
bandwidth compared with the upper limit of 3 Hz for the models described in this
recommended practice. The time constant TM may be increased for study purposes,
eliminating the need for excessively short computing increments while still retaining the
required accuracy at 3 Hz. Rectifier loading and commutation effects are accounted for as
discussed in Annex D. The limit, VBMAX, is determined by the saturation level of power
components.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 225
Figure 7-3Type ST3APotential- or compound-source controlled-rectifier exciter

with field voltage control loop
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 226
4.2.21 IEEE Type ST4B Excitation System

KG
VUEL
VRef
VT
1
1+sTR
VM Max VOEL
VR Max
K PR +-
VPSS
K IR
s
VR
IT
VR Min
K PM +-
K IM
s
VM
LV
Gate
E FD
VM Min
I N < 0.433
FEX = 1- 0.577I N
0.433 1.000
VT
1
1+sT
FEX = 0
VB Max
VE
VE = K P V T +j K I +K P X L I T
K P =K P e jP
IN =
I FD
K C I FD
VE
IN
VB
FEX = f I N
Figure 178. IEEE Type ST4B model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TR
KC
KG
KI
KIM
KIR
KP
KPM
KPR
XL
VB Max
VM Max
VM Min
VR Max
VR Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Field voltage regulator integral control gain
Field voltage regulator proportional control gain
Load compensation reactance for terminal current
Field current feedback and compensation limit max
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Page 227
Description
Static Exciters.
In this model:
The KPR and KPM block limits are non-windup limits.
VB Max limit is a windup limit.
Notes:
The IEEE Type ST4B excitation system model corresponds to IEEE recommendations of
2005.

* This model is a variation of the Type ST3A model, with a proportional plus integral (PI)
regulator block replacing the lag-lead regulator characteristic that was in the ST3A model.
Both potential- and compound-source rectifier excitation systems are modeled as shown in
Figure 7-4. The PI regulator blocks have non-windup limits that are represented as described
in Annex A. The voltage regulator of this model is typically implemented digitally, so the
model is identified with the suffix B.
* The other features of the regulator are a low value gate for the OEL limit function, and the
UEL and V/Hz control are summed into the input to the regulator. This means that on a unit
with PSS control, the PSS will be active if the unit goes into UEL limit control, unlike some
previous designs that had take-over type limiters. The description of rectifier regulation, FEX,
may be found in Annex D. There is flexibility in the power component model to represent
bus-fed exciters (KI and XL both equal to zero), compound static systems (XL = 0), and
potential- and compound- source systems where XL is not zero. The appropriate PSS model
to use with the ST4B excitation model is Type PSS2B.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 228
Figure 7-4Type ST4BPotential- or compound-source controlled-rectifier exciter
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 229
X>0
X>0
VR Max
KR
VOEL
VUEL
VT
HV
Gate
LV
Gate
VT VR Max
VR Max
1+sTC1 1+sTC2
1+sTB1 1+sTB2
VPSS
VRef
VR Min
VR Max
KR
KR
1+sTUC1 1+sTUC2
1+sTUB1 1+sTUB2
VR Min
VR Max
KR
KR
1+sTOC1 1+sTOC2
1+sTOB1 1+sTOB2
KR
VR Min
VR
1
1 + sT1
E FD
VT VR Min
KC
I FD
UEL
Section
OEL
Section
VR Min
KR
Parameter
T1
TB1
TB2
TC1
TC2
TOB1
TOB2
TOC1
TOC2
TUB1
TUB2
TUC1
TUC2
KC
KR
VR Max
VR Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Field voltage regulator time constant
AVR OEL Lead/Lag block lag time constant 1
AVR OEL Lead/Lag block lag time constant 2
AVR OEL Lead/Lag block lead time constant 1
AVR OEL Lead/Lag block lead time constant 2
AVR UEL Lead/Lag block lag time constant 1
AVR UEL Lead/Lag block lag time constant 2
AVR UEL Lead/Lag block lead time constant 1
AVR UEL Lead/Lag block lead time constant 2
Field feedback gain
Exciter limit max
Exciter limit min
Page 230
Description
Static Exciters with automated UEL, OEL circuit block changing.
In this model:
All limits are non-windup limits.
Notes:
2005.

* The Type ST5B excitation system shown in Figure 7-5 is a variation of the Type ST1A
model, with alternative over-excitation and under-excitation inputs and additional limits. The
corresponding stabilizer models that can be used with these models are the Type PSS2B,
PSS3B, or PSS4B. Sample data for the model is provided in Annex H.
Figure 7-5Type ST5BStatic potential-source excitation system
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 231

I FD
Alternate
OEL Inputs
VOEL
I LR
VOEL
K CI
K LR
VT
1
1+sTR
VA Max
HV
Gate
K FF
VPSS
K
K PA + IA
s
VA
KM
if ( VB 0 )
if ( VB = 0 )
VR Min
VUEL
VB
VT
VR Max
LV
Gate
VR
E FD
VR Min
VA Min
VRef
VG
KG
1+sTG
Parameter
TG
TR
ILR
KCI
KFF
KG
KIA
KLR
KM
KPA
VA Max
VA Min
VR Max
VR Min
VB
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Field voltage regulator feedback time constant
Exciter field current feedback constant
Exciter field current feedback gain
Field voltage regulator feed-forward gain
Exciter field current feedback gain
AVR limit max
AVR limit min
Field voltage regulator output scaling and switch
Page 232
Description
Static Exciters.
In this model:
The KPA and KIA block limits are non-windup limits.
The VRMax and VRMin limits are windup limits.
If VB is zero, then the terminal voltage is used to scale the output.
If VB is non-zero, then the value of VB is used to scale the output.
Notes:
2005.

* The AVR shown in Figure 7-6 consists of a PI voltage regulator with an inner loop field
voltage regulator and pre-control. The field voltage regulator implements a proportional
control. The pre-control and the delay in the feedback circuit increase the dynamic response.
If the field voltage regulator is not implemented, the corresponding parameters KFF and KG
are set to 0. VR represents the limits of the power rectifier. The ceiling current IFD limitation
is included in this model. The power for the rectifier, VB, may be supplied from the generator
terminals or from an independent source. Inputs are provided for external models of the overexcitation limiter (VOEL), under-excitation limiter (VUEL), and PSS (VS). Sample data for the
model is provided in Annex H.
Figure 7-6Type ST6BStatic potential-source excitation system with

field current limiter
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 233

VOEL 0
1+sTG
1+sTF
VT
Alternate
OEL Inputs
Alternate
OEL Input
VOEL1
VMax
VSCL
VRef
VDroop
LV
Gate
HV
Gate
VR Max VT
VRef FB
HV
Gate
K PA
VH
VMin
Alternate
UEL Inputs
VUEL 0
Alternate
UEL Input
VUEL 2
VOEL 2
VPSS
VR Min VT
VUEL1
1 + sTC
1 + sTB
LV
Gate
LV
Gate
VL
VR
HV
Gate
E FD
VR Min VT
VR Max VT
KL
K IA
1+sTIA
KH
Parameter
TB
TC
TF
TG
TIA
KIA
KL
KH
KPA
VMax
VMin
VR Max
VR Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR lag time constant
AVR lead time constant
Terminal voltage input lag time constant
Terminal voltage input lead time constant
Field voltage feedback time constant
AVR main control gain
Auxiliary signal input limit max
Auxiliary signal input limit min
Regulator limit max
Regulator limit min
Page 234
Description
Static Exciters.
In this model:
All limits are windup limits.
The VRMax and VRMin limits are windup limits.
Notes:
2005.
The VSC and VDroop signal input are disabled.

* The model ST7B in Figure 7-7 is representative of static potential-source excitation
systems. In this system, the AVR consists of a PI voltage regulator. A phase lead-lag filter in
series allows introduction of a derivative function, typically used with brushless excitation
systems. In that case, the regulator is of the PID type. In addition, the terminal voltage
channel includes a phase lead-lag filter. The AVR includes the appropriate inputs on its
reference for over-excitation limiter (OEL1), under-excitation limiter (UEL), stator current
limiter (SCL), and current compensator (DROOP). All these limitations, when they work at
voltage reference level, keep the PSS (VS signal from Type PSS1A, PSS2A, or PSS2B) in
operation. However, the UEL limitation can also be transferred to the high value (HV) gate
acting on the output signal. In addition, the output signal passes through a low value (LV)
gate for a ceiling over-excitation limiter (OEL2). All control loops in the diagram, including
limitation functions, are built to obtain a non-windup behavior of any integrator (see Annex
E). Sample data for the model are provided in Annex H.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 235
Figure 7-7Type ST7BStatic potential-source excitation system
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 236
4.2.25 Inverter Q Control - For WT4G and PV1G Models Only

1
Q Elec
1+sT
Kqd
Ipqd
VErmx
VReg
1+sTr
VRef
VErmn
Q Max
K iv
s
1
fN
K pv
1+sTv
Q wv
IQmx I FD
1
1+sTC
Varflg
QCmd
If VReg < VFrz Lock States
PFA Ref
K Q1
s
Q Ref
tan
Q Min
IQmx
VMax
Q Max QGen
Q Min
VMin
K V1
s
IQcmd
E FD
Vterm -IQmx
PElec
1+sTP
IQmx I FD
Pfaflg
Figure 182. Inverter Q Control model block diagram.
Parameter
TC
TIpqd
Tp
Tr
Tv
fN
Kiv
Kpv
Kqd
KQI
KVI
VErmx
VErmn
VMax
VMin
VFrz
QMax
QMin
Varflg
Pfaflg
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
1/0
1/0
Description
Communication delay and filtering in control
Reactive power droop controller time constant
Power measurement lag time constant
Voltage measurement lag time constant
Proportional voltage controller time constant
Wind park unit commitment
Voltage regulator integral controller gain
Voltage regulator proportional controller gain
Reactive power droop controller gain
Reactive power integral controller gain
Voltage integral controller gain
Voltage error limit max
Voltage error limit min
Voltage output limit max
Voltage output limit min
Voltage regulator freezing voltage
Reactive power limit max
Reactive power limit min
Var control mode
Power factor control mode
Page 237
Description
The inverter control for models PV1G and WT4G.
In this model:
Varflg and Pfaflg are used to set the control mode of the Q Control model. This table
shows settings for the three main control modes:
Control Mode
Voltage Control (normal operation)
Constant Q Control
Power Factor Control
Varflg
1
0
0
Pfaflg
0
0
1
fN is used to present wind farms with a reduced number of wind generators on line. For
PV systems, fN is set to 1.
IQmx is fed back from the WT4G and PV1G models via the field current variable IFD.
IQcmd is sent to the WT4G and PV1G models via the field voltage variable EFD.
Notes:
From [2] Section 2.2,2:
The steady-state and dynamic characteristics of Type 3 and Type 4 WTGs are dominated
by the power converter.
From [3] Section 2.1:
The fundamental frequency electrical dynamic performance of a solar plant is completely
dominated by the converter. The control of active and reactive power is handled by fast,
high bandwidth regulators within the convertor controls.
From [5] Section 2.0:
For the Type 4 WTG, the power converter acts as a buffer between the grid and the
electric generator, thus, any transients occurring in the grid are not translated to the
electric generator. Under normal or fault transients, the power converter can be fully
controlled.
References:
Energy Modeling Task Force, August 2010.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 238

for CIEE By: National Renewable Energy Laboratory. March, 2010.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 239
4.2.26 Simple Excitation System
VRef
VT
EMax
1+ sTA
1+ sTB
K
1+sTE
E FD
EMin
VPSS
Figure 183. Simple Exciter model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TB
TE
K
EMin
EMax
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR Lead Time Constant
AVR Lag Time Constant
Exciter Time Constant
Exciter Gain
Exciter Min Limit
Exciter Max Limit
Page 240
Description
Use this model to simulate excitation systems that need:
A generic excitation system response.
In this model:
The lead-lag block is meant to simulate the AVR.
The second block is meant to simulate a simplistic rotating or simple static exciter.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 241
4.2.27 STAMFORD 1 Excitation System

VRef
AVR Output
Windup Limit
Transducer Time
Constant
VT
AVR Gain and Time

Constant
1+sTR
E A1
1
sT
E
VFE
E A2
Stabilizing (Damping) Section
VF
E C1
VR
KA
1+sTA
VPSS
Exciter Output
Windup Limit
KF
1+sTF2
sTF1
1+sTF1
Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)
E FD
E C2
KE
VX
VX = E FD SE E FD
Exciter with Saturation
Figure 184. STAMFORD 1 AVR, and exciter model block diagram.
Parameter
KA
KF
TR
TA
TF1
TF2
EA1
EA2
KE
TE
EC1
EC2
E1
E2
SE1
SE2
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
AVR Forward Gain
AVR Feedback Gain
Transducer Time Constant
AVR Time Constant
Stabilizing Section 1st Time Constant
Stabilizing Section 2nd Time Constant
AVR output Windup Max Limit
AVR output Windup Min Limit
Exciter Gain
Exciter Time Constant
Exciter output Windup Max Limit
Exciter output Windup Min Limit
Exciter Voltage for SE1
Exciter Voltage for SE2
Exciter Saturation at E1
Exciter Saturation at E2
Page 242
Description
Stamford supplied excitation system.
In this model:
Both limits are windup limits.
The saturation block is meant to simulate saturation in a rotating exciter.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 243
4.3 Governor Models

In the previous section on generators, it was noted that mechanical power (PMech) was an input to
both the round rotor and salient pole models. Also, during initialization, PMech was determined
after properly initializing the model. The value of PMech is controlled and supplied from the
governor system. EasyPower DS includes 15 governor system models.
Cummins Diesel 1
Gas Turbine
Gas Turbine 2
Hydro
IEEE Hydro 2
IEEE Hydro 3
IEEE Steam
Steam Turbine
WECC Gas Turbine
Woodward Diesel
Similar to the excitation system, the governor system is actually composed of several
components. These components are typically made to model but not limited to:
The prime mover. This is the turbine, engine, etc., that rotates the shaft of the generator.
The governor controls. These are created specifically with control blocks to supply a
tunable control system for controlling the speed of the generator.
Valve control time constants. In cases where time is needed to open or close a valve
(motor or hydraulic operation, etc.), this must be modeled.
Firing delay. In a diesel engine, the firing delay is modeled as a pure e-st delay function.
This translates into a time step oriented delay line.
Load limits. In gas turbines, input air temperature affects the maximum power output of
the unit.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 244
4.3.1 Caterpillar Diesel 1 Governor System
NE
PI Control
1.0
VMax
(pu)
Rated
RPM
KI
s

TL Min
VMin
Speed Error
Limit
TL Max =
TMax Rated Torque Rated RPM

K A K C K G 1000
TL Min =
Rated
Torque 1+
Actuator
(Injector)
TL Max
Torque
Limit
KP
K G 1000
NE
KA
1 + sTA
Duration
vs.
Fuel Conversion
TMin Rated Torque Rated RPM

K A K C K G 1000
K C e-sT
Engine
Rated Torque =
PMech
Torque in N-m
1000 Rated MVA 60000

Nm
2 Rated RPM
Figure 185. Caterpillar Diesel 1 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T
TA
KA
KC
KG
KI
KP
VMax
VMin
TMax
TMin
Rated RPM
Rated MVA
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
NM per RPM
NM per RPM
pu
pu
NM
NM
RPM
MVA
Description
Engine delay or dead time
Actuator time constant
Actuator gain
Engine gain
Fuel conversion gain
Integral gain
Proportional gain
Speed error limit max
Speed error limit min
Torque control max
Torque control min
Rated RPM of engine
Rated MVA
Page 245
Description
Use this model to simulate governor systems for:
Caterpillar diesel engine prime mover systems.
In this model:
The droop is modeled via the varied gain settings.
Between the first operators and the operator, units are physical.
All limits are wind-up limits.
TLMax and TLMin are calculated as shown in the model figure.
Rated Torque is calculated as shown in the model figure.
Delay block has unlimited memory.
Notes:
* The delay or dead time of the diesel engine is composed of three delays: the time
elapsed until the actuator output actually injects the fuel into the cylinder, the fuel
burning time to produce torque, and the time until all cylinders produce torque at the
engine shaft.
In lieu of detailed information supplied by the manufacturer, the engine delay or dead
time can be estimated assuming one quarter of a shaft revolution to physically inject fuel,
plus one shaft revolution divided by the number of pistons to produce torque. Using
engine speed or RPM, that equation can be written as:
T=
0.25 60
RPM
60
RPM Number Pistons
* Synchronous Generators Volume 1, Ion Boldea.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 246
4.3.2 Cummins Diesel 1 Governor System
PID Control
KP
Speed Ref
VMax
KI
s
1+
Fuel System Engine
Dynamics Combustion
TMax
KC
e-sT
1 + as
e-sTC
PMech
Engine Gain
TMin
VMin
Speed Error
Limit
K Ds
1+sTD
Torque
Limit
Figure 186. Cummins Diesel 1 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
a
T
TC
TD
KC
KD
KI
KP
TMax
TMin
VMax
VMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Fuel system time constant
Fuel system delay or dead time
Engine combustion delay or dead time
Differential control time constant
Engine gain
Differential control gain
Integral control gain
Proportional control gain
Torque control max
Torque control min
Speed error limit max
Speed error limit min
Page 247
Description
Cummins diesel engine prime mover systems.
In this model:
All delay blocks have unlimited memory.
Notes:
* The delay or dead time of the diesel engine is composed of three delays: the time
elapsed until the actuator output actually injects the fuel into the cylinder, the fuel
burning time to produce torque, and the time until all cylinders produce torque at the
engine shaft.
In lieu of detailed information supplied by the manufacturer, the engine delay or dead
time can be estimated assuming one quarter of a shaft revolution to physically inject fuel,
plus one shaft revolution divided by the number of pistons to produce torque. Using
engine speed in RPM, that equation can be written as:
T=
0.25 60
RPM
60
RPM Number Pistons
* Synchronous Generators Volume 1, Ion Boldea.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 248
4.3.3 Gas Turbine Governor System

AT
KT
1+ sT3
Speed Ref
VMax
Per Unit Change In Speed

1
R
1
1+
sT1
Low
Value
1
1+
sT2
PMech
VMin
DT
Turbine Damping
Figure 187. Gas Turbine Governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
AT
KT
R
VMax
VMin
DT
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Governor control time constant
Combustion chamber time constant
Exhaust temp measurement time constant
Ambient temperature load limit
Load limit gain
Droop
Governor control max
Governor control min
Turbine Damping
Page 249
Description
Gas turbine prime movers.
In this model:
The first block models the droop.
The second block (T1) models the governor time constant.
The third block models the combustion chamber time constant.
Dr models turbine speed damping.
Notes:
Set AT to 1.0 when operating at design ambient temperature.
Set AT less than 1.0 when ambient temperature is higher than rated.
Set AT greater than 1.0 when ambient temperature is lower than rated.
Load limiting is a protective function, and thus setting K T and AT is based on the design
of the turbine.
VMax limits the power output of the turbine from the fuel path, and thus can serve as an
operational limit.
The low value gate causes normal behavior (no temperature limiting) until the load
limiting feedback loop value falls below the value on its left side input.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 250
4.3.4 Gas Turbine 2 Governor System

Temperature
Control
1 + sT5
sTT
K4 +
1+ sT4
Turbine Exhaust
Delay
K5
1 + sT3
f1
w f1
e-sETD
Turbine
TC
Temperature
Control Setpoint
Speed Ref
Per Unit
Change
In Speed
Radiation
Shield
Thermocouple
G Max
1 + sX
Z + sY
FL Max
Low
Value
K6
K3
Speed Governor
1.0
Fuel Control
Delay
FL Min
G Min
e-sT
Valve
Positioner
1
1+ sTF
a
c+ bs
FMin
Fuel FMax
System
Gas Turbine
Dynamics
Turbine
1
f2
w f 1+ sTCD w f2
Combustor
Delay
KF
e-sECR
TScale
PMech
1.0
f1 = TR - a f1 1.0 - w f1 - b f1
f 2 = a f2 + bf2 w f2 - cf2
Figure 188. Gas Turbine 2 Governor model block diagram.
Parameter
b
ECR
ETD
T
T3
T4
T5
TCD
TF
TT
X
Y
K3
K4
K5
KF
a
c
aF1
bF1
TR
aF2
bF2
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Valve Positioner time constant
Combustor delay time
Turbine Exhaust delay time
Radiation Shield time constant
Thermocouple time constant
Temperature Control time constant
Gas Turbine Dynamics time constant
Fuel System time constant
Speed Governor time constant
Speed Governor time constant
Fuel Control gain
Radiation Shield simulation constant
Fuel System feedback gain
Valve Positioner gain
Valve Positioner constant
Turbine temperature simulation constant
Turbine torque simulation constant
Page 251
Parameter
cF2
K6
TC
TScale
W
Z
FMax
FMin
GMax
GMin
FLMax
FLMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Fuel bias
Temperature Control setpoint
Power output scaling factor+
Speed Governor gain
Speed Governor constant
Fuel System limit max
Fuel System limit min
Speed Governor limit max
Speed Governor limit min
Fuel System limit max for earlier models
Fuel System limit min for earlier models
Page 252
Description
In this model:
All limits except the FLMax and FLMin are non-windup limits.
Notes:
For the Gas Turbine 2 model, the value of TC is set equal to TR at initialization. This is
done since the value of TC needs to be determined for rated condition of the turbine. If we
assume the rated condition is 1.0 pu, or wf1 = approximately 1.0, then via equation f1, we
see that TC = TR. Note that at initial conditions the speed (or , actually change in
speed) is equal to zero and also falls out of the equation.
Consider that if we assume that TR = 750 degree F, then a typical value of af1 can be
estimated from a typical range of exhaust temperatures at non full-load conditions. From
Figure 189 shown below, we see that exhaust temperatures for a typical combustion
turbine vary along the length of the combustion area. At the exhaust, the temperatures are
the hottest. From the figure, we also see an approximate 25% reduction in temperature
from full load to no load, and thus a 12.5% reduction from full load to half load. Thus, if
we use:
TR = 750 degree F
wf1 = 0.5 pu
= 0
f1 = 650 (approximate 12.5% temperature reduction from 750)
bf1 = 0 (ignore speed cooling effects)
then,
f1 = TR - a f1 1 - w f1 - bf1
650 = 750 - a f1 1 - 0.5 - 0 0
af1 = 200
Note that values of K4 and K5 should be selected so that the output of the Radiation
Shield block is equal to the input at steady-state. Thus, for our typical numbers above, the
result of function f1 is equal to 650 (i.e. the exhaust temperature at half load condition).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 253
When initialization is complete, there will be an immediate difference between TC and

the output of the Thermocouple block. However, since the temperature control block is
initialized to its Max value, the difference will not cause any difference in the output of
the Temperature Control block. This is a correct initialization and operating condition, as
the output of the Thermocouple block (which is a representation of the actual exhaust
temperature), must always be below the set point value TC or else the model will go into
temperature limiting. The only time the model will temperature limit is when the output
of the Thermocouple block exceeds TC so that a negative value is delivered to the
Temperature Control block. When this happens, the Temperature Control block will start
to deliver a value less than the Max value. If this output value is less than the output of
the Speed Governor block, it will be used to control the governor via the Low Value
select block. Thus, the unit would go into temperature limiting.
Figure 189. Gas Turbine typical temperature profile.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 254
References:
1. Working Group on Prime Mover and Energy Supply Models for System Dynamic
Performance Studies, Dynamic Models for Combined Cycle plant in Power System
Studies, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 9, No 3, August 1994, pp1698-1708.
2. L. N. Hannett, Afzal Khan Combustion Turbine Dynamic Model Validation from Test,
IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 8, No 1, February 1993, pp152-158.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 255
4.3.5 Gas Turbine WD Governor System - Woodward
K Droop
1+ sTD
Per Unit
Change
In Speed
PTerm
Temperature
Control
TScale
1 + sT5
sTT
Speed Ref
G Max
K4 +
1+ sT4
Low
Value
K6
K3
e-sT
Fuel Control
Delay
sK D
G Min
Speed Governor
1.0
Turbine Exhaust
Delay
K5
1 + sT3
f1
w f1
e-sETD
Turbine
TC
Temperature
Control Setpoint
KP
KI
s
Radiation
Shield
Thermocouple
Valve
Positioner
FMax
Fuel
System
1
1+ sTF
a
c+ bs
FMin
Gas Turbine
Dynamics
e-sECR
Turbine
1
f2
w f 1+ sTCD w f2
Combustor
Delay
KF
TScale
PMech
1.0
f1 = TR - a f1 1.0 - w f1 - bf1
f 2 = a f2 + b f2 w f2 - cf2
Figure 190. Gas Turbine WD governor model block diagram.
Parameter
b
ECR
ETD
T
T3
T4
T5
TCD
TF
TD
TT
K3
K4
K5
KF
KD
KI
KP
KDroop
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Turbine Exhaust delay time
Power feedback time constant
Fuel Control gain
Speed Governor differential gain
Speed Governor integral gain
Speed Governor proportional gain
Power feedback droop
Page 256
Parameter
a
c
aF1
bF1
TR
aF2
bF2
cF2
K6
TC
TScale
FMax
FMin
GMax
GMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Fuel bias
Temperature Control setpoint
Power output scaling factor
Fuel System limit max
Fuel System limit min
Page 257
Description
In this model:
Notes:
Refer to the Gas Turbine 2 model for additional application notes.
References:
1. L. N. Hannett, Afzal Khan Combustion Turbine Dynamic Model Validation from Test,
IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 8, No 1, February 1993, pp152-158.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 258
4.3.6 Hydro Governor System

DTurb
Per Unit
Change In Speed
Speed Limit
Speed Ref
UO
Pilot Valve
and Servomotor
1
Q
1+ sTP
UC
Gate Limit
G Max
1
s
G Min
1
1+ sTG
Gate
Gate
Servomotor
1
TW s
1.0
AT
PMech
Q NL
Turbine Dynamics
RP
Permanent Droop
R T sTR
1+ sTR
Transient Droop
Figure 191. Hydro governor model block diagram.
Parameter
TG
TP
TR
TW
AT
DTurb
Q
QNL
RP
RT
Uo
Uc
GMax
GMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Gate Servomotor time constant
Pilot Valve and Servomotor time constant
Transient Droop washout time constant
Turbine Dynamics time constant
Water to mechanical power gain
Turbine load damping
Gain
Water at no-load
Permanent Droop
Transient Droop
Speed limit max
Speed limit min
Gate limit max
Gate limit min
Page 259
Description
Hydro turbine prime movers.
In this model:
DTurb models turbine speed damping.
References:
Performance Studies, Hydraulic Turbine and Turbine Control Models for System
Dynamic Studies, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 7, No 1, February 1992, pp167178.
2. IEEE Committee Report Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power
System Studies, IEEE Trans. On Power Apparatus and System Vol. 92, No. 6,
November/December 1973, pp1904-1915.
3. L. N. Hannett, B. Fardanesh Field Tests to Validate Hydro Turbine-Governor Model
Structure and Parameters, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 9, No 4, November
1994, pp1744-1750.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 260
4.3.7 IEEE Hydro 2 Governor System

Speed Ref
PMax
K 1 + sT2
1 + sT1 1 + sT3
1 - sTW
1 + 0.5sTW
PMech
PMin
Figure 192. IEEE Hydro 2 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
TW
K
PMax
PMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
Description
Governor lag time constant
Governor lead time constant
Turbine Dynamics time constant
Gain
Governor limit max
Governor limit min
Page 261
Description
In this model:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 262
4.3.8 IEEE Hydro 3 Governor System

Speed Ref
UO
1
TG 1+sTP
UC
PMax
1
s
PMin
a 23 1 +
a13a 21
a11 sTW
a 23
1 + a11sTW
PMech
Water Turbine
Droop
Permanent Droop
D RT sTR
1+ sTR
Transient Droop
Figure 193. IEEE Hydro 3 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
TP
TR
TW
a11
a13
a21
a23
TG
Droop
DRT
Uo
Uc
PMax
PMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Governor time constant
Governor transient droop time constant
Water Turbine dynamics time constant
Water Turbine dynamics constant
Governor inverse of gain
Governor permanent droop
Governor transient droop
Speed limit max
Speed limit min
Water power limit max
Water power limit min
Page 263
Description
In this model:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 264
4.3.9 IEEE Steam 1 Governor System
K3
K5
PMech HP
Speed Ref
K1
PMax
Per Unit Change

K 1+ sT2
In Speed
1+ sT1
K7
PR Up
1
T3
1
s
1
1+ sT4
1
1+ sT5
1
1+ sT6
1
1+ sT7
PMech
PR Dn
PMin
K2
K6
K4
Governor
K8
PMech LP
Low and High Pressure Turbines
Figure 194. IEEE Steam 1 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
K
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
PMax
PMin
PRUp
PRDn
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Governor lead time constant
Low / High Pressure Turbine time constant
Governor gain
Low / High Pressure Turbine gain
Steam power limit max
Steam power limit min
Rate limit max
Rate limit min
Page 265
Description
Steam turbine prime movers.
In this model:
The PMax and PMin limits are non-windup limits.
The PRUp and PRDn limits are windup limits
References:
Performance Studies, Dynamic Models for Fossil Fueled Steam Units in Power System
Studies, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 6, No. 2, May 1991, pp753-761.
2. IEEE Committee Report Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power
System Studies, IEEE Trans. On Power Apparatus and System Vol. 92, No. 6,
November / December 1973, pp1904-1915.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 266
4.3.10 Pratt & Whitney PWFT8 Governor System

Temperature
Control Setpoint
Tc
Thermocouple
1
K temp
1+ sT4
PTerm
1
TScale
-sTpwr
f1
w f1
e-sETD
wf
1+ sT
K pt
Low
Val
Min
K6
P1u 3
pt
P2 u 2
u
P3 u +
P4
1.0
Turbine
K5
1 + sT3
1
1+ sT5
Max
K4 +
Turbine
Exhaust
Delay
K Droop
1+ sTd
Speed
Ref
Radiation
Shield
K3
e-sT
Fuel Control
Delay
Valve
Positioner
Fuel
System
a
c+ bs
1
1+ sTauF
Gas Turbine
Dynamics
e-sECR
Turbine
1
f
1+ sTcd w f2 2
TScale
Combustor
Delay
f1 = TR - a f1 1.0 - w f1 - b f1
KF
f 2 = a f2 + bf2 w f2 - cf2
Per Unit
Change
in Speed
Figure 195. PWFT8 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
b
ECR
ETD
T
T3
T4
T5
TauF
TCD
TD
TPT
TPWR
a
c
K3
K4
K5
K6
KDroop
KF
KPT
KTemp
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Fuel Control delay time
Power feedback time constant
Speed Control time constant
Power Feedback delay time
Fuel Control gain
Fuel bias
Power feedback droop
Speed Control gain
Temperature Control gain
Page 267
PMech
Parameter
aF1
bF1
TR
aF2
bF2
cF2
P1
P2
P3
P4
Max
Min
TC
TScale
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Speed Governor control constant - cubic
Speed Governor control constant - square
Speed Governor control constant - linear
Speed Governor control constant - constant
Temperature Control set point
Power output scaling factor
Page 268
Description
In this model:
Notes:
Refer to the Gas Turbine 2 model for additional application notes.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 269
4.3.11 Split Shaft Gas Turbine 1 Governor System

Speed Ref
FMax
1
Droop
Turbine
Fuel Control
K 1+sT1
1+ sT2 1+sT3
1
1+ sTF
FMin
Method for Fuel Rate Limit

Old State = State
Integrate()
PFollow
RA
if PMech > PFollow + F Rate Pkup
y = mx + b
. rate = State - Old State

. if rate > R A
. .
PMech
State = Old State + R A
b = F Rate NL t
m=
. end if
end if
1+ sTR
F Rate FL - F Rate NL t
y = Fuel Rate Limit = R A
Figure 196. Split Shaft Gas Turbine 1 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
TF
TR
Droop
FMax
FMin
F Rate FL
F Rate NL
F Rate Pkup
K
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Turbine model lead time constant
Turbine model lag time constant
Turbine model lag time constant
Fuel control time constant
Power follow time constant
Governor droop
Fuel limit max
Fuel limit min
Fuel rate at full load
Fuel rate at no load
Fuel rate pickup
Turbine model gain
Page 270
Description
Split shaft gas turbine prime movers.
In this model:
Notes:
Refer to Impact Loading of Isolated Generators, by Conrad St. Pierre, IEEE

Transactions on Industry Applications, VOL. IA-17, No. 6, November/December 1981
for more details on split shaft turbine governor models and their response.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 271
4.3.12 Steam Turbine Governor System

Speed Ref
VMax
1
R
1+ sT1
1+ sT2
1+ sT3
PMech
VMin
DT
Turbine Damping
Figure 197. Steam Turbine governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
R
DT
VMax
VMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Steam Turbine re-heater lead time constant
Steam Turbine re-heater lag time constant
Droop
Turbine Damping
Governor max limit
Governor min limit
Page 272
Description
Steam turbines with governor action and a re-heater time constant.
In this model:
The first block models the droop.
The second block models the governor time constant.
The third lead-lag block models the turbine.
DT models turbine speed damping.
Notes:
T2/T3 is a fraction that represents the portion of turbine power developed from the highpressure turbine.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 273
4.3.13 WECC Gas Turbine Governor System

1
1+ sTLTR
Rate Limit
if ( DV > L INC ) R LIM = LTRATE

else
DV
R LIM = R MAX
VMax
RLim
Speed Ref
Droop
1
R
1+ sT4
KA
1+ sT5
Speed
Deadband
EPS
Low
Value
Gov Lead- Lag

Control
FIdle
Turbine
1
sT1
VMin
Gov Time
Constant
Ambient Temperature
Load Limit
KT
Power
vs.
Output
Valve Position Deadband
1+ sAT2
1+ sBT2
PGov
DB2
DB1
PMech
FIdle
Zero Power
Fuel Flow
1
1+ sT3
Turbine Exhaust
Temp Time Constant
L MAX
Per Unit Change

In Speed
DT
Turbine Damping
Figure 198. WECC Gas Turbine governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
TLTR
A
B
FIdle
R
DT
KA
EPS
KT
LTRate
LInc
RMax
VMax
VMin
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Turbine model time constant
Turbine exhaust model time constant
Governor Control lead time constant
Governor Control lag time constant
Rate limit time constant
Turbine model lead multiplier
Turbine model lag multiplier
Zero Power Fuel Flow
Droop
Turbine Damping
Governor Control gain
Speed Deadband
Ambient Temperature Load Limit
Maximum long term fuel valve opening rate
Valve position change allowed at fast rate
Maximum fuel valve opening rate
Governor max limit
Governor min limit
Page 274
Parameter
DB1
DB2
PGov1
PGov2
PGov3
PGov4
PGov5
PGov6
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Output dead band 1
Output dead band 2
Power output point 1
Valve position 1
Valve position 2
Valve position 3
Valve position 4
Valve position 5
Valve position 6
Page 275
Description
In this model:
The governor time constant block limit is non-windup.
The governor rate limit is a windup limit.
All six valve positions and power outputs must be supplied.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 276
4.3.14 Woodward Diesel Governor System
TMax
Electronic Control Box
Per Unit Speed

1+
Actuator
Speed Ref
1+ sT3
K 1+ sT4
1+ sT + s T T
s 1+ sT5 1+ sT6
1 2
Engine
e-sTD
PMech
TMin
R
Throttle Feedback
Figure 199. Woodward Diesel Governor model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
TD
K
R
TMax
TMin
Droop / Isoch
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Control box time constant
Engine firing delay time
Actuator gain
Throttle feedback gain (affects droop)
Max actuator torque
Min actuator torque
Switch (droop mode or isochronous mode)
Page 277
Description
Diesel engine prime mover.
In this model:
The first block models the electronic control box.
The second block models the actuator.
The third block models the engine firing delay.
Notes:
In isochronous mode, the Speed Ref value is forced to zero.
This model is based upon a Woodward governor with electronic speed sensing and a
hydraulic actuator.
Only use Isochronous mode when the generator is operating in an isolated mode.
Use droop mode when connected with other generators.
Multiplication by Speed
Due to diesel engine design, the engine would typically limit the fuel input on a per cycle basis.
Since the energy developed per cycle is proportional to the fuel input per cycle, multiplying
energy developed per cycle by speed then produces the mechanical power delivered to the shaft
of the generator. From this, we note that the limits on the actuator are actually torque limits.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 278
4.3.15 Woodward Steam PID1 Governor System

Speed Ref
PMax
T
K 1+ sTA 1+ E
s
1+ sTB
Governor WW MicroNet
1
1+
sTC
1
1+ sTD
Actuator
Turbine Casing
PMech
PMin
Dr
Droop
Figure 200. Woodward Steam PID 1 Governor model block diagram.
Parameter
TA
TB
TE
TC
TD
K
PMax
PMin
Dr
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Turbine time constant
Governor control gain
Max power output
Min power output
Droop
Page 279
Description
Steam turbine prime mover with PID governor.
In this model:
The first block models the governor control.
The second block models the actuator.
The third block models the turbine time constant.
Notes:
This model is based upon a Woodward WW Micronet Governor.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 280
4.3.16 Cummins Gas Engine 1 Governor System
PID Control
Speed
Ref
KP
Dynamics B
(RPM)
Moving
Average
pu Change
Filter
in Speed
FMax
KI
1.0 Rated K cal

(Max 100 Pnts)
RPM
1+st D
Datalink Actuator
Dynamics A
Delay
Delay
FMin
K Ds
Speed Diff (RPM)
Datalink
-sTms
-sTst
% Fuel Flow
K im2tot
1
1 + st ta
1
1 + st im
Dynamics C
1- K im2tot
Engine
% Flow to
Combustion pu Torque
Gain
Delay
-sTcmb
1+ st trb
K FT
pu Torque
PMech pu
% Fuel Flow
Control
Limit
Note: KFT is typically set to 0.01 to convert from percent to pu.
1.0
Figure 201. Cummins Gas Engine 1 governor model block diagram.
Parameter
RatedRPM
Kp
Ki
Kd
Td
FMax
FMin
Tms
Tst
Tta
Kim2tot
Tim
Ttrb
Tcmb
KFT
Kcal
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
RPM
%Flow/RPM
%Flow/RPM/Sec
%Flow-Sec/RPM
Seconds
%Flow
%Flow
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
puTorque/%Flow
pu
Description
Machine Rated RPM
Governor Proportional Gain
Governor Integral Gain
Governor Deviation Gain
Governor Derivative Time Constant
Fuel Flow Max Limit
Fuel Flow Min Limit
Datalink Associated Nominal Time Delay
Actuator Datalink Associated Nominal Time Delay
Dynamics A Time Constant
Dynamics B Fraction
Dynamics B Time Constant
Dynamics C Time Constant
Combustion Time Delay
Percent Flow to Per Unit Torque Gain
Number of Engine Speed Samples to Average
Page 281
Description
Cummins gas engine prime mover systems.
In this model:
The speed moving average calculation has a 100 point maximum.
KFT is typically set to 0.01 to convert % to pu.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 282
4.4 PSS Models

As seen in each Excitation System model figure, there is an input labeled VPSS. This is the signal
from a power system stabilizer (PSS) that supplies additional damping of power oscillations.
These devices must be carefully tuned for a particular generator and excitation system vs. the
stiffness and response of the grid at their location. When tuning, we typically consider the local
mode of oscillation as well as a system mode that needs damping. The Power System Stabilizer
Models included in EasyPower DS are:
IEEE Type PSS1A

IEEE Type PSS2B
IEEE Type PSS3B
IEEE Type PSS4B
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 283
4.4.1 IEEE PSS1A Power System Stabilizer

VST Max
0: Power
1:
1
1+ sT6
Ks
1
1 + A1s + A 2s2
sT5
1+ sT5
1+ sT1
1+ sT2
1+ sT3
1+ sT4
VPSS
VST Min
Figure 202. IEEE PSS1A model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
KS
VST Max
VST Min
A1
A2
Input
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
1/0
Description
1st lead time constant
1st lag time constant
2nd lead time constant
2nd lag time constant
Washout time constant
First block time constant
The stabilizer gain
PSS output max
PSS output min
Lag quadratic funtion constant 1
Lag quadratic funtion constant 2
Input selection
Page 284
Description
Speed or Power input power system stabilizers with an IEEE PSS1A form.
In this model:
The first block is most likely a transducer time constant.
The second block models the net stabilizer gain and a washout.
The third block models a quadratic lag function.
The fourth and fifth blocks model the lead/lag section.
The output limit is a wind-up limit.
Notes:
This model is based upon an IEEE PSS2B PSS model.

* Figure 8-1 shows the generalized form of a PSS with a single input. Some common
stabilizer input signals, VSI, are speed, frequency, and power. T6 may be used to represent a
transducer time constant. Stabilizer gain is set by the term KS and signal washout is set by the
time constant T5. In the next block, A1 and A2 allow some of the low-frequency effects of
high-frequency torsional filters (used in some stabilizers) to be accounted for. When not used
for this purpose, the block can be used to assist in shaping the gain and phase characteristics
of the stabilizer, if required. The next two blocks allow two stages of lead-lag compensation,
as set by constants T1 to T4. Stabilizer output can be limited in various ways, not all of which
are shown in Figure 22. This model shows only simple stabilizer output limits, VSTMAX and
VSTMIN. For some systems, the stabilizer output is removed if the generator terminal voltage
deviates outside a chosen band, as shown in the supplementary discontinuous excitation
control model Type DEC3A of Figure 11-3. In other systems, the stabilizer output is limited
as a function of generator terminal voltage as included in the Type DEC1A model of Figure
11-1. The stabilizer output, VST, is an input to the supplementary discontinuous control
models. Where the discontinuous control models are not used, VS = VST.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 285
4.4.2 IEEE PSS2B Power System Stabilizer

VMax
f
sTW1
1+ sTW1
sTW2
1+ sTW2
1
1+ sT9
1+ sT
7
1+ sT M
8
K1
1+ sT1
1+ sT2
1+ sT3
1+ sT4
1+ sT5
1+ sT6
VPSS
VMin
K3
sTW3
1+ sTW3
sTW4
K2
1+ sTW4
1+ sT10
Figure 203. IEEE Type PSS2B model block diagram.
Parameter
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
TW1
TW2
TW3
TW4
K1
K2
K3
VMax
VMin
M
N
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Description
1st lead time constant
1st lag time constant
2nd lead time constant
2nd lag time constant
3rd lead time constant
3rd lag time constant
Filter lead time constant
Filter lag time constant
Freq branch time constant
Power branch time constant
1st freq branch washout time constant
2nd freq branch washout time constant
1st power branch washout time constant
2nd power branch washout time constant
Main PSS gain
1st power branch gain
2nd power branch gain
PSS output max
PSS output min
M
N
Page 286
Description
Power system stabilizers with an IEEE PSS2B form.
In this model:
The first blocks model the first washout for two inputs.
The second blocks model the second washout for two inputs.
The top third block models a single time constant.
The bottom third block models a single time constant with gain.
The middle block is a gain block for the bottom input signal.
The fourth block (with M and N) models the ramp tracking filter.
The fifth block models the PSS gain.
The sixth block models the first lead-lag block.
The seventh block models the second lead-lag block.
The eighth block models the third lead-lag block.
Notes:
All limits are wind-up limiters.

* This stabilizer model, shown in Figure 8-2, is designed to represent a variety of dualinput stabilizers, which normally use combinations of power and speed or frequency to
derive the stabilizing signal.
* In particular, this model can be used to represent two distinct types of dual-input
stabilizer implementations as described as follows:
a) Stabilizers that, in the frequency range of system oscillations, act as electrical
power input stabilizers. These use the speed or frequency input for the generation of
an equivalent mechanical power signal, to make the total signal insensitive to
mechanical power change.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 287
b) Stabilizers that use a combination of speed (or frequency) and electrical power.
These systems usually use the speed directly (i.e., without phase-lead compensation)
and add a signal proportional to electrical power to achieve the desired stabilizing
signal shaping.
* While the same model is used for the two types of dual-input stabilizers described in
the preceding items a) and b), the parameters used in the model for equivalent stabilizing
action will be very different. For each input, two washouts can be represented (TW1 to
TW4) along with a transducer or integrator time constants (T6, T7). For the first type of
dual-input stabilizer, KS3 would normally be 1 and KS2 would be equal to T7/2H, where H
is the inertia constant of the synchronous machine. VSI1 would normally represent speed
or frequency and VSI2 would be a power signal. The indices M and N allow a ramptracking or simpler filter characteristic to be represented. To model all existing field uses
of the ramp-tracking filter, the indices M and N should allow integers up to 5 and 4,
respectively. Typical values of M = 5, N = 1 or M = 2, N = 4 are in use by several
utilities. Phase compensation is provided by the two lead-lag or lag-lead blocks (T1 to T4).
Output limiting options are similar to those described for the PSS1A model.
* For many types of studies, the simpler single-input PSS1A model, with appropriate
parameters, may be used in place of the two-input PSS2B model.
* The PSS2B model shown in Figure 8-2 is a slight variation of the PSS2A model from
the 1992 recommended practice. An additional block with lag time constant T11 and lead
time constant T10 can be used to model stabilizers which incorporate a third lead-lag
function.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 288
1+ sT1
K S1
sTW1
1+ sTW1
VST Max
1
1+ sT2
K S2
sTW3
1+
sTW3
1 + A1s + A 2s
1 + A 3s + A 4s 2
1 + A 5s + A 6 s
1 + A 7 s + A 8s 2
VPSS
VST Min
sTW2
1+ sTW2
Parameter
T1
T2
TW1
TW2
TW3
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
KS1
KS2
VST Max
VST Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
Power input transducer time constant
Speed input transducer time constant
Power input washout time constant
Speed input washout time constant
Stabilizer washout time constant
First block lead quadratic funtion constant 1
First block lead quadratic funtion constant 2
First block lag quadratic funtion constant 1
First block lag quadratic funtion constant 2
Second block lead quadratic funtion constant 1
Second block lead quadratic funtion constant 2
Second block lag quadratic funtion constant 1
Second block lag quadratic funtion constant 2
Power input gain
Speed input gain
PSS output max
PSS output min
Page 289
Description
In this model:
The first block set model transducer time constants.
The second block set model the washouts for each input.
The third block models the stabilizer washout.
The fourth and fifth blocks model the lead/lag section.
The output limit is a windup limit.
Notes:

* The PSS model PSS3B shown in Figure 8-3 has dual inputs of electrical power (VSI1 = PE)
and rotor angular frequency deviation (VSI2 = ). The signals are used to derive an
equivalent mechanical power signal. By combining this signal with electrical power, a signal
proportional to accelerating power is produced. The time constants T1 and T2 represent the
transducer time constants, and the time constants TW1 to TW3 represent the washout time
constants for electric power, rotor angular speed, and derived mechanical power,
respectively. In this model, the stabilizing signal VST results from the vector summation of
processed signals for electrical power and angular frequency deviation.
* The desired amplitude and phase for the stabilizing signal is obtained by matching the
polarity and magnitude of the gain constants KS1 and KS2. Phase compensation is provided by
the two subsequent filters A1 to A8. The maximum allowed influence of the stabilizing signal
on the AVR may be adjusted with the limit values VSTMAX and VSTMIN.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 290

VL Max
K L1
Digital Transducer Model
Optional Notch Filters
K L2
-1.759x10-3s + 1
s 2 + f12
s 2 + f 22
-4 2
-2
2
2
2
1.2739x10 s + 1.7823x10 s + 1 s + b1s + f1 s + b 2s + f 22
Digital Transducer Model

2
80s + 1
s3 + 82s 2 + 161s + 80
1
1+ 2HS
K L11 + sTL1
1+ sTL2
1+ sTL3
1+ sTL4
K L17 + sTL7
1+ sTL8
1+sTL9 1+ sTL11
1+sTL10 1+ sTL12
2
3
2
4
KL
VL Min
VST Max
VI Max
K I1
K I11 + sTI1
1+ sTI2
1+ sTI3 1+ sTI5
1+ sTI4 1+ sTI6
K I2
K I17 + sTI7
1+ sTI8
1+ sTI9 1+ sTI11
1+ sTI10 1+ sTI12
KI
VPSS
VST Min
VI Min
VH Max
Optional Notch Filters

2
1+ sTL5
1+ sTL6
K H1
K H11 + sTH1
1+ sTH2
1+ sTH3 1+ sTH5
1+ sTH4 1+ sTH6
K H2
K H17 + sTH7
1+ sTH8
1+ sTH9 1+ sTH11
1+ sTH10 1+ sTH12
s +f
s +f
s 2 + b3s + f 32 s 2 + b 4s + f 42
KH
VH Min
Parameter
TL1
TL2
TL3
TL4
TL5
TL6
TL7
TL8
TL9
TL10
TL11
TL12
TI1
TI2
TI3
TI4
TI5
TI6
TI7
TI8
TI9
TI10
TI11
TI12
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Description
Low band time constant 1
Intermediate band time constant 1
Page 291
Parameter
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH9
TH10
TH11
TH12
b1
b2
b3
b4
f1
f2
f3
f4
Hs
KL1
KL2
KI1
KI2
KH1
KH2
KL
KI
KH
VL Max
VL Min
VL Max
VL Min
VL Max
VL Min
VST Max
VST Min
EasyPower LLC 2016
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Description
High band time constant 1
Speed input notch filter constant
Power input notch filter constant
Machine inertia
Low band gain 1
Low band gain 2
Intermediate band gain 1
Intermediate band gain 2
High band gain 1
High band gain 2
Low band output gain
Intermediate band output gain
High band output gain
Low band output max
Low band output min
Intermediate band output max
Intermediate band output min
High band output max
High band output min
PSS output max
PSS output min
Page 292
Description
In this model:
Notes:

* The PSS4B model represents a structure based on multiple working frequency bands as
shown in Figure 8-4a. Three separate bands, respectively dedicated to the low-, intermediateand high-frequency modes of oscillations, are used in this delta-omega (speed input) PSS.
* The low band is typically associated with the power system global mode, the intermediate
with the inter-area modes, and the high with the local modes. Each of the three bands is
composed of a differential filter, a gain, and a limiter. Their outputs are summed and passed
through a final limiter VSTMIN/VSTMAX resulting in PSS output VST.
* The PSS4B measures the rotor speed deviation in two different ways. L-I feeds the low
and intermediate bands, while H is dedicated to the high-frequency band. The equivalent
model of these two speed transducers is shown in Figure 8-4b. Tunable notch filters Ni(s),
optionally used for turbo-generators torsional modes, are defined as shown in Equation (4).
Ni s
s 2 ni2
s 2 Bwi s ni2
(4)
* with ni the filter frequency, and Bwi its 3 dB bandwidth. Sample data sets are shown in
H.21, which also contains a brief description of the tuning philosophy used in the PSS4B
model.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 293
4.5 Motor Models

As noted in the first chapter of this manual, motors are modeled using two main model
components: the machine and the load. And so, we have defined a motor system to be a
combination of an actual motor and the rotating load fed by the motors shaft. This corresponds
with Figure 2 and Figure 3 for induction and synchronous motors respectively.
The motor and load are integrated together in the machine speed equations. Decelerating torque
is supplied by the load model, accelerating torque is supplied by the motor and speed is supplied
by the machine model back to the load. The load model simply updates its torque based on the
machines present speed condition, either by equations or a digitized torque speed relationship.
An internal Thevenin voltage is generated by the motor model, and supplied to the network.
Terminal current is fed back into the motor model.
Following is a detailed description of the EasyPower Double Cage Induction and Synchronous
motor models.
4.5.1 Double Cage Flux Induction Motor

The double cage induction motor model in the DS Engine is a fully detailed flux level model
including double cage rotor dynamics and saturation (see model block diagram in Figure 206
below). As with the generator models, this model was created with the help of F. P. deMello, a
noted machine modeling expert, and conforms to a symmetrical model with its reference axes
rotating at synchronous speed. It uses real and imaginary axes instead of d and q, which
eliminates the need for conversion of values (machine terminal current and E driving voltage)
into and out of the model. This reduces computations, removing the need for calls to sine and
cosine functions. The effect of saturation is included on both axes. The model block diagram
supplied below defines the rotor dynamics. In an additional section below, the machine speed
dynamics are discussed.
Definitions
A few definitions of variables used in the model will help in its description. Those definitions
are:
p Speed in
radians
Sec
E '' ER'' jEI'' Thevenin Voltage Behind ZThev

I I R jI I Terminal Current
ZThev RA jX ''
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 294
E '' ETerm
ZThev
Note that the model in Figure 206 is defined with a generator sign convention. That means that I,
and electrical power are defined positive for current, watts and vars flowing out of the motor.
Also, note that EKR, EKI, ER, and EI are used at other locations in the model where drawing a
connecting line in the diagram would have made the model block diagram a bit cluttered.
Inertia Equation
The relationship between motor speed, load torque and motor electrical torque is defined in a
separate set of equations from the rotor and stator dynamics. p (the main link between motor
speed and electrical torque, and pronounced as pee - theta) is defined as change in speed (from
zero, where zero is sync speed) in radians per second. p thus has the same sign as p (the per
unit speed deviation, and pronounced as pee - delta) as defined for synchronous machines and is
the opposite sign from slip. In fact, p is simply the negative of the machine slip. Thus, when the
motor is at synchronous speed, p is equal to zero. When the motor is at a given slip (slower than
synchronous frequency), p is negative. For example, an 1800 RPM motor with 150 RPM of slip
will have a p equal to:
150
p p 2 f
2 f
1800
p 0.08333 pu 2 60 31.416
Radians
Sec
and, since the motor is spinning slower than synchronous speed, slip equals:
150
slip p
0.08333 pu
1800
To calculate p during the simulation, we need the inertia-speed integral relationship modeled.
This is performed as seen in Figure 207 below, with all quantities now placed in a load
convention, where TLoad is the mechanical load torque. TLoad is always positive and represents the
load torque as speed increases, and is typically modeled with a speed squared, speed cubed or
digitized torque vs. speed characteristic.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 295
EKR
''
To p
X '' X
X' X
l
EI'
'
To s
X ' X ''
X' X
'
ER
X X '
''
EKI
To s
X ' X ''
X' X
l
EI''
X' X
IR
EI''
E ''
Saturation
'
To p
EI'
E ''
E '' E ''
2
ER''
E ''
X X '
II
X ' X ''
X' X
X' X
l
1
'
To s
'
ER
EKR
''
To s
X ' X ''
X' X
l
ER''
X '' X
X' X
l
''
To p
EKI
Figure 206. Double Cage Induction Motor flux model.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 296
Table 9. Induction motor model parameters.
Parameter
Units
Description
Rated HP
Rated Eff
Rated Speed
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
Rated PF
HP
Percent
RPM
Volts LL
Amps
Rated Slip
Start Trq
Start Crt
Start PF
Pull-Out Trq
pu
pu
pu
pu
Rated slip
Starting torque
Starting current
Starting power factor
Rated pull-out torque
Ra
Xl
X
X
X
To
To
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Seconds
Seconds

Unsaturated synchronous reactance
Unsaturated transient reactance
Unsaturated sub-transient reactance
Transient OC time constant
Sub-transient OC time constant
E1
E2
S( E1 )
S( E2 )
pu
pu
pu
pu

Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and load inertia
Ld Tran Str
Ld Tran Rmp
Seconds
Seconds
Time at which load transfers starting to running

Time it takes to transfer load starting to running
SoftSt V1
SoftSt V2
SoftSt V3
SoftSt T12
SoftSt T23
SoftSt I Limit
SoftSt KI
SoftSt TI
SoftSt Trigger
SoftSt UTS StPt
%
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Times FLA
pu
Seconds
First soft-start voltage

Second soft-start voltage
Third soft-start voltage
Time between first and second soft-start voltage
Time between second and third soft-start voltage
Soft-start current limit specified in times FLA
Soft-start current limit gain
Soft-start current limit time constant
When set to 1 at runtime, forces soft-start action
Up To Speed set point where current limit stops
Notes: OC means Open Circuit
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 297
TLoad
1
2Hs
slip
2 f
TE
Figure 207. Inertia vs. Speed integral model.
For this to be complete, we must provide the calculation of electrical torque or TE as determined
by parameters within the flux model in Figure 206. TE (now provided in a load convention), is
calculated as:
TE ER'' I R EI'' I I
Load Modeling
Several load models are supplied for the motor. The two most common (speed squared and speed
cubed) utilize the following equations to define load torque at any speed:
Speed Squared Load
Speed Cubed Load
TLoad
1.0 p
THeld
1.0 p Held
TLoad
1.0 p
THeld
1.0 p Held
where THELD and pHELD are the torque and speed of the motor at initial online conditions. One
additional load model utilizes a lookup table for supplying any TLOAD for a given motor speed.
That table is user entered for modeling any torque vs. speed relationship that can be digitized.
Refer to Induction Motor Modeling - Part 3 for more detail on how each load model works for
both this double cage induction as well as the synchronous motor model.
Saturation
Saturation is modeled the same as described in the section on the round rotor synchronous
generator.
Initialization Off Line at Zero Speed
When the motor is offline, it will be initialized to a zero speed, unity (1.0) slip condition. p is
thus equal to -1.0. All States and DStates are initialized to zero. The machine is ready for starting
at any time. It will automatically start as voltage is applied to its terminals.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 298
To properly start a motor, there must be a properly defined load model, so that load is being
applied continuously at all of the motors speed conditions. Also, due to the motor model
equation formulation, an in-depth study will reveal that the electrical airgap torque is not 1.0 pu
when the motor is at a rated running condition. And thus, to properly scale motor load (which is
based on the premise that 100% or 1.0 pu torque exists at rated running conditions), we must first
determine what the electrical air gap torque is at rated conditions. And so, the motor model is
always initialized twice (both for Off Line and On Line (next section) conditions).
The first initialization assumes a rated terminal voltage and loading condition. From this first
initialization, we can determine the appropriate values of held torque and held speed (see Load
Modeling above) to generate a fully defined torque speed relationship for the speed squared and
speed cubed load curves. For digitized curves, no held value is needed. However, there is still
the need for properly scaling airgap torque to match the load torque speed curve that is created
based on the assumption that 1.0 pu is 100% load, representing rated running conditions.
After the online rated-load initialization, the motor is then reset and initialized as defined in the
paragraph above.
Initialization On Line and Running
After performing the first rated load initialization as just discussed (to properly scale load
models), the motor must be initialized according to the power flow terminal voltage, P and Q
conditions. This second initialization calculates the complex terminal current (real and
imaginary), and then works back through the model diagram in Figure 206 to initialize all of the
machine states, with the exception of slip. All DStates are set to zero.
Now, the only initialization left is slip. Due to the non-linear nature of this model (with
saturation and separately modeled load torque), the actual slip of the machine cannot be
determined directly. To get the model to a stable initial condition, two additional initialization
techniques are applied.
First, an estimate of slip (S) is generated using the equivalent Type 1 circuit model shown in
Figure 208. The Type 1 parameters are back calculated using the following equations:
Ra Ra
Xa Xl
X M X Xl
X1
EasyPower LLC 2016
X Xl X ' Xl
X X
'
Page 299
X2
R1
R2
'
X l X '' X l
'
X ''
X X X
'
o do
'
Xl X2
oTdo''
Slip is then initialized to the rated per unit terminal power times slip, or:
slip rated slip PDesired
This initial value just gets us in the ball park, and uses the natural ratio effect of per unit power,
as multiplied into the rated slip. Rated slip and rated P are not necessarily linear, but this gives us
an estimate to begin searching for a better estimate.
RA
jXA
jX1
jX2
R1/S
R2/S
jXM
Figure 208. Double cage induction motor impedance model Type 1 form.
Next, an iterative loop with error feedback is used to improve our slip estimate. In that loop,
statements are processed as shown in Figure 209.
During this iterative estimate of slip, additional code is included to monitor the operating
location of the motor on the torque speed curve. If the motor is found to go past the pull-out
torque towards locked rotor (as slip increases, attempting to meet the desired power), then an
error message is triggered which notes that the motor cannot meet the power desired in the power
flow. Such error checking is critical, since power flows often include scaled lumped motors for
loading conditions at unit substations, causing an actual individual motor to then be overloaded.
This checking supplies additional information to help the user create a valid and consistent
power flow case.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 300
Finally, due to machine non-linearities (discussed next), a slew run is performed to get the
machine model to a final and settled on-line running condition, where all model States are set to
produce the desired power flow terminal power conditions.
Start
Calc PTerm Using Type 1

Circuit
Let PDesired be the Power Flow

Terminal Power
PError PDesired PTerm
slip slip PError AccFactor
Past Pull-Out
Yes
No
No
PError < 0.0001
Yes
Finished
Error Unable to Satisfy Load
Figure 209. Slip estimate for induction motor.
Given that the actual running slip is a function of the model, we need to perform a slew run (mini
dynamic simulation of the motor with some feedback to equate terminal P) to get the motor
initialized properly. The machine model includes a non-linear load, and models saturation, which
also has a non-linear effect. After the slew run is complete:
Motor terminal P will equal that required of the power flow.
Motor terminal Q will be a new value (consistent with the flux model equations and not
necessarily what the user may have specified for the motor - see Induction Motor
Modeling - Part 4 for more detail).
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 301
Slip should be what is needed for the desired power. If the motor is initialized with a
rated (1.0 pu) terminal voltage and with rated load specified, then we would expect the
slip to match rated slip of the motor.
The slew run performs the follow updates while running the motor through its normal time
simulation function:
Start
Calc DStates
Integrate
Calc Variables
Calc PTerm
PLF is the Power from the

Power Flow
PError PLF PTerm
slip slip PError AccFactor
No
Max DState < 0.001
Yes
Finished
Figure 210. Slew run for induction motor.
Once the maximum DState falls below an acceptable level, all motor conditions are stored as
being the initialized conditions of the motor.
Comments on Pull-Out Torque
Pull-Out Torque is the maximum torque seen on the torque-speed curve, and is typically a
guaranteed value supplied by the manufacturer, and not the actual capability of the machine.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 302
Because of this, when performing parameter derivation, make sure that pull-out torque is either
equal to or slightly higher than the value supplied by the manufacturer.
Tripping a Motor
When a motor is tripped offline via a network switching action, the motor will spin down as any
motor would in practice. Thus, a trip and fast re-closing action will actually simulate a reenergization of the motor, generating transient torques on the shaft of the motor. No special
actions are needed to re-start a motor that has been tripped off. A simple network action will reapply voltage to the motor, and it will react according to the present condition it is in. Thus,
motors that are tripped off, do not stop simulating. They simply spin down and continue
simulating throughout the run. In fact plotting of a motors terminal voltage will show that a back
voltage from the motor exists as the motor spins down.
Motor Voltage Rating
In EasyPower, the induction motor model data may have a different base voltage than the base
voltage for the bus the motor is connected to. EasyPower performs all conversions to integrate
the motor model and the network so that the motor is applied correctly, given the rated voltage of
the motor vs. the applied voltage from the network.
Soft-Start Capability
In EasyPower, the induction motor model includes soft-start capability. The default data and
range for the parameters are:
Parameter Name
Default Value
SoftSt V1 (%)
100.0
SoftSt V2 (%)
100.0
SoftSt V3 (%)
100.0
SoftSt T12 (sec)
0.0
SoftSt T23 (sec)
0.0
SoftSt I Limit (X FLA)
0.0
SoftSt KI (pu)
10.0
SoftSt TI (sec)
0.2
SoftSt Trigger
0.0
SoftSt UTS StPt
100.0
Max
100.0
100.0
100.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1.0
100.0
Min
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
The parameters control the applied voltage to the motor, simulating a voltage reduction soft-start
with zero through impedance. The application of the first voltage V1 occurs at the moment a nonzero voltage is applied to a motor that has never been online or started previously in the same
simulation. The way the voltage profile (V1, V2, V3 over time T12 and T23) is applied is as shown
in Figure 211 below.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 303
Applied Voltage Scaling
Notice that the times T12 and T23 are relative to the starting point of the motor. Also, the motor
start is typically initiated through the closing of a breaker or switch on the motor, or upstream
from the motor if it is initialized with a zero voltage condition prior to starting the simulation.
100%
V3
Final Motor Scaling

Always 100%
V2
V1
T12
Point of Motor
Start
T23
Time
Figure 211. Soft-start voltage application.
At any time during the soft-start, and if I Limit is a non-zero value, the current will be limited at
the input to the soft-start. The control block diagram that illustrates the soft-start current limiting
action is shown in Figure 212 below.
Current Feedback (pu)
1.0
ILimit
KI
Close Switch
if ILimit > 0
Soft Start
Voltage (pu)
Motor Bus
VLimit
1 + sTI
0.1
Low
Value
1
1 + s 0.01
Soft
Start
Applied Voltage Scaling
1
100%
V3
Final Motor Scaling

Always 100%
100
Motor
V2
Slow down soft-start to

produce smoother
transitions
V1
Point of Motor
Start
T12
T23
Time
Figure 212. Soft-start current limit control.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 304
Note that the current limit will be active as long as the motors speed is below SoftSt UTS StPt,
the soft-starts Up To Speed (UTS) set point. The soft start will end its action when V3 is
reached, and then transition to an across the line condition, unless the motors speed is still below
SoftSt UTS StPt and the current limit is active.
When the Soft St Trigger parameter is set to 1 at runtime during a simulation, the soft-start action
as defined will be forced on. This can occur at any time during a simulation, and is executed by
using the Set Motor Parameter command in a script. Note that the most common use of this
method is at the same moment a motor breaker/contactor is being closed back in again after
having tripped of previously. This would thus create a motor re-start action with the soft-start in
play. If a motor re-start action is forced by reclosing an opened breaker without this added step,
note that the motor will start across the line, even if the soft-start was active during motor
starting.
Two key settings disable the actions of the soft-start. If V1 is set exactly to 100.0, the ramp
function of the soft-start is disabled. And, if I Limit is set exactly to 0.0 (zero), the current limit
action of the soft-start is disabled. Thus, to completely disable all soft-start action, both of these
must be set to disable their action. The ramp action can be used without the current limit, and the
current limit can be used without the ramp action.
A typical set of values for applying a motor soft-start action would be as follows:
Parameter Name
SoftSt V1 (%)
SoftSt V2 (%)
SoftSt V3 (%)
SoftSt T12 (sec)
SoftSt T23 (sec)
SoftSt KI (pu)
SoftSt TI (sec)
SoftSt Trigger
SoftSt UTS StPt (%)
Value
30.0
100.0
100.0
7.0
0.0
2.5
10.0
0.2
0.0
100.0
Comment
Starts at 30% voltage
Takes 7 seconds to complete voltage ramp

Keeps I below 2.5 times motor FLA
Keeps current limit on as needed
Another use of the Soft St Trigger parameter is performing a motor voltage ramp down. To do
this, set the soft start parameters as follows, and then set Soft St Trigger to 1 in a script at the
time you desire the ramp down to occur.
Parameter Name
SoftSt V1 (%)
SoftSt V2 (%)
SoftSt V3 (%)
SoftSt T12 (sec)
SoftSt T23 (sec)
EasyPower LLC 2016
Value
99.9
1.0
1.0
3.0
0.0
Comment
Activates soft start with little voltage change
Ramp down to 1% voltage
Ramp down quickly in 3 seconds
Page 305

SoftSt KI (pu)
SoftSt TI (sec)
SoftSt Trigger
SoftSt UTS StPt (%)
1.0
10.0
0.2
0.0
100.0
Keeps I at or below rated current
Keeps current limit on as needed
To get a clean motor-off transition, we suggest opening the motors breaker just before V3 is
reached. If the motors breaker is not opened before reaching V3, the soft-start will transition to
an across the line condition and thus force a motor restart. If the motors breaker is opened at the
exact same time that V3 is reached this will produce a single time step sudden spike in terminal
voltage on the motor. The artifact should not affect the simulation, but it does not present the
best simulation plot results. This is why we recommend opening the motors breaker just before
reaching V3.
Motor Starting and Running Combinations
Motor starting, running, tripping and re-starting can be simulated by using scripts. Thus, we have
a host of simulation combinations that can be created. In this section, we illustrate several ways
that motor can be started and restarted. Each time a motor starts from an offline condition, it is in
a special mode which only occurs once during a single dynamic simulation. This special mode
includes using the motor starting load defined, performing a starting to running load transition if
desired (defined by Ld Tran Str and Ld Tran Rmp), and application of the soft-start if desired. To
create a motor across-the-line re-start, simply reclose a motors upstream breaker/contactor. To
include the soft start action, set SoftSt Trigger to 1 at run time. Now consider several simulation
combinations that can be created using scripts, motor parameter settings and contactor behavior:
Online Motor Re-start with No Contactor
Motor initializes online
Motor runs during simulation
Motor is tripped off by upstream loss of voltage
Motor does not have a contactor with drop out simulated
Voltage is restored to the motor by restoring upstream voltage
Motor will re-start across the line and use its running load
Online Motor Re-Start with Contactor
Motor has a contactor with drop out simulated
Motors contactor drops out
Voltage is restored to the motor by restoring upstream voltage and closing its contactor
Motor will re-start across the line and use its running load
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 306
Online Motor Re-Start with Contactor and Soft Start

Motor has a contactor with drop out simulated
Motors contactor drops out
Motor has valid and active soft-start parameters
Soft St Trigger is set to 1 at same time voltage is restored
Voltage is restored to the motor by restoring upstream voltage and closing its contactor
Motor will re-start using its soft-start and use its running load
Offline Motor Across-the-Line Start
Motor initializes offline
Motor is started by closing upstream device or its own breaker
Motor has Ld Tran Str set to never transfer to running load
Motor starts using starting load
Motor runs using starting load
Offline Motor Across-the-Line Start with Load Transition
Motor is started by closing upstream device or its own breaker
Motor has Ld Tran Str set to transfer starting load to running load during simulation
Motor runs using starting load until transfer time
Motor transfers to running load
Motor runs with running load
Offline Motor Soft-Start
Motor may or may not have contactor with drop out simulated
Motor is started by closing upstream device or its own breaker/contactor
Motor may or may not have Motor Ld Tran Str set to transfer to running load
Motor has valid and active soft-start parameters
Motor starts with soft-start active
Motor runs using starting load and transfers to running load if set
And, many more combinations of starting and re-start action could be created using the
parameters made available to you in the motor model. We suggest performing several
simulations on small test systems to get a more complicated and involved motor start/re-start
simulation running. Then transfer settings and re-enter scripts into your larger model to apply it
to your system.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 307
4.5.2 Synchronous Motor

The synchronous motor model uses the exact model representing the salient pole generator
model. The model block diagram is repeated in Figure 213 below. The differences are:
Inclusion of load modeling in place of the prime mover; thus there is no governor model.
All load modeling is identical to that documented for the EasyPower double cage
induction motor model.
A fixed field excitation system; thus there is no excitation system model (excitation
system models for synchronous motors may be added in a future revision).
The inertia constant H now represents the total inertia of the motor rotor and the load
inertia.
During starting, the field voltage is set to zero, simulating a shorted field. The field is
then applied at a given speed. Both field voltage and application speed are user specified.
An additional reverse power detector is automatically included with the model so that the
field is removed if a reverse power condition is detected (when the motor is tripped off
with a group of other induction motors). The delay time for this action can be user
specified.
Machine Dynamics Modeling

Given the synchronous motor uses the same model as the salient pole generator, no additional
detail is supplied here on the machine dynamics. Refer to the section on salient pole synchronous
generators for more information and modeling details.
There is an additional white paper entitled Synchronous Motor Modeling Assessing
Performance Data that details a host of additional information regarding synchronous motor
modeling and data. It draws out the definitions of all of the machine impedances and time
constants from a double cage circuit model, which is also the foundation for both the round rotor
and salient pole synchronous generator models.
Load Modeling
Also, since the loading model is the same as that used for the double cage induction motor
model, no additional detail will be supplied here on load modeling. Refer to the double cage
induction motor modeling section form more information and modeling details.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 308
X
X
Eq'
E fd
'
Tdo s
1
Tdo'' s
kd
X
X
''
d
Xl
'
d
Xl
'
d
X d''
'
d
Xl
d''
Saturation
X
X
'
d
'
d
X ad I fd
X d'
X d''
Xl
'
d
Xl
Id
X q''
Iq
''
q''
1
Tqo s
Figure 213. Synchronous motor model block diagram.
Table 10. Synchronous motor model parameters.
Parameter
Units
Rated HP
Rated Eff
Rated Speed
Rated Voltage
Rated Current
Rated PF
HP
Percent
RPM
Volts LL
Amps
Ra
Xl
pu
pu

Xd
Xq
Xd
Xd = Xq
pu
pu
pu
pu

EasyPower LLC 2016
Description
Page 309
Tdo
Tdo
Tqo
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds

E1
E2
S( E1 )
S( E2 )
pu
pu
pu
pu

Saturation at E1
Saturation at E2
kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and load inertia
Ld Tran Str
Ld Tran Rmp
Seconds
Seconds
Time at which load transfers starting to running

Time it takes to transfer load starting to running
EFD App Speed %

EFD App Value %
See Note 2 below

Value of field voltage to apply during starting
Rev Pwr Del
Seconds
Time it takes to trip the reverse power detection
SoftSt V1
SoftSt V2
SoftSt V3
SoftSt T12
SoftSt T23
SoftSt I Limit
SoftSt KI
SoftSt TI
SoftSt Trigger
SoftSt UTS StPt
%
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Times FLA
pu
Seconds
First soft-start voltage

Second soft-start voltage
Third soft-start voltage
Time between first and second soft-start voltage
Time between second and third soft-start voltage
Soft-start current limit specified in times FLA
Soft-start current limit gain
Soft-start current limit time constant
When set to 1 at runtime, forces soft-start action
Up To Speed set point where current limit stops
Notes:
1. OC means Open Circuit.
2. EFD App Speed actually serves a dual purpose for field application:
EFD App Speed >= 50
The % speed at which the field will be applied to the

starting motor.
EFD App Speed < 50
The absolute simulation time in seconds when the field

will be applied to starting the motor.
Applied Field Voltage at Starting

For starting motors, EFD App Value will need to be set to match the starting conditions of the
motor. If this value is set to 100%, then after the start is complete, one should find the terminal
conditions of the motor near the rated current and power factor specified for the motor.
However, in most cases, the applied field voltage at starting is much greater (from 200 to 400%)
to achieve faster and more assured synchronization. Thus, EFD App Value should be set to
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 310
match such a value. Note that EFD App Value is in percent of the rated field voltage for the
motor at rated conditions. For example, if the field voltage of a motor is equal to 125 volts when
operated at rated terminal voltage, terminal current and power factor, and the field voltage
applied at starting is 425 volts, then EFD App Value should be equal to 425 / 125 * 100% =
340%.
In addition, when a high value of EFD App Value is used when applying the field, note that it
should be dropped back down to a value around 100% to keep the motor from an over-current
condition as it exports vars with the high field voltage after synchronism is reached. To do this,
one will need to make use of a script to start the motor (a simple double click on a breaker will
not suffice). After the motor has started, a Set Motor Parameter script command will need to
be used to drop the field voltage back down to the desired value. Consider this example script:
Script Command
Equipment
Value 1
Value 2
Run to Time
Time
1.0
Close Switch
M-1-Starter
Run to Time
5.0
Set Motor Parameter
M-1
25
100.0
Run to Time
10.0
The resulting message log could look like this:

0.0000
1.0008
1.0008
1.0008
5.0008
5.0008
5.0008
10.0008
Script
Script
Runtime
Script
Script
Runtime
Script
Script
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Simulation Run To 1.0000 Seconds.

M-1-STARTER Device Closed.
M-1
Sync Motor Starting
M-1
Set Motor Parameter in Row 25 to 100.00000.
M-1
Changing Synchronous Motor parameter FlashValue from 340.000 to 100.000.
Simulation Complete.
Soft-Start Capability
The soft-start capability for synchronous motors is identical to that for the induction motor just
described in the previous section. Please refer to that documentation.
4.6 Motor Load Models

Refer to Induction Motor Modeling - Part 3 for a full description of the three motor load
models and how they are applied.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 311
4.7 Protective Device Modeling

As noted earlier, all protective devices modeled in Power Protector are simulated in the DS
Engine if appropriate data is supplied and the Power Protector feature is enabled (has been
purchased). For users without Power Protector, no protective devices are transferred into the DS
Focus.
Modeling of protective devices includes:
Fuses
LV Breakers
Relays
Under-Frequency Relay Action
Contactor Drop Out Action
ATS Auto-Transfer Action
Over-Voltage Relay Action
Under-Voltage Relay Action
Source Inverter Solid State Blocking Action for Faults
In all cases, for devices that include a minimum and maximum curve for device operation (for
example, an uncertainty band or fuse min melt and max clear curve) the more severe max clear
curve is used to determine when a device will be tripped. This will thus keep a fault condition on
longer, and corresponds to a consistent tripping action that matches the EasyPower Arc Flash
tool. More specifically, we note the following for each protective device:
Fuses
Fuses are simulated using an accumulated I2T action. When current through a fuse
causes the trip time to drop below 1000 seconds, I2T energy begins to accumulate.
The I2T trip value is updated on each time step corresponding to the present
current flowing through the fuse. When the accumulated I2T meets or exceeds the
I2T trip value, the fuse is tripped (actually the EasyPower switch on the oneline is
opened to simulate this).
Note that the energy accumulated in the fuse is not reset during a given
simulation. This memory action is performed since a typical dynamic simulation
runs for 10 to 50 seconds, and we believe this is not long enough to allow any
significant dissipation of heat from the fuse. From this memory action, multiple
faults through a fuse can contribute to a faster fuse blowing action, which in
reality would exist in the field.
LV Breakers Low Voltage Breakers are simulated using a time accumulation method.
When current through a LV Breaker causes the trip time to drop below 1000
seconds, then a timer is used (accumulating time) to trip the device as long as the
current remains above the devices pickup setting. When the accumulated time
exceeds the trip time at the current point on the devices TCC (specified and
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 312
updated by the present current flowing through the device), the device will trip.
The device instantaneously resets if the current drops below the pickup setting.
Relays
Relays are simulated using time accumulation as a simulated induction disc turns.
This assumes that digital relays are performing a similar action. Thus the device is
simulating travel time and tripping in accordance to the time dial setting.
When current through a Relay causes the trip time to drop below 1000 seconds,
the disc simulator starts timing. When the time passing by meets or exceeds the
trip time from the relays TCC based on present current through the device, the
device will trip.
If the current drops below the pickup setting before tripping, the device will
simulate travel-back of the induction disc (again assuming digital devices will do
the same). This travel-back assumes that the full travel-back of any relay is 60
seconds when on the maximum time dial, with this effect ratioed accordingly to
other time dial settings. From this travel-back action, we are simulating memory,
and thus are including the capability of a relay to trip faster on a second fault
application.
UF Relays
Under-Frequency Relays use a single under-frequency setting and timer. When

the bus frequency drops below the setting, and has stayed below for the time
specified, the device will trip its specified breaker. The relay performs an
instantaneous reset if the frequency goes above its setting.
Under-Frequency Relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current
Contactors
Contactors operate like the Under-Frequency Relay, and trip after voltage has
dropped below its setting for the time specified. The device resets
instantaneously.
ATS
ATS only perform automatic operation from left (Normal) to right (Emergency)
as seen on the oneline. Their behavior is as follows:
Assuming we are originating on the Normal side, if the source is lost (voltage
drops below the Trip Voltage setting for a time longer than the Delay on Start
setting), the ATS is prepared for transfer. If the voltage on the Emergency side is
above the ATS Required Voltage setting, then the transfer will continue. If not,
the ATS remains on the Normal side.
The ATS model does not presently simulate the Neutral position in its transfer.
Therefore, if transferring, it stays on the Normal Source side until the Neutral
Delay time and Mechanical Delay time are satisfied. To simulate the Neutral
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 313
position, an additional bus would need to be simulated in the network, and that
has not been implemented in the present version.
The ATS will not auto-transfer-back if the Emergency Source is lost. The action
presently modeled is a one-way transfer.
OV Relays
Over-Voltage Relays use a single over-voltage setting and timer. When the bus
voltage goes above the setting, and has stayed above for the time specified, the
the voltage goes below its setting.
Over-Voltage Relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current
UV Relays
Under-Voltage Relays use a single under-voltage setting and timer. When the bus
voltage goes below the setting, and has stayed below for the time specified, the
the voltage goes above its setting.
Under-Voltage Relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current
Inv Block
Inverters (when no DS data is specified) include a blocking action when the fault
current (specified in the inverter data dialog), has stayed above 102% FLA for the
time specified. Upon blocking, the inverter current injection is removed from the
network model and the inverter does not interact with the grid.
If you have EasyPower Power Protector, the DS Engine will automatically simulate your defined
protective devices in any TMS or DS simulation. Also, these protective device simulations need
no additional data on your part, and thus the method by which each protective device is
simulated needs clarification. Internally, protective devices can have differences in how they
behave over time. In the DS Engine, we have elected to simulate these devices using standard
approaches that will supply what we believe to be an adequate level of detail in your simulations.
In the future, more detail may be added to the particular action of some protective devices.
However, we believe that our users need reasonable functionality without excessive data entry.
To this end, we have adopted the following simulation methods.
4.7.1 Fuses
Fuses use I2T to determine when the device will trip. Thus we are using an accumulation of
energy. The method used follows these steps every time the device is checked, which is hard
coded in the engine to be every half cycle:
1. Get current through device.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 314
2. Look up time to trip off the devices TCC max clear curve.
3. If the time to trip is >= 1000 (i.e. off the manufacturers curve) do nothing, and skip past
all remaining steps.
4. If the time to trip is < 1000 (above steady-state pickup level), determine the I2T to trip
(from the current through the device and the time to trip).
5. Accumulate actual I2T from current through the device and the time between successive
checks of the device (hard coded to check every half cycle).
6. If the actual I2T is >= the I2T to trip, trip the device.
When the device trips, the switching device in the power flow associated with this protective
device will open. If the device is already open, then no action is taken.
For fuses, we will assume that if the device does not open, even though it is exposed to high
currents, the energy accumulated during the simulation will not dissipate. Thus, if a second fault
event occurs and the device is exposed to additional high currents (where the time to trip is <
1000), then we will start accumulating on top of the previous energy accumulation. Since the
time constants involved in removing accumulated energy from a fuse are in the order of 120
seconds, and most dynamic simulations last under 30 seconds, there is no reason to reset, or to
reduce the accumulated energy.
4.7.2 Low Voltage Breakers

Low Voltage Breakers use time accumulation and I2T accumulation to determine when the
device will trip. The method used (hard coded in the engine to evaluate conditions every half
cycle) follows these steps every time the device is checked:
3. If the time to trip is >= 1000 (i.e. off the manufacturers curve), do nothing and skip past
4. If the time to trip is < 1000 (picked up), use this time to check for tripping.
5. Accumulate time between successive checks of the device (hard coded to check every
half cycle) for the definite time sections.
6. If the actual time is >= the trip time (step 2), trip the device.
7. Accumulate I2T energy between successive checks of the device (hard coded to check
every half cycle) for the I2T sections.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 315
8. If the energy accumulated is greater than the I2T curve, trip the device.
When the device trips, the switching device in the power flow associated with this protective
device will open. If the device is already open, then no action is taken.
For low voltage breakers, we have assumed that if the current drops below pickup, the device
will perform an instantaneous reset.
4.7.3 Relays
Relays use travel time to determine when the device will trip. Thus we are using an
accumulation-of-time or simulated disc rotation. The method used (hard coded in the engine to
evaluate conditions every half cycle) follows these steps every time the device is checked:
3. If the time to trip is >= 1000 (i.e. off the manufacturers curve), do nothing and skip past
4. If the time to trip is < 1000 (picked up), accumulate actual time from the time between
successive checks of the device (hard coded to check every half cycle).
5. If the actual time is >= the time to trip, trip the device.
Now, once the device is tripped, an additional timer is started that includes the breaker delay
time and any auxiliary time delay. Once that timer is satisfied, the device which the relay is
pointing to is opened. If the device is already open, then no action is taken.
If the relay resets due to the fault clearing before its operation, the relay goes into a travel back
mode to simulate induction disc travel back. The time to fully reset is based on a typical IAC-53
relay taking approximately 60 seconds to fully travel back when having traveled to near tripping,
at a maximum time dial (the maximum distance that is possible for the relay to cover). Also,
since the shaded pole magnetic device is still cutting a field across the device, the rate of rotation
is of a constant velocity. Consider a relay using a 5 time dial setting, and where the max time dial
is 10. If the relay is exposed to current that causes a 1.0 second trip time for that setting, then if
the relay resets just before tripping, the relay will need 30 seconds to travel back to rest. If a
second fault of the same magnitude as the first is applied after 15 seconds of travel back time (a
fault that generates a 1.0 second trip time when the disc is fully reset, based on the TCC), the
relay will now trip in only 0.5 seconds, since it has only returned half way.
If a relay does not have a breaker defined to trip (see the trip device definition in the Relay data
dialog and right most columns), then we will use the same method for locating a protective
device as used in Power Protector and Arc Flash. We would recommend not relying upon this,
but to edit your relay data to input the actual device that the relay trips.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 316
4.7.4 Under-Frequency Relay

An under-frequency relay has been included with the DS Engine. This relay is entered in the
Relay equipment data dialog, and is specified as shown in Figure 214. The one relay that has
been entered into the Library is located in the ABB manufacturer selection and Type KF.
After importing the ABB Type KF relay, in the System tab, you will notice the Device Function
set to 81 and the Device Function Type set to Other. Both of these are important for the DS
Engine to recognize the device as an under-frequency relay. Finally, specify the breaker to trip,
and any aux time involved with additional time delay relays.
Figure 214. Relay data dialog for Under-Frequency System tab.
To set the relay, go to the Setting tab, and enter values only for the bottom Frequency category,
where you will find the Frequency Range, Delay and Frequency Setting values. Make selections
as appropriate. If you have an under-frequency relay made by another manufacturer with
different ranges and settings, go to the Device Library, find the ABB Type KF relay, and copy it
under the manufacturer you desire. Then, modify the three value categories to meet the
specification for your relay.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 317
Figure 215. Relay data dialog for Under-Frequency Settings tab.
The under-frequency relay model in the DS Engine simulates a standard under-frequency relay
action. If the bus frequency drops below the Frequency Setting, and stays below the value for a
time greater than or equal to the Delay, then the device will trip. After tripping, both breaker
delay and the aux time delay are satisfied before actually tripping the device specified by the
relay settings (see Figure 214 above).
If the bus frequency rises above the Frequency Setting before the Delay is satisfied, the relay will
instantaneously reset.
In this version, under-frequency relays (actually all relays for that matter) only connect to CTs.
The relay references the bus frequency (for its frequency input) for the bus closest to the CT.
When PTs are added to EasyPower, the under-frequency relay will be able to be connected to a
PT.
Note that bus frequency is synthesized from the bus voltage angle, and may not be exactly equal
to bus frequency as measured by an actual relay. The calculation used to determine bus
frequency is:
Bus Freq
AngleBusVoltage Now AngleBusVoltage LastTime

2 t
where the values of bus voltage angle are in radians, and the time step t is in seconds. After the
calculation above, filtering is applied in the form of a simple time constant equation, where the
time constant used is 10 times the time step of the simulation. An example of calculated bus
frequency without and with filtering vs. machine speed is shown in Figure 216 and Figure 217
below. Notice that even with filtering there is a slight departure from the smooth machine speed
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 318
curve when there are sudden changes in the network (in this case switch opening of a utility
source and then a feeder breaker on under-frequency).
0.9900
1.0100
COGEN [Spd PU]
GEN-BUS [Frq PU]
0.9900
1.0100
EasyPower DS
0.0
COGEN [Spd PU]

GEN-BUS [Frq PU]
0.3
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.0
Time (Seconds)
Figure 216. Bus frequency (red) vs. machine frequency (blue) without smoothing.
0.9900
1.0100
COGEN [Spd PU]
GEN-BUS [Frq PU]
0.9900
1.0100
EasyPower DS
0.0
COGEN [Spd PU]

GEN-BUS [Frq PU]
0.3
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.0
Time (Seconds)
Figure 217. Bus frequency (red) vs. machine frequency (blue) with smoothing.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 319
4.7.5 ATS Model

The ATS model in the DS Engine simulates one-way automatic transfer from Normal (left) to
Emergency (right) on an ATS equipment item. The settings for this device are found under the
Stability tab in the ATS equipment dialog, and are:
Parameter
Units
Description
Trip Voltage
Del on Start
Req Voltage
Neutral Del
Mech Del
Percent
Seconds
Percent
Seconds
Seconds
Normal bus voltage at which ATS picks up

Time in under-voltage condition before transfer
Voltage required on Emergency bus for transfer
Neutral delay time
Mechanical delay time.
In addition:
Once the voltage has dropped below the Trip Voltage for a time of Del on Start, and the
Emergency bus voltage is greater than Req Voltage, a transfer is commenced, and is
delayed for Neutral Del + Mech Del seconds. After the delay is satisfied, the ATS is
transferred to the Emergency bus.
If the voltage on the Emergency bus is not above the Req Voltage, then no transfer is
made. If the Emergency bus voltage rises above Req Voltage, and a transfer is in process,
then the ATS will transfer. Thus, the Req Voltage is the last check for a transfer. If all
conditions are satisfied for a transfer, the ATS will wait for the Emergency bus voltage to
rise above Req Voltage, and then instantaneously transfer.
If the Normal bus voltage rises above Trip Voltage before Del on Start is satisfied, the
ATS performs an instantaneous reset, and remains on the Normal bus.
When the ATS Switch Type is a Primary Selector Switch, then all ATS functionality
is disabled.
You must own EasyPower Power Protector to have the contactor model feature in the DS
Engine.
4.7.6 Contactor Model

The contactor model supplied with the DS Engine performs in a simplistic manner with only two
data items needed (under-voltage threshold and time to trip). The contactor simply responds to
an under-voltage condition, and if subjected to a level below the under-voltage threshold for the
time to trip, will cause the switching device it is associated with to switch open in the simulation.
Contactors can be found within fused switch and low voltage breaker equipment dialogs, under
the Stability tab. They are both enabled and specified in that tab.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 320
You must own EasyPower Power Protector to have the contactor model feature active in the DS
Engine.
Here are a few more application notes regarding contactors:
If the switching device a contactor is associated with is already open, and the contactor
says to open, then no action is taken.
Contactors will auto-trip off at the beginning of a simulation where the contactor is
located in an isolated (and thus disconnected) part of your system. The model is
responding to its initial voltage being zero, which is below its trip threshold. Since the
initial power flow represents steady-state, then by definition these contactors must be off.
Care must be taken to make sure that a protective upstream device is included in your
simulation when using a contactor that is exposed to a fault current condition. If such is
not done, then a contactor (sensing an under-voltage condition from a fault on its load
side), will interrupt the fault. In the simulation, this will happen cleanly, and without
mishap. However in real life, due to contactors not being rated to interrupt SC current, the
contactor would most likely explode into a mass of molten metal.
If the voltage at the contactor goes above the under-voltage threshold before the time to
trip is satisfied, the contactor will perform an instantaneous reset.
4.7.7 Under-Voltage Relay

An under-voltage relay has been included with the DS Engine. This relay is entered in the Relay
equipment data dialog, and is specified similar to the under-frequency relay as shown in Figure
218 and Figure 219. The one relay that has been entered into the Library is located in the ABB
manufacturer selection and Type 27.
After importing the ABB Type 27 relay, in the System tab, you will notice the Device Function
Engine to recognize the device as an under-voltage relay. Finally, specify the breaker to trip, and
any aux time involved with additional time delay relays.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 321
Figure 218. Relay data dialog for Under-Voltage System tab.
Figure 219. Relay data dialog for Under-Voltage Settings tab.
Under-voltage relays use a single under-voltage setting and timer. When the bus voltage goes
below the setting, and has stayed below for the time specified, the device will trip its specified
breaker. The relay performs an instantaneous reset if the voltage goes above its setting.
Under-voltage relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current Transformer (CT).
In a future revision, we anticipate adding Potential Transformers (PT) to the equipment pallet.
The CT ratio has no effect on the relay, as the relay senses the voltage of the bus closest to the
CT connection.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 322
4.7.8 Over-Voltage Relay

An over-voltage relay has been included with the DS Engine. This relay is entered in the Relay
equipment data dialog, and is specified similar to the under-frequency relay as shown in Figure
220 and Figure 221. The one relay that has been entered into the Library is located in the ABB
manufacturer selection and Type 59.
After importing the ABB Type 59 relay, in the System tab, you will notice the Device Function
Engine to recognize the device as an under-voltage relay. Finally, specify the breaker to trip, and
any aux time involved with additional time delay relays.
Figure 220. Relay data dialog for Over-Voltage System tab.
Over-voltage relays use a single over-voltage setting and timer. When the bus voltage goes
above the setting, and has stayed above for the time specified, the device will trip its specified
breaker. The relay performs an instantaneous reset if the voltage goes below its setting.
Over-voltage relays are presently only able to be connected onto a Current Transformer (CT). In
a future revision, we anticipate adding Potential Transformers (PT) to the equipment pallet. The
CT ratio has no effect on the relay, as the relay senses the voltage of the bus closest to the CT
connection.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 323
Figure 221. Relay data dialog for Over-Voltage Settings tab.
4.7.9 Inverter Blocking During Fault

Inverters include a blocking action when the fault current (specified in the inverter data dialog,
see Figure 222) has stayed above 102% FLA for the time specified. Upon blocking, the inverter
current injection is removed from the network model and the inverter does not interact with the
grid. This action is default when no stability data has been entered for the inverter. Note that the
present version of the DS Engine does not allow the P1VG and WT4G models to be specified
with the inverter.
Figure 222. Inverter - Settings tab.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 324
5.0 Messaging
The DS Engine Message Log is supplied to inform the user of particular model behavior. There
simply is not enough room on the oneline to present the number of messages that can be
generated by a large case, and so a message log provides a convenient chronology of the
simulation performed as well as particular model behavior in the simulation. In the authors
view, the message log is essential to fully document a simulation. Due to the real-time nature of
the simulation, and the complexity of even a few dynamic models running together, there is a
need for a clear and concise chronology of events.
All messages in the Message Log are meant to supply the user with necessary feedback on the
condition of their models during a simulation. We encourage the user to always review the
Message Log after each simulation, as a condition may need attention so that your simulation is
performed correctly. For example, if the following warning is generated:
"Gas Turbine Gov1 on Max Limit."
You will need to determine why this generators governor is on a limit, then fix the issue and rerun the simulation. The Message Log will need to be checked again to see if the warning has
been eliminated. Without a correction, in this example, the system will not be in steady-state
before running the simulation. As soon as the simulation is run, the system model will be trying
to satisfy system power balance, since this generator was unable to meet its requirement.
Messages are broken down into four basic types:
Script Notes a Script command action was taken.
Runtime Notes a message from the DS Engine or a model at run time.
Initialization Notes a message from the DS Engine or a model at initialization time.
Command Notes a message from a user button command.
Messages also have a status. The five major status conditions reported are:
Error !!! The DS Engine or a model has encountered an error. This must be resolved
before your simulation can be run. You will not be allowed to perform a simulation until
the error is resolved.
Warning The DS Engine or a model has encountered a condition that could

compromise the accuracy of your simulation. We suggest resolving all warnings, even
though the simulation will be allowed to proceed.
Pass At initialization time, if a model initializes properly, this message is displayed.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 325
OK This status accompanies informational messages. For example, this could

accompany a message from a protective device noting that it has picked up on an overcurrent condition.
Pausing This status appears when the user issues a button command to pause the
simulation.
Stepping This status appears when using the stepping capability in DS.
Result This status appears with information messages that are a result of a simulation.
This would include Arc Flash results, relay percent travel, etc.
In the following sections, messages are grouped by type, and are supplied a description of
conditions that can lead to the message as well as methods to correct the condition cited (if
necessary).
5.1 Exciter Max Limit Messages

"Basler AVC1 Exciter on VRMax Limit."
"IEEET1 AVR on Max Limit."
"IEEET2 AVR on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on AVR Max Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on Regulator Max Limit."
"IEEE AC2 VR on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC2 AVR Output VA on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC2A VR on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC2A AVR Output VA on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC2A Exciter Output VE on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC3A Exciter Output VE on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC3A AVR Output VA on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC4A Regulator on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC5A Exciter on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on AVR Max Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on Regulator Max Limit."
"IEEE AC6A feedback on VHMax limit."
"IEEE AC7B VA on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC7B VR on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC7B Exciter Output VE on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC8B on AVR Max Limit."
"IEEE AC8B on Exciter Output Max Limit."
"IEEE DC1A Exciter on Max Limit."
"IEEE DC4B Exciter on Max Limit."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 326
"IEEE DC4B Regulator on Max Limit."

"IEEE ST1A AVR on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST2 Regulator on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST2A Regulator on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST3A Regulator on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST3A Initial Efd is on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST4B Regulator on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST4B Exciter on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST5B Rectifier on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST6B AVR on VR Max Limit."
"IEEE ST7B AVR Input on Max Limit."
"IEEE ST7B AVR Output on Max Limit."
"Simple Exciter on Max Limit."
"Stamford1 Exciter EFD on Max Limit of EC1."
"Stamford1 Exciter AVR on Max Limit of EA1."
Description - At Initialization, these exciter models trigger the messages noted when on a
maximum limit either in the AVR or the output of the exciter. This is typically caused by overexciting the generator past the model settings, or by having an unreasonable limit specified in the
exciter model.
Fix - Try reducing generator var export (in the power flow case, lower control voltage for a PV
or Swing generator, or reduce Q for a PQG) or changing the limit (make it larger).
5.2 Exciter Min Limit Messages

"Basler AVC1 Exciter on VRMin Limit."
"IEEET1 AVR on Min Limit."
"IEEET2 AVR on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on Neg EFD Output Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on AVR Min Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on Regulator Min Limit."
"IEEE AC2 VR on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC2 AVR Output VA on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC2 Exciter Output VE is < zero."
"IEEE AC2A VR on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC2A AVR Output VA on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC2A Exciter Output VE is < zero."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 327
"IEEE AC3A Exciter Output VE on Min Limit."

"IEEE AC3A AVR Output VA on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC4A Regulator on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC5A Exciter on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on Neg EFD Output Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on AVR Min Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on Regulator Min Limit."
"IEEE AC6A feedback on zero limit."
"IEEE AC7B VA on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC7B VR on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC7B Exciter Output VE on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC7B AVR Output-VA*KP*VT on Min Limit."
"IEEE AC8B on AVR Min Limit."
"IEEE AC8B on Exciter Output Min Limit."
"IEEE DC1A Exciter on Min Limit."
"IEEE DC4B Exciter on Min Limit."
"IEEE DC4B Regulator on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST1A AVR on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST2 Regulator on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter on Zero Limit."
"IEEE ST2A Regulator on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST2A Exciter on Zero Limit."
"IEEE ST3A Regulator on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST3A Exciter on Zero Limit."
"IEEE ST4B Regulator on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST4B Exciter on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST5B Rectifier on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST6B AVR on VR Min Limit."
"IEEE ST6B Ifd Feedback on LV Gate Limit."
"IEEE ST7B AVR Input on Min Limit."
"IEEE ST7B AVR Output on Min Limit."
"Simple Exciter on Min Limit."
"Stamford1 Exciter EFD on Min Limit of EC2."
"Stamford1 Exciter AVR on Max Limit of EA2."
Description - At Initialization, these exciter models trigger the messages noted when on a
minimum limit, either in the AVR section or the exciter section. This is typically caused by
under-exciting the generator past the model settings, or by having an unreasonable limit specified
in the exciter model.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 328
Fix - Try reducing generator var import (in the power flow case, raise control voltage for a PV or
Swing generator, or increase Q for a PQG) or changing the limit (make it smaller or more
negative).
5.3 Exciter Gate Limit Messages

"IEEE AC1A on OEL Low Value Gate Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on UEL High Value Gate Limit."
"IEEE AC2A AVR on VOEL Limit."
"IEEE AC2A AVR on VUEL Limit."
"IEEE AC3A AVR on VUEL Limit."
Description - At Initialization, these exciter models trigger the messages noted when on a low or
high gate limit in the Over and Under Excitation Limiter inputs (OEL, UEL). This is typically
caused by an out of range var expectation on the generator, or an incorrect value set for the OEL
and UEL.
Fix - Try modifying generator var import/export (in the power flow case, change control voltage
for a PV or Swing generator, or change Q for a PQG) or changing the limit.
5.4 Governor Max Limit Messages

"Caterpillar Diesel 1 PID Output is on TMax Limit."
"Cummins Diesel1 Gov on Max Limit."
"Cummins Gas Engine1 Gov on Max Limit."
"Diesel Gov1 on Max Limit."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 on Max Limit."
"Gas Turbine2 Gov on Max Limit."
"Gas Turbine2 Low Value Output on Max Limit."
"Gas Turbine WDGov on Max Limit."
"Hydro Turbine Gov on Max Limit."
"IEEE Hydro2 Turbine Gov on Max Limit."
"IEEE Hydro3 Turbine Gov on Max Limit."
"IEEE Steam Turbine Gov on Max Limit."
"Pratt & Whitney FT8 Gov U on Max Limit."
"Splitshaft1 Gas Turbine Gov on Max Limit."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 on Max Limit."
"WECC Gast on Max Limit."
"Woodward Diesel Gov1 on Max Limit."
"Woodward Steam PID1 on Max Limit."
Description Governor models control the mechanical power delivered to the shaft of a
generator. If the generator is asking for more power than can be supplied by the prime mover,
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 329
this message will be generated at initialization. Note that whenever a governor reports this
condition, a steady-state run will not be steady-state. The power required by the system is not
being met, and the governor is on a limit. As soon as your simulation begins, other generating
units in the system will have to pick up the extra generation needed to balance out the system.
Fix - Reduce the power output of the generator in the power flow or increase the max limit
setting in the governor model to remove this warning.
5.5 Governor Min Limit Messages

"Caterpillar Diesel 1 PID Output is on TMin Limit."
"Cummins Diesel1 Gov on Min Limit."
"Cummins Gas Engine1 Gov on Min Limit."
"Diesel Gov1 on Min Limit."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 on Min Limit."
"Gas Turbine2 Gov on Min Limit."
"Gas Turbine2 Low Value Output on Min Limit."
"Gas Turbine WDGov on Min Limit."
"Hydro Turbine Gov on Min Limit."
"IEEE Hydro2 Turbine Gov on Min Limit."
"IEEE Hydro3 Turbine Gov on Min Limit."
"IEEE Steam Turbine Gov on Min Limit."
"Pratt & Whitney FT8 Gov U on Min Limit."
"Splitshaft1 Gas Turbine Gov on Min Limit."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 on Min Limit."
"WECC Gast on Min Limit."
"Woodward Diesel Gov1 on Min Limit."
"Woodward Steam PID1 on Min Limit."
Description Governor models control the mechanical power delivered to the shaft of a
generator. If the generator is asking for less power than can be supplied by the prime mover, this
message will be generated at initialization. Note that whenever a governor reports this condition,
that a steady-state run will not be steady-state. The power required by the system is not being
met, and the governor is on a limit. As soon as your simulation begins, other generating units in
the system will have to reduce generation to balance out the system.
Fix - Increase the power output of the generator in the power flow or decrease the min limit
Note - Typically for a min limit message to appear, either erroneous data has been entered for the
governor model, or the generator in the power flow case is absorbing power. The min limit for
most governor / prime mover models is zero. This simply states that the prime mover will not
become a load. In actual practice, the min limit is often set to the level of turbine power output
that would trip the reverse power relay, or some other form of minimum power protection. These
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 330
messages thus alert the user to an improper initialization, where the unit would have actually
tripped offline.
5.6 Governor Runtime Load Limit Messages

"Gas Turbine Gov1 Now ON Ambient Temp Load Limit."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 Now OFF Ambient Temp Load Limit."
"WECC Gast Now ON Ambient Temp Load Limit."
"WECC Gast Now OFF Ambient Temp Load Limit."
Description - As for Max Limit messages discussed above, this message is supplied (typically
during run-time) when a unit is being over-loaded. This can happen during a contingency, where
there is a major loss of generation and remaining units must then pick up the load, forcing them
into an overload condition. The load limit in this case performs automatic control, causing the
generators gas turbine not to continue in overload. The messages supplied inform you when the
turbine goes into and out of load limit control.
Fix Though this is a message simply noting a control action, if you desire to keep this message
from appearing (meaning you desire to keep the turbine from moving into a temperature load
limit condition), then create a system contingency that does not have a large imbalance of load
requirement vs. available generation. Create a condition where load and generation are balanced,
and where generation has some headroom (generator capability greater than load requirement).
Alternatively, since the temperature load limit takes time to be reached (time constant simulates
how the turbine heats up over time when in an overload condition), only allow overload
conditions that have a duration and level that will not cause the unit to reach the temperature load
limit.
5.7 Governor Initialization Load Limit Messages

"Gas Turbine 1 Exceeding Ambient Temperature Load Limit at Initialization."
"WECC Gast Exceeding Ambient Temperature Load Limit at Initialization."
Description - As for Max Limit messages discussed above, this message is supplied (during
initialization) when a unit is over-loaded. Since the governor is limited, upon running a
simulation, the generator will be forced to a lower power level, creating a non steady-state
response if run steady-state.
Fix - Reduce the power output of the generator in the power flow or increase the max limit
5.8 Slew Run Messages

"Round Rotor Gen Slew Run Diverged (IMag)."
"Round Rotor Gen Slew Run Exceeded Max Iters."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 331
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Diverged (IMag)."

"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Diverged (Slip)."
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Exceeded Max Iters for PF Conditions."
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Exceeded Max Iters at Full Load."
Description - These are initialization errors. The machine model noted incorporates saturation
and other non-linear methods, and thus initialization of the model cannot be performed directly.
An iterative error driven minimization technique is used (slew run). If the generator terminal
conditions are extreme, this iterative technique may diverge. Several message types are seen
when these conditions occur, and these are:
Diverged (IMag) - This notes that the terminal current magnitude triggered the
divergence sensor.
Exceeded Max Iters - This notes that the slew run did not converge by the time it
reached the maximum number of allowed iterations.
Diverged (Slip) This notes that induction motor slip triggered the divergence sensor.
Fix - Review the machines terminal conditions (P and Q) and determine if the equipment is
indeed being asked to perform far beyond its rated capability. Modify the machine in the power
flow case to bring it within an acceptable loading. Alternatively, the model data may be corrupt,
and may not be representing a reasonable machine characteristic. If you are using your own data,
try replacing it with EasyPower-provided model data from the model library. Compare constants
to see where your data may be in error.
Odd Root Cause In the process of running simulations with induction motors, we have found
an instance where this message is generated, but the causes above are not at the root of the issue.
In one instance we discovered that the base frequency had been set to a high value of 400 Hz,
due to a system being created after running a 400 Hz simulation of an airport runway grid. The
high base frequency caused a motor with data specified for 50 or 60 Hz to diverge during the
slew run.
5.9 Slip Estimate Messages

"Ind2 Motor Cannot Meet Power Required (Slip Estimate)."
"Ind2 Motor Slip Run Diverged (IMag - Slip Estimate)."
"Ind2 Motor Slip Run Diverged (Slip - Slip Estimate)."
Description At initialization, in addition to a slew run (see section just above), induction motor
models also need to develop an estimate of slip to enter the slew run. Since the torque-slip curve
is non-linear, determining this initial estimate again necessitates an iterative technique. These
messages appear when the slip estimate cannot be found. Several message types are seen, and
these are:
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 332
Cannot Meet Power Required This message is generated when the full torque-slip
curve has been traversed, and no value of torque can supply the power required of the
motor.
Diverged (IMag) This notes that the iterative estimate method diverged, and that
terminal current magnitude triggered the divergence sensor.
Diverged (Slip) This notes that the iterative estimate method diverged, and that slip
triggered the divergence sensor.
Fix Review the machines terminal conditions (P and Q) and determine if the equipment is
indeed being asked to supply power far beyond the units capability. Modify the machine in the
power flow case to bring it within an acceptable loading. Alternatively, the model data may be
corrupt, and not be representing a reasonable machine characteristic. If you are using your own
data, try replacing it with EasyPower-provided model data from the model library. Compare
constants to see where your data may be in error.
Odd Root Cause In the process of running simulations with induction motors, we have found
an instance where this message is generated, but the causes above are not at the root of the issue.
In one instance we discovered that the base frequency had been set to a high value of 400 Hz,
due to a system being created after running a 400 Hz simulation of an airport runway power grid.
The high base frequency caused a motor with data specified for 50 or 60 Hz to diverge during the
slip estimate.
5.10 Data Error Messages

5.10.1 Generator Error Messages
"Round Rotor Gen E2 is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen S(E2) is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen has improper saturation constants - 1."
"Round Rotor Gen has improper saturation constants - 2."
"Round Rotor Gen E2 is <= E1."
"Round Rotor Gen S(E2) is <= S(E1)"
"Round Rotor Gen X''d is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen X''q is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen X'd is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen X'q is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen Xd is <= X'd."
"Round Rotor Gen Xq is <= X'q."
"Round Rotor Gen T'do is <= T''do."
"Round Rotor Gen T'qo is <= T''qo."
"Round Rotor Gen Xd is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen Xq is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen T'do is <= zero."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 333
"Round Rotor Gen T''do is <= zero."

"Round Rotor Gen T'qo is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen T''qo is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen H is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen Rated kV is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen Bus kV is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen MVA is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen E2 is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen S(E2) is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen has improper saturation constants - 1."
"Salient Pole Gen has improper saturation constants - 2."
"Salient Pole Gen E2 is <= E1."
"Salient Pole Gen S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"Salient Pole Gen X''d is <= Xl."
"Salient Pole Gen X'd is <= Xl."
"Salient Pole Gen Xd is <= X'd."
"Salient Pole Gen X'd is <= X''d."
"Salient Pole Gen Xq is <= X''q."
"Salient Pole Gen T'do is <= T''do."
"Salient Pole Gen T'do is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen T''do is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen T''qo is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen H is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen Rated kV is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen Bus kV is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen MVA is <= zero."
"Inverter PV1G System kV rating is <= zero."
"Inverter PV1G System Bus kV is <= zero."
"Inverter PV1G System MVA rating is <= zero."
"Inverter PV1G System Brkpt is <= Zerox."
"Inverter WT4G System kV rating is <= zero."
"Inverter WT4G System Bus kV is <= zero."
"Inverter WT4G System MVA rating is <= zero."
"Inverter WT4G System Brkpt is <= Zerox."
"Inverter WT4G PI Controller dPmx <= dPmn."
5.10.2 Exciter Error Messages

"Basler AVC1 Exciter KA is < zero."
"Basler AVC1 Exciter TE is < zero."
"Basler AVC1 Exciter TF2 is < zero."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 334
"Basler AVC1 Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."

"IEEET1 Exciter KA is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter TF is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter TE is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter E2 is < E1."
"IEEET1 Exciter S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"IEEET1 Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEET2 Exciter KA is zero."
"IEEET2 Exciter TE is zero."
"IEEET2 Exciter TF1 is zero."
"IEEE AC1A value of TF is zero."
"IEEE AC1A value of TE is zero."
"IEEE AC1A value of TB is zero while TC is not."
"IEEE AC2 AVR KA is < zero."
"IEEE AC2 AVR KB is <= zero."
"IEEE AC2 AVR VAMax is <= VAMin."
"IEEE AC2 AVR VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC2A AVR KA is < zero."
"IEEE AC2A AVR KB is <= zero."
"IEEE AC2A AVR VAMax is <= VAMin."
"IEEE AC2A AVR VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC2A AVR VOEL is <= VUEL."
"IEEE AC2A Exciter KE + SE(VE) is = zero."
"IEEE AC3A AVR KA is < zero."
"IEEE AC3A AVR KF is < zero."
"IEEE AC3A AVR KR is <= zero."
"IEEE AC3A AVR VAMax is <= VAMin."
"IEEE AC3A Exciter VFEMax is <= VEMin."
"IEEE AC3A Exciter KE + SE(VE) is = zero."
"IEEE AC3A Exciter KR * Efd is = zero."
"IEEE AC4A Exciter KA is < zero."
"IEEE AC4A Exciter TA is < zero."
"IEEE AC4A Exciter TB is < Zero."
"IEEE AC4A Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC4A Exciter VIMax is <= VIMin."
"IEEE AC5A Exciter K is < zero."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 335
"IEEE AC5A Exciter TE is < zero."

"IEEE AC5A Exciter TF2 is < zero."
"IEEE AC5A Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC6A KA is zero."
"IEEE AC6A TA is zero while TK is not."
"IEEE AC6A TB is zero while TC is not."
"IEEE AC6A TH is zero while TJ is not."
"IEEE AC6A TE is zero."
"IEEE AC6A E2 is <= E1."
"IEEE AC6A S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"IEEE AC6A VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC6A VAMax is <= VAMin."
"IEEE AC7B AVR KPA is < zero."
"IEEE AC7B AVR KPR is < zero."
"IEEE AC7B AVR KIA is < zero."
"IEEE AC7B AVR KDR is < zero."
"IEEE AC7B AVR KIR is < zero."
"IEEE AC7B AVR KP is <= zero."
"IEEE AC7B AVR VAMax is <= VAMin."
"IEEE AC7B AVR VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC7B Exciter VFEMax is <= VEMin."
"IEEE AC7B Exciter KE + SE(VE) is = zero."
"IEEE AC7B KP * VT is = zero."
"IEEE AC8B KA is zero."
"IEEE AC8B TDR is zero."
"IEEE AC8B exciter max limit has divide by zero."
"IEEE AC8B TE is zero."
"IEEE AC8B E2 is <= E1."
"IEEE AC8B S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"IEEE AC8B VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC8B VEMax is <= VEMin."
"IEEE DC1A Exciter K is < zero."
"IEEE DC1A Exciter TE is < zero."
"IEEE DC1A Exciter TB is < zero."
"IEEE DC1A Exciter EMax is <= EMin."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 336

"IEEE DC4B Exciter KA is < zero."
"IEEE DC4B Exciter KP is < zero."
"IEEE DC4B Exciter KD is < zero."
"IEEE DC4B Exciter TE is < zero."
"IEEE DC4B Exciter EMax is <= EMin."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter KA is < zero."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter TA is < zero."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter TB is < Zero."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE ST1A Exciter VIMax is <= VIMin."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter K is < zero."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter TE is < zero."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter TR is < zero."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter TF is < zero."
"IEEE ST2 Exciter EMax is <= EMin."
"IEEE ST2A Exciter K is < zero."
"IEEE ST2A Exciter TE is < zero."
"IEEE ST2A Exciter TR is < zero."
"IEEE ST2A Exciter TF is < zero."
"IEEE ST2A Exciter EMax is <= EMin."
"IEEE ST3A Exciter TA is < zero."
"IEEE ST3A Exciter TB is < zero."
"IEEE ST3A Exciter TM is < zero."
"IEEE ST3A Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE ST3A Exciter VMMax is <= VMMin."
"IEEE ST4B Exciter TA is < zero."
"IEEE ST4B Exciter TR is < zero."
"IEEE ST4B Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE ST4B Exciter VMMax is <= VMMin."
"IEEE ST5B Exciter KR is < zero."
"IEEE ST5B Exciter TB1 is < zero."
"IEEE ST5B Exciter TB3 is < zero."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 337

"IEEE ST6B Regulator KPA is < zero."
"IEEE ST6B Efd Feedback KG is < zero."
"IEEE ST6B Efd Feedback TG is < zero."
"IEEE ST6B AVR VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE ST6B Regulator VAMax is <= VAMin."
"IEEE ST7B Exciter KPA is < zero."
"IEEE ST7B Exciter KIA is < zero."
"IEEE ST7B Exciter VMax is <= VMin."
"Simple Exciter K is zero."
"Simple Exciter TE is zero."
"Simple Exciter TB is zero while TC is not."
"Simple Exciter EMax is <= EMin."
"Inverter Controller PV1E Kpv is < zero."
"Inverter Controller PV1E Kiv is < zero."
"Inverter Controller PV1E Kqi is < zero."
"Inverter Controller PV1E Kvi is < zero."
"Inverter Controller PV1E VErmx is <= VErmn."
"Inverter Controller PV1E QMax is <= QMin."
"Inverter Controller PV1E VMax is <= VMin."
"Stamford1 Exciter has KA < zero."
"Stamford1 Exciter has TE <= zero."
"Stamford1 Exciter has TF1 < zero."
"Stamford1 Exciter has TF2 < zero."
"Stamford1 Exciter has EA1 < EA2"
"Stamford1 Exciter has EC1 < EC2"
5.10.3 Governor Error Messages

"Caterpillar Diesel 1 KP is less than zero."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 KI is less than zero."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 KG is <= zero."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 KA is <= zero."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 KC is <= zero."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 VMin is >= VMax."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 TMin is >= TMax."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 MVA is <= zero."
"Caterpillar Diesel 1 RPM is <= zero."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 338
"Cummins Diesel1 Gov proportional gain is < zero."

"Cummins Diesel1 Gov integral gain is < zero."
"Cummins Diesel1 Gov derivative is < zero."
"Cummins Diesel1 Gov VMax is <= VMin."
"Cummins Diesel1 Gov TMax is <= TMin."
"Gas Turbine Gov Droop is <= zero."
"Gas Turbine Gov Max is <= Min."
"Gas Turbine WDGov Droop is <= zero."
"Gas Turbine WDGov Max is <= Min."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 R is <= zero."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 T1 is < zero."
"Hydro Turbine Gov Droop is <= zero."
"Hydro Turbine Gov UO is <= UC."
"Hydro Turbine Gov GMax is <= GMin."
"IEEE Hydro3 Turbine Gov Droop is <= zero."
"IEEE Hydro3 Turbine Gov UO is <= UC."
"IEEE Hydro3 Turbine Gov PMax is <= PMin."
"IEEE Hydro2 Turbine Gov PMax is <= PMin."
"IEEE Steam Turbine Gov Gain K is <= zero."
"IEEE Steam Turbine Gov P Up Rate is <= zero."
"IEEE Steam Turbine Gov P Up Rate is < P Down Rate."
"Pratt & Whitney FT8 Gov Droop is < zero."
"Pratt & Whitney FT8 Gov Max is <= VMin."
"Pratt & Whitney FT8 Gov U initialization error - Check P1 to P4."
"Splitshaft1 Gas Turbine Gov FrateFL is <= FrateNL."
"Splitshaft1 Gas Turbine Gov FMax is <= FMin."
"Splitshaft1 Gas Turbine Gov R is <= zero."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 T1 is <= zero."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 R is <= zero."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 T3 is zero while T2 is not."
"WECC Gast value of B is zero while A is not."
"WECC Gast value of T4 is zero while T5 is not."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 339
"WECC Gast value of KA is zero."

"WECC Gast value of V for P vs. V curve is < zero."
"WECC Gast value of P for P vs. V curve is < zero."
"Woodward Diesel Gov1 T1 is < zero."
"Woodward Steam PID1 TB is <= zero."
"Woodward Steam PID1 TC is < zero."
"Woodward Steam PID1 TD is < zero."
"Woodward Diesel Gov1 T1*T2 is zero."
"Woodward Diesel Gov1 T5*T6 is zero."
"Cummins Gas Engine1 Gov proportional gain is < zero."
"Cummins Gas Engine1 Gov integral gain is < zero."
"Cummins Gas Engine1 Gov derivative is < zero."
"Cummins Gas Engine1 Gov FMax is <= FMin."
5.10.4 Description & Fix

Description - In a few models, input data is checked for correct model operation at initialization.
This is especially true when particular models will create a zero-divide or positive feedback
condition if constants fall within a specific range.
Fix If these errors appear, they must be fixed to perform a simulation. Change the values so
that they do not trigger the error, and thus represent values that supply correct model response.
5.11 Motor Starting Runtime Message

"Ind2 Motor Starting"
"Sync Motor Starting"
Description This message is logged when an induction or synchronous motor starts.
5.12 Initialized Message

"Round Rotor Gen Initialized."
"Salient Pole Gen Initialized."
"Ind2 Motor Initialized at Full Load - Using on Rated Power."
"Ind2 Motor Initialized at Full Load - Using on Rated Slip."
"Ind2 Motor Initialized for PF Conditions - Power Basis."
"Ind2 Motor Initialized for PF Conditions - Slip Basis."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 340
"Synchronous Motor Initialized at Full Load."

"Synchronous Motor Initialized for PF Conditions."
"Inverter PV1G System Initialized."
"Inverter WT4G System Initialized."
Description - These messages indicate that the models noted are initialized properly, and are
ready to run in the simulation.
5.13 Load Transition Messages

"Ind2 Motor Load Transition - Starting to Running."
"Sync Motor Load Transition - Starting to Running."
Description - These messages indicate that the motor models load is starting its transition from
starting load to running load.
5.14 Sync Motor Field Tripped Message

"Sync Motor Field Tripped."
Description - This message indicates that the field of the synchronous motor indicated has
tripped in response to a breakers or contactors status.
5.15 Sync Motor Field Tripped on Reverse Power Message

"Sync Motor Reverse Power Sensor Tripped."
Description - This message indicates that the synchronous motors field has tripped due to a
reverse power condition on the motor.
5.16 Sync Motor Field Applied Message

"Applied Field to Sync Motor at XX% Speed."
Description - This message indicates that the field of the synchronous motor indicated has been
applied under a starting condition, at the noted speed.
5.17 Solution Messages

"No Network Solution After Fault Applied."
"No Network Solution After Fault Removed."
"No Network Solution After Transferring ATS."
"No Network Solution After Opening Contactor."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 341
"No Network Solution During Run Simulation."

"No Prelim Solution At End of Initialization."
"No Solution After Opening Device."
"No Solution After Closing Device."
"No Fault Clearing Power Flow Solution on DS Reset."
"No Initial Power Flow Solution on DS Reset."
"No Initial VCN Solution on DS Reset."
"No Power Flow Solution on DS Entry."
"No VCN Solution on DS Entry."
Description All of these messages involve solution and conversion of the network model. To
enter the DS Focus, there must be a properly solved and converted power flow case. The case
must first solve using the same technique used in the PF Focus, and then it is converted to a VCN
(voltage controlled network) and solved again. The standard PF Focus solution technique models
generators as swing and voltage controlling sources, and motors as static loads. Conversion to a
VCN is accomplished by changing all sources (generators, utilities and motors) to Thevenin
equivalent voltage sources, and having all other loads modeled as constant impedance static
loads (constant current and MVA loads are converted to constant impedance). During
initialization or runtime, if the network cannot be solved, an error is generated and the simulation
terminated.
Note In the first release of the DS Engine (Version 8.1), we have forced all non-source
network loads (non-motor loads) to be modeled as constant impedance. At a future date, constant
current and MVA load models may be allowed. This modeling method (constant impedance)
means that the network should always solve, as constant impedance load models allow for a noniterative direct solution of the network. Thus there should never be a condition where the
network does not solve. If any of these errors appear, please contact EasyPower Technical
Support, and be ready to supply your case for diagnosis.
5.18 Refactor Messages

"Unable to Refactor on Reset."
Description This message involves the internal refactorization of YBus upon reset of a
simulation. If this message appears, there are internal coding inconsistencies involving open and
closed breaker status. This message should never occur during normal operation. If it does,
contact EasyPower Technical Support, and please be willing to supply your database to us for
diagnosis.
5.19 Energizing Generator in Offline Condition Message

"Error - Cannot energize generator in offline condition."
Description The starting up and synchronization of a generator takes a significant amount of
automatic controls. Such controls have not been programmed into the present release of the DS
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 342
Engine. This means that if a generator is initialized offline by having its breaker open or by
existing in a portion of a system that is isolated upon DS Focus entry, and if the generator is a
PV Gen, the generator is not allowed to start. This auto-start feature may be added in a later
release. If you desire to switch into a generator that has just started up, locate the gen on a
disconnected bus, and specify it as a SWING Gen. It will be initialized online, but isolated. Close
into the generator when control actions specify switching into the generator.
5.20 Induction Motor Power Flow Messages

"Power Flow Vars Not Settled for Induction Motors."
"Power Flow Solves Exceeded 10 Iterations for Induction Motors."
"Power Flow Settled in XX Solves for Induction Motors."
Description These messages describe conditions when the power flow solution is iteratively
used to get an initial condition power flow solution that matches the var requirements of
induction motors. As noted in the Operations Manual, var requirements of the actual machine
model may differ from those assumed in a power flow case. Thus the power flow is iteratively
corrected, so that initial conditions exactly match the machine equation requirements. If
conditions line up, then the Settled message is issued. If the power flow cannot converge, or
converge quickly enough, one of the other two messages may precipitate.
Fix If either the Exceeded 10 Iterations or Vars Not Settled message appears, the condition
of your system is such that var requirements of induction motors cannot be met. This can be
caused by a system that is near voltage collapse where the motors are connected, or when
induction motor machine data has specified a motor that cannot meet the power requirements
desired of it from the power flow (possibly moving the motor into a stall point for an initial
condition). In either case, induction motor data should be reviewed and the power flow case
should be inspected for unstable voltage conditions (a location where small changes in var
loading cause large changes in voltage).
5.21 Protective Device Pickup Messages

"Fuse Picked Up On Over Current."
"LV Breaker Picked Up On Over Current."
"Relay Picked Up On Over Current."
"ATS Picked Up On Under-Voltage."
"Contactor Picked Up."
Relay Picked Up On Under-Frequency XX Hz
"Relay Picked Up On Under-Voltage XX Volts."
"Relay Picked Up On Over-Voltage XX Volts."
"Solid State Device Picked Up on Fault-Current."
"Solid State Device Picked Up on Under-Voltage."
Description Protective devices (PD) modeled by the user can be globally enabled during the
simulation. These devices are then monitoring current, and if their device curve is satisfied
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 343
(current meets or exceeds the fuse max-clear curve, LV Breaker max-clear curve or relay pickup
current), then it will trigger a pickup message. This is an informational message only, and in
most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.
Note If protective devices are picking up which should not be doing so, we suggest a thorough
review of the protective device settings via their TCC plots.
5.22 Protective Device Reset Messages

"Fuse Reset at I Squared T = XX%"
"LV Breaker Reset."
"Relay Reset at XX% Travel. Now Traveling Back."
"ATS Reset."
"Contactor Reset."
Relay Reset. Timer Reset.
"Solid State Device Reset on Fault-Current."
Description If a protective device has already picked up (see just above), but then the current
drops below the trip point (below the fuse max-clear curve, LV Breaker max-clear curve or relay
pickup current), then the protective device will reset. This is an informational message only, and
in most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.
Note If protective devices are re-setting that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of
the protective device settings via their TCC plots. Also note that for a fuse reset (which really is
not a physical reset, but an energy condition where the fuse element did not melt), the fuses
exposed I Squared T in percent of fuse capability is displayed in the Message Log. This then
gives an indication of fuse fatigue. Note that the fuse model never resets the accumulated energy
in a single simulation. This then means that fuse pre-heating can be simulated for several
contingency events (where the fuse may blow faster on the second event due to energy already
accumulated). This modeling method was implemented based on the assumption that most
dynamic simulations run to about 20 or 50 seconds, and that this would not be enough time to
significantly dissipate heat accumulated in the fuse.
5.23 Protective Device Trip Messages

"Fuse Tripped On Over Current."
"LV Breaker Tripped On Over Current."
"Relay Tripped On Over Current."
"ATS Tripped On Under-Voltage XX Volts."
"ATS Tripped On Over-Voltage XX Volts."
Relay Tripped on Under-Frequency XX% Hz
Description If a protective device has picked up (see just above), and it then satisfies the
devices trip point (the fuse max-clear curve, LV Breaker max-clear curve or relay TCC curve), a
message is generated to note that the device has tripped. For a Fuse and LV Breaker, an
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 344
additional signal is then sent to the switch or breaker modeled in the network to force the device
to open. For a relay, we now start a one-way timer (which cannot reset) that will, at a later time,
issue a breaker trip signal. This is an informational message only, and in most cases does not
signify an error or warning condition.
Note If protective devices are tripping that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the
protective device settings via their TCC plots.
5.24 Relay Time Delay Satisfied Message

"Relay Aux Time and Breaker Clearing Time Satisfied."
Description If a relay has tripped (see just above), then after the relay delay time and breaker
opening time are satisfied, this message is generated. This notes that a trip signal has been issued
to the breaker associated with the relay. This is an informational message only, and in most cases
does not signify an error or warning condition.
Note If relays are tripping that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the protective
device settings via their TCC plots.
5.25 Relay Travel Back Message

"Relay Travel Back Complete."
Description If a relay has tripped and reset (see just above), then it begins traveling back.
When the travel back is complete, this message will be generated.
5.26 Relay Unable to Trip Breaker Message

"Relay Unable to Trip Breaker - Not Defined."
Description If a relay has tripped and has satisfied all delay times, but cannot find a breaker to
trip, then this message will be displayed.
Fix Make sure that a breaker has been assigned to this relay. In EasyPower, the software is able
to look for an associated breaker; however, in some cases this auto-locate feature is unable to
find the breaker associated with the relay. This is why a field was added in the Relay Dialog
System Tab for assigning a breaker to a relay.
5.27 Relay Instantaneous Reset Message

"Relay Resetting from Instantaneous Pickup at xx% of Travel."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 345
Description If a relay has tripped and reset (see just above) when in a definite time (horizontal
line trip characteristic) section, then this message is displayed to show the action and to indicate
how close the device came to tripping.
5.28 ATS Transferred Messages

"ATS Transferred to Emergency Source."
"ATS Transferred to Normal Source."
Description If an ATS has detected a loss of source and tripped (see just above), then after the
delay time is satisfied, this message is generated. This notes that a transfer signal has been issued
to the ATS, and it has performed its function. This is an informational message only, and in most
cases does not signify an error or warning condition.
Note If an ATS is transferring that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the
protective device settings for the ATS.
5.29 Contactor Dropped Out Message

"Contactor Dropped Out."
Description If a contactor has sensed an under-voltage condition that exceeds its under-voltage
setting and delay time, this message is generated. This notes that a signal has been issued to the
contactors switching device, and it has performed its function (opened). This is an informational
message only, and in most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.
Note If a contactor is dropping out that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the
protective device settings for the contactor.
5.30 Exceeded Result Storage Message

"Exceeded Result Storage Array Size."
Description - This message should never occur during normal operation. If it does, contact
EasyPower Technical Support, and please be willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis.
5.31 No PF Source Messages

"No PF Source for Ind2 Motor."
"No PF Source for Sync Motor."
"No PF Source for RR Gen."
"No PF Source for SP Gen."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 346
Description - These messages should never occur during normal operation. If they do, contact
EasyPower Technical Support, and please be willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis.
5.32 DStates Not Settled Messages

"DStates Not Settled, See Other Model Error Messages."
Description During initialization, a check is made to see if the full model is settled. This is
done by running one time step, and reviewing all DStates across all models. Given the DState is
the value used to drive the integration calculation, and represents changes in a models
condition, if the value of all DStates falls below a set threshold, then we can assume that the full
model is settled.
Fix We suggest reviewing all messages in the Message Log for a limit violation or other such
warning. This is the most obvious reason for some DStates not being settled. However, if no
other messages appear, but still the DStates are not settled, consider an additional step. Unsettled
DStates occur in large system models where the DStates are very near being settled, but do not
fall below the Maximum Allowed DState threshold. This is a user controlled setting in the DS
Options dialog, and can be increased if necessary to get a simulation to continue. If this threshold
level is increased, we suggest doing so slightly until the DState Not Settled message goes
away. Then after this, run the simulation in steady-state for 5 seconds (plotting several results) to
verify that the system is indeed settled (all plotted results should produce a nearly flat line).
5.33 DStates Settled Messages

"DStates Settled for All Models."
Description This message notes that all DStates are settled and that performing a simulation
can proceed. D or differential states are indicators of change. If they are near zero and not
growing, then the simulation is in steady state, i.e. not moving. When they are above a minimum
level and growing, then changes are happening in the system, and the system is thus not settled,
and thus not in steady state.
5.34 Faulted Message

"Faulted."
Description This message alerts the user to a fault being applied on the noted bus.
5.35 Fault Removed Message

"Fault Removed."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 347
Description This message alerts the user that a fault which was applied (see just above) is now
being removed from the noted bus.
5.36 ATS Transferred Message

"ATS Transferred."
Description This message alerts the user to an automatic transfer switch that has been
switched (toggled) to its alternate condition.
5.37 Contactor Dropped Out in Isolated Sub-System Message

"Contactor Dropped Out in Isolated Sub-System."
Description All contactors modeled with dynamic drop-out settings will automatically drop
out under voltage depression conditions of an impacting duration. This message alerts the user to
the drop-out action taken on the noted contactor. If a contactor is located on an isolated subsystem after solving an initial power flow condition, it will automatically drop out, since the bus
voltage on all buses in an isolated sub-system without a swing generator is zero. This message
often appears just after initialization for a system where a contactor is modeled within an isolated
sub-system.
5.38 Results Saved Message

"Results Saved to Windows Clipboard."
Description The user can select to have all results copied to the Windows Clipboard. When
this action is performed, the user is alerted to the action. The data is tab delimited and ready for
import into Excel.
Note Copying results to the Windows Clipboard is time consuming, especially if the data set
is large (lots of points and lots of curves). If this automatic action is slowing down display of
simulation results, disable it in the DS Options dialog.
5.39 Device Opened Message

"Device Opened."
Description This message is generated when a device (LV Breaker, HV Breaker, Switch,
Fused Switch) is either opened by a script action, or opened automatically as a result of
protective device action.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 348
5.40 Device Closed Message

"Device Closed."
Description This message is generated when a device (LV Breaker, HV Breaker, Switch,
Fused Switch) is closed by a script action.
5.41 Simulation Run To Message

"Simulation Run To XX Seconds."
Description This message is generated when a script command is processed which performs a
Run To action. The time (XX) specified in the script command is also supplied.
5.42 Simulation Run For Message

"Simulation Run For XX Seconds."
Description This message is generated when a script command is processed which performs a
Run For action. The time (XX) specified in the script command is also supplied.
5.43 Simulation Reset Message

"Simulation Re-Initialized."
Description This message notes that the user reset the simulation. The next time the simulation
is run, it will start from the beginning.
5.44 Run Script Message

"Run Script XXX."
Description This message notes that script XXX is being run as a response to a user command.
5.45 Run Script Warning Message

"Can't run script. End time for simulation is zero."
"Can't run simulation. End time for simulation is zero."
Description This message notes that the script being run, cannot do so, since the commands
have not specified a run time.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 349
Fix Edit the script and add or modify appropriate commands to get the simulation to run for a
reasonable number of seconds.
5.46 Control Setting Changed Messages

"Control Setting Changed - Contactors Enabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Contactors Disabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Protective Devices Enabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Protective Devices Disabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Time Step Changed to %.4f."
Description Repeatability of dynamic simulations is critical, especially at a later date, after a
major simulation effort. The DS Script definition tools and methods imposed on the DS Focus
make this critical aspect automatic. However, users still have the ability to make changes to runtime settings in the DS Options dialog. If the user desires to make the changes part of a script so
that a simulation is completely repeatable, then those changes should be included in the script.
These messages alert the user to control values being changed as the script is run.
5.47 Motor Load Messages

"Torque vs. Speed Table Exceeds Internal Memory Limits"
Description Under normal use, this message should never appear. It is an indication that the
size of the Torque vs. Speed motor load curve in the library (and selected for the given motor) is
exceeding the size of the physical memory limit in the DS Engine. There is most likely a
programming error if this message occurs. Please contact EasyPower Technical Support, and be
willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis.
5.48 Simulation Auto-Stop Message

"Simulation Auto-Stopped on Settled System"
*** NOT IMPLEMENTED ***
Description If the option in the DS Options dialog is set for auto-termination of a simulation
upon a settled system, then after the last script command is issued, and you are within a Run To
or Run For command, if the DStates of all models fall below the set threshold, the simulation
will automatically terminate on a clear one second boundary time. This message is issued to note
that the simulation auto-stopped.
5.49 Complex Operations Error Messages

"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - COMPLEX/COMPLEX"
"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - COMPLEX/DOUBLE"
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 350
"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - DOUBLE/COMPLEX"

"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - /=COMPLEX"
"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - /=DOUBLE"
Description Under normal use, these messages should never appear. The programming effort
has included significant time to cover for all forms of model data entry where such conditions
could arise. There is most likely a programming error if this message occurs. Please contact
EasyPower Technical Support, and be willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis.
Fix - If this message appears after making a modification to model data, go back and review that
model data for correctness. There could be a condition where an inappropriate data arrangement
slipped past data integrity checks in the equipment dialog.
5.50 Numerical Instability Message

"Numerical instability encountered. Terminating Sim."
"Numerical instability encountered. Consider reducing your simulation time step. If isolating
motors, read manual section on Isolating Motors with dXi/dt terms."
Description This message will appear when there is an issue with numerical instability in your
simulation. As noted earlier in the Operations Manual, such conditions are typically associated
with selecting too large a time step in comparison to specified model time constants.
Fix 1 Reduce the time step of your simulation until the error goes away. If the error cannot be
remedied with this fix, you will need to do more effort as detailed in Fix 2.
Fix 2 For this problem to occur even after significantly reducing your time step, most likely
there is a data integrity issue. We suggest reviewing model data for excessively small time
constants, and then correcting them. If this problem occurred after a data modification, review
that data modification for correctness.
5.51 Stepping Message

"Stepping."
Description This message will appear when the user is performing a step-run simulation. For
every click on the Step Simulation button, this message will appear in the message log.
5.52 Simulation Complete Message

"Simulation Complete."
Description This message will appear when a simulation has been completed.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 351
5.53 DS Focus Entry Error Messages

"Stability Focus Entry Failed on Power Flow Instantiation."
"Stability Focus Entry Failed on Data Transfer to DS Engine."
"Stability Focus Entry Failed on Power Flow Start."
Description These messages will appear when a failure occurs when entering into the DS
Focus. Under normal use, these messages should never appear. Please contact EasyPower
Technical Support, and be willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis if you encounter
these error messages.
5.54 DS Focus Entry Model Error Message

"Stability Focus Entry Encountered Model Init Errors Review Message Log for Details.
Description This message will appear if there are errors that are occurring in DS Models upon
entry into DS Focus. This message also states: Review Message Log for Details, and so we
recommend reviewing the Message Log to track down why this message appeared. More details
will be supplied there for specific model initialization error conditions.
5.55 Attempting Open / Close Message

"Attempting Close - Device Already Closed."
"Attempting Open - Device Already Opened."
"Attempting Close - Device Not Active."
"Attempting Open - Device Not Active."
Description If a switching device is asked to open or close, and it is already open, closed or
inactive respectively, this message is logged to inform you that the switching operation
attempted had no effect on the simulation.
5.56 Exciter / Governor Stepping Messages

"Exciter Stepped by XX%."
"Governor Stepped by XX%."
Description When an excitation or governor system is stepped in a simulation, this message is
generated to inform you of a successful step applied to the Reference Voltage or Reference
Speed, respectively.
5.57 Completing Script Message

"Completing Script: XX."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 352
Description When a script is completed, this message is logged.
5.58 Reset Encountered Errors Message

"Reset Encountered Model Init Errors Review Message Log for Details."
Description During a reset action (after pressing the Simulation Reset button), this message is
logged if model initialization errors are encountered. This message also states: Review Message
Log for Details, so we recommend reviewing the Message Log to track down why this message
appeared. More details will be supplied there for specific model initialization error conditions.
5.59 Arc Flash Messages

"Reached Max AF Time of %7.2f Seconds. Clearing Fault."
"Bolted Fault Current Greater Than 200,000 A. Unable to Establish Arc."
"Cleared AF Fault Due to Lack of Network Convergence. IAF = XX Amps."
"AF Energy = XX Cal/cm/cm at %6.1f inches."
"AF Time
= XX Seconds."
"AF Boundary = XX Inches."
"AF IBF Scale = XX Percent."
"AF PPE Level = XX"
"AF Energy Limited by Passing Max AFH Time of XX Seconds."
Description If a simulation is using IEEE 1584 Arc Flash methods to simulate a fault, then
these messages will be logged under various conditions.
If the settings for arc flash calculations limit the arcing time and no protective devices
have cleared the fault, and/or it has not been removed before reaching the max arc time,
then the DS Engine will automatically remove the fault, log a message and the simulation
will continue without the fault.
Bolted fault currents greater than 200kA exceed the range of the 1584 equations. If a
condition is encountered where the bolted fault current exceeds 200 kA, then the fault is
bypassed, and the simulation continues without the fault.
Lack of network convergence can occur when using arc flash currents for a stability
simulation since a specialized iterative network is needed on each simulation time step to
force 1584 arcing current behavior. If this happens, the arcing fault is terminated, and
simulation continues without the fault.
Arc flash energy is accumulated and logged at the end of a simulation.
Time that the arcing fault is on is logged at the end of a simulation.
The arc flash boundary in inches is logged at the end of a simulation.
The arc flash scaling factor from DS Options is logged at the end of a simulation.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 353
The require PPE level is logged at the end of a simulation.
If the settings for arc flash calculations limit the arcing time and no protective devices
have cleared the fault, and/or it has not been removed before reaching the max arc time,
then the DS Engine will automatically remove the fault (see first bullet) and cause a
message to be logged at the end of the simulation with the other arc flash messages.
5.60 Completing Script Message

"Run Script (Stepping): XX."
Description If a script is run while in a run-step mode, this message is logged.
5.61 Power Flow Scaling Message

"Grouped Motor XX has a Power Flow Scaling Factor of Zero. Not allowed in DS."
Description Grouped motors simulate their Power Flow Scaling Factor by scaling the total HP
or kVA rating. If this value is set to zero, then we basically have a zero HP motor. This cannot
be accommodated, as the HP or kVA of the motor group is used to scale many parameters in the
model, and will generate a zero divide situation in the DS Engine.
Fix Either increase this scaling factor to a more reasonable number, or remove the motor (gray
out) in the Database Focus.
5.62 Time Step Change Message

"Script Command to Change Time Step To %.7f Exceeds Allowable Range."
Description The simulation time step cannot be set any higher than one cycle. If a script
command is used to set the time step higher than that, then this message is logged.
Fix Lower the time step change so it does not exceed one cycle.
5.63 Bus / Device / ATS Not Defined Message

"Bus To Fault Is Not Defined In Script."
"Attempting to Close - Device Not Defined In Script."
"Attempting to Open - Device Not Defined In Script."
"ATS to Switch Not Defined In Script."
Description If a device (Command ID) in a script command does not exist in the case, then
one of these messages will be displayed. Most likely, this message will indicate that you are
using an old script where a device action included a device ID that has been changed or deleted
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 354
in the case. Or, the script could be trying to switch a device that has been deactivated in the case.
In any event, the script command ID does not match any presently defined and activated device
ID.
Fix Edit the script and change the device ID to match a device that is currently in your case and
activated.
5.64 Generator AVR Undefined Messages

"Generator to Force AVR to Manual for Is Not Defined."
"Generator to Force AVR to Auto for Is Not Defined."
"Generator to Step AVR for Is Not Defined."
Description If a generator asked to perform an AVR action is not defined, this message is
logged.
Fix Edit the script and change the device ID to match a generator that is currently in your case
and activated.
5.65 Generator AVR Action Messages

"Generator AVR Set to Manual."
"Generator AVR Set to Auto."
"Generator AVR Stepped %6.2f %%."
Description If a generator AVR command in a script is successful, then one of these messages
will be logged.
5.66 Motor Soft Start Messages

"Ind2 Motor Soft Start Activating at V1 = XX"
"Ind2 Motor Soft Start Transitioning at V2 = XX "
"Ind2 Motor Soft Start Transitioning at V3 = XX "
"Sync Motor Soft Start Activating at V1 = XX "
"Sync Motor Soft Start Transitioning at V2 = XX "
"Sync Motor Soft Start Transitioning at V3 = XX "
Description When a motor starts that has its soft start parameters set for a soft start, these
messages will be logged to track the timing and conditions of each soft start transition up to full
voltage.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 355
5.67 Generator Governor Setting Messages

"Generator Speed Reference Set to XXX."
"Generator to Set Gov Speed for Is Not Defined."
Description When running a script command that sets the generators governor speed set
point, a message will be logged to indicate the change. If the script command generator is not
defined, then that is logged as well.
Fix Check to see if the script you are running has not been updated; i.e. the generator in the
script used to be there but is no longer in the database.
5.68 Excitation System Warning Messages

"IEEE AC1A value of KA is zero."
"IEEE ST2 KP and KI are Zero. FEX Forced to Zero."
"IEEE ST2A KP and KI are Zero. FEX Forced to Zero."
"IEEE ST3A KP and KI are Zero. FEX Forced to Zero."
"IEEE ST4B KP and KI are Zero. FEX Forced to Zero."
Description When excitation systems initialize, they can trigger warnings for data items that
are suspect, but that can be tolerated during an actual dynamic simulation.
Fix Check each data item logged for each excitation system to see if that data item was
mistakenly set to zero.
5.69 Solid State Device Blocking Message

"Solid State Device Blocking On Fault-Current."
"Solid State Device Blocking On Under-Voltage"
Description When an inverter:
Exceeds the time allowed for it to provide fault current (i.e. it has a set time for supplied
fault current).
Drops below 0.5 pu volts for more than 0.1 seconds.
The device blocks (i.e. stops firing) to curtail its short circuit contribution or to stop its loading
behavior. When an inverter blocks, it logs this message.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 356
5.70 Contactor Minimum Voltage Message

"Contactor saw min voltage of XX pu; Within 10% of XX trip setting."
Description When a simulation is complete and the system modeled has contactors, a check is
made at the end to document contactors that came within 10% of their trip voltage. If they do,
they are logged along with the actual voltage they were exposed to as well as the trip setting.
5.71 Relay Trip Signal Sent Messages

"Under Frequency Relay Sending Trip Signal."
"Under Voltage Relay Sending Trip Signal."
"Over Voltage Relay Sending Trip Signal."
Description When one of the above noted devices trips, it sends a trip signal to its associated
breaker. When the trip signal is sent, this message is logged.
5.72 Inverter Trip Signal Sent Messages

"Inverter PV1G blocking and sending trip signal on low voltage."
"Inverter PV1G blocking and sending trip signal on high voltage."
"Inverter WT4G blocking and sending trip signal on low voltage."
"Inverter WT4G blocking and sending trip signal on high voltage."
Description When an inverter blocks on low voltage, it sends a trip signal to an associated
breaker for opening. When the trip signal is sent, this message is logged.
5.73 ZSI Messages

"ZSI Restraining Breaker XX."
"ZSI UnRestraining Breaker XX."
Description When a low voltage breaker with ZSI (zone selective interlocking) restrains or unrestrains a breaker to minimize arc flash hazards, a message is logged noting which breaker was
restrained and when.
5.74 Breaker Delay Satisfied Messages

"Inverter PV1G breaker delay satisfied, breaker being tripped."
"Inverter WT4G breaker delay satisfied, breaker being tripped."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 357
Description When a PV1G or WT4G model has detected a low voltage and has sent a signal to
trip a breaker on the condition, the DS Engine first waits for any intentional delay in the breaker
to be satisfied. After the delay is satisfied, this message is logged, and the breaker is tripped.
5.75 Inverter Limit on Initialization Messages

"Inverter PV1G Active current Ip is on LVPL Limit."
"Inverter PV1G Active current Ip is on Ipmx Limit."
"Inverter PV1G Reactive current Iq is on Iqmx Limits."
"Inverter PV1G Reactive current Iq is on Iqmn Limits."
"Inverter Controller PV1E is on VMax Limit."
"Inverter Controller PV1E is on VMix Limit."
"Inverter Controller PV1E Qcmd is on QMax Limit."
"Inverter Controller PV1E Qcmd is on QMin Limit."
"Inverter WT4G Active current Ip is on LVPL Limit."
"Inverter WT4G Active current Ip is on Ipmx Limit."
"Inverter WT4G Reactive current Iq is on Iqmx Limits."
"Inverter WT4G Reactive current Iq is on Iqmn Limits."
Description When a PV1G, WT4G or Q Control model has hit a limit on initialization, one of
these messages will be logged.
Fix Check the real and/or reactive power requirements being placed on the inverter. Most
likely they are too high for the model. Reduce the power requirement as needed to take the
inverter off its limit.
5.76 Exciter VL Selected for Low Value Gate Message

"IEEE AC2A Exciter VL Selected for Low Value Gate. "
Description When this warning appears, the noted excitation system has initialized at a
condition where VL is selected for the output of the low value gate. This is a limiting condition at
initialization, and means that the other input to the low value gate (i.e. the signal that is needed to
initialize back to VRef) is unknown. Thus, instead of proceeding with an unknown condition, the
model initializes using VR/KB as the signal to use in progressing back to VRef. This means that
as soon as the simulation starts, there will be a step in VR applied by the low value gate. We are
thus not initialized properly at steady-state.
Fix Check the generator for excessive vars output, and/or consider that the value of KL may be
too low (and should not be negative), or the value of VLR is too small. Though this is a warning,
we strongly suggest that this warning be removed, as it represents an issue with data or excessive
generator var conditions.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 358
5.77 Plugin Data Translation Error

"Generator plugin data translation error XX."
"Exciter plugin data translation error XX."
"Governor plugin data translation error XX."
"Stabilizer plugin data translation error XX."
"Motor plugin data translation error XX."
Description When this error appears, the plugin data for the system specified for the noted
generator or motor (XX) could not be transferred to the stability engine.
Fix First, make sure you have updated plugins to the latest versions made available by
EasyPower. If the error persists after this correction, please contact EasyPower Technical
5.78 Plugin Instantiation Failure Error

"Generator plugin instantiation failed XX."
"Exciter plugin instantiation failed XX."
"Governor plugin instantiation failed XX."
"Stabilizer plugin instantiation failed XX."
"Motor plugin instantiation failed XX."
Description When this error appears, a desired stability plugin associated with generator or
motor XX was unable to be properly instantiated.
5.79 Invalid Plugin Error

"Generator plugin is not valid XX."
"Exciter plugin is not valid XX."
"Governor plugin is not valid XX."
"Stabilizer plugin is not valid XX."
"Motor plugin is not valid XX."
Description When this error appears, a desired exciter stability plugin associated with
generator XX was not available, though it is specified in the database being used.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 359
5.80 Plugin Is Missing Error

"Generator plugin is missing."
"Exciter plugin is missing."
"Governor plugin is missing."
"Stabilizer plugin is missing."
"Motor plugin is missing."
Description This indicates that plugins are installed and operating correctly, but that the
requested specific plugin in the data base being used is missing. This is most likely caused by
having an older version of the exciter plugin dll.
Fix To fix this, download and install the latest version of the plugin dll made available by
5.81 Plugin Is Not Installed Error

"Generator plugin is not installed."
"Exciter plugin is not installed."
"Governor plugin is not installed."
"Stabilizer plugin is not installed."
"Motor plugin is not installed."
Description This indicates that no plugins are presently installed, and the data base being used
has a plugin specified.
Fix To fix this, download and install the latest version of the plugin dll made available by
5.82 Motor Torque vs. Speed Load Table Size Exceeded

"Starting load exceeds T vs. S max table size of XX."
"Running load exceeds T vs. S max table size of XX."
Description This indicates that data supplied in the Stability tab for the motor starting or
running load, and for a torque vs. speed load type has too many entries. The number of entries
exceeds the maximum table size (XX) in the model.
Fix To fix this, reduce the number of entries to at or below the maximum value noted. If this is
not fixed, then the table is truncated at the table entry at the maximum size.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 360
5.83 Ignoring Solid State Breaker/Switch Action

"Ignoring Action - Breaker open on other end of Solid State Device."
"Ignoring Action - Closing of Solid State Device breakers/switches not supported."
Description These warnings indicate that no breaker/switch switching will be performed since
either:
A breaker/switch on the other side of the solid state device is already open. This means
that the action will accomplish nothing since there is no solid state device modeling of
the electronics.
Closing of a breaker/switch is not supported in this version of EasyPower. This also

needs detailed modeling of the solid state device, and EasyPower presently does not
include it.
5.84 Model Set Parameter Not Defined Messages

"Generator to Set Parameter for Is Not Defined."
"Exciter to Set Parameter for Is Not Defined."
"Governor to Set Parameter for Is Not Defined."
"Stabilizer to Set Parameter for Is Not Defined."
"Motor to Set Parameter for Is Not Defined."
Description These warnings indicate that a script command being used to set a model
parameter has tried to change a parameter for a generator, exciter, governor, stabilizer or motor
model that does not exist.
Fix To fix this consider the following:
Make sure the generator or motor specified in the script is not deactivated.
Make sure the generator or motor specified in the script exists in the case; i.e. it has not
been deleted.
Make sure the Enable Generator Model check box is checked in the specified
generators stability tab.
Make sure the Enable Exciter Model check box is checked in the specified generators
stability tab.
Make sure the Enable Governor Model check box is checked in the specified
Make sure the Enable Stabilizer Model check box is checked in the specified
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 361
Make sure the Enable Motor Model check box is checked in the specified generators
stability tab.
5.85 Model Set Parameter Messages

"Set Exciter Parameter in Row XX to YY."
"Set Governor Parameter in Row XX to YY.
"Set Generator Parameter in Row XX to YY.
"Set Stabilizer Parameter in Row XX to YY.
"Set Motor Parameter in Row XX to YY.
Description These messages confirm a change being made to a generator, exciter, governor,
stabilizer or motor model parameter via a script command. The parameter is in row XX and the
value is YY.
5.86 No Such Parameter Messages

No such parameter for XX in Row YY.
Description These warnings indicate that a script command being used to set a model
parameter has tried to change a parameter for model XX in row YY that does not exist.
Fix To fix this, modify the row to point to a valid parameter. This message typically appears
when the row number specified is greater than the row of the last parameter of the model.
5.87 Changing Parameter Messages

Changing WW parameter XX from YY to ZZ.
Description This message echoes back from a model when a valid parameter change has been
made. Valid simply means that the row number specified in the script command was a valid row.
Whether or not the parameter value is correct is entirely up to the user, as no input range checks
are enforced.
WW is the name of the model, XX is the name of the parameter, YY is the value before begin
changed, and ZZ is the new value the model has been given.
5.88 Parameter Cannot Be Set Messages

Round Rotor Generator parameter XX cannot be set.
Salient Pole Generator parameter XX cannot be set.
Double Cage Induction Motor parameter XX cannot be set.
Synchronous Motor parameter XX cannot be set."
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 362
"PV1 Inverter parameter XX cannot be set."

"WT4 Inverter parameter XX cannot be set."
Description These warning messages appear on just a few parameters for certain models that
cannot be changed at runtime. This typically includes a base MVA or kV setting, or similar
parameters that effect the per unit base of the model. Since after initialization all per-unitizing is
complete, changing theses parameters would really have no effect, and thus this message is
supplied to alert you.
Fix To fix this, remove the script command for this parameter, since it has no effect, or change
the row number on the script command to change a parameter that can truly be altered.
5.89 DROOP and ISOCH Messages

"Changing Woodward Diesel Governor parameter %s from DROOP to DROOP."
"Changing Woodward Diesel Governor parameter %s from DROOP to ISOCH."
"Changing Woodward Diesel Governor parameter %s from ISOCH to DROOP."
"Changing Woodward Diesel Governor parameter %s from ISOCH to ISOCH."
Description These messages appear when a Woodward Diesel governor model is being
changed from one control mode to the other.
5.90 Governor Failed Step Test Message

"Governor failed step test."
Description This message appears when, during a governor load step test, a governor system is
not able to provide adequate mechanical power before the speed on the unit plummets to zero.
This message prevents a zero divide by speed. Note that a governor load step test holds constant
mechanical power, and thus as the speed drops, the generators electrical air-gap torque increases
(i.e. Torque = Power / Speed). Thus, a condition can be reached when there is no coming back.
In real life this will be true to a point due to the generators AVR holding voltage on the machine
at rated voltage. Thus a natural voltage drop will be averted and the unit will be loaded in a
constant power fashion. However, if the speed drop is too severe, the AVR will limit and not
be able to continue holding voltage. Thus, the governor load step test is not as realistic under
such severe conditions. When an actual stability simulation is being run, note that full AVR
functionality is there, and an actual response will be created. But since these load step tests are
typically just checking for a good response and default to 80% initial power and a 10% power
step, it should not fail as noted here. Failure here is thus an indication of poorly specified data.
Fix To fix this, retune and modify the governor settings to more accurately represent the
response of a well-tuned governor and well-modeled prime mover. Consider also that a machine
inertia that is set too small (i.e. below 1.5) can result in a machine dropping speed so fast that the
governing system simply cannot increase power fast enough to stop the speed from plummeting.
Consider increasing inertia H on the machine if an erroneous low value has been assumed.
EasyPower LLC 2016
Page 363

Reference Manual of Dynamic Voltage Stability

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Reference Manual of Dynamic Voltage Stability

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Advanced Engineering Support Documentation

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

2.12.5 Copying a Script...................................................................................................................................... 70

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

4.1.4 WT4G - Wind Turbine with Inverter ....................................................................................................... 165

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

4.7.1 Fuses ....................................................................................................................................................... 314

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

5.42 SIMULATION RUN FOR MESSAGE .................................................................................................................. 349

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

1.0 Introduction to EasyPower Dynamics

Round Rotor Flux Synchronous

Excitations System Models

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

IEEE Type ST2A

Governor System Models

Power System Stabilizer Models

IEEE Type PSS1A

Double Cage Flux Induction

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

Protective Device Models

Contactors - Automatic Drop Out Action

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

Figure 1. Generation System definition.

1.2 The DS Simulation Technique

We are interested in time responses typically no smaller than a half cycle.

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

Figure 2. Induction Motor System definition.

Fixed Field Voltage

Figure 3. Synchronous Motor System definition.

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

Figure 4. Network and DS Model Connectivity.

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

2.0 Using EasyPower Dynamics

Entry of data into the database

Entry into an analysis focus

Performing the simulation

Printing out results or copying results into a report

2.1 Entering Data

2.1.1 Data via the Library Library Structure

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

2.1.2 Data via the Library Supplied Naming

For each Equipment designation there is a Manufacturer labeled (Generic). In

For each Equipment designation there is a Manufacturer labeled (Plugin). In

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

Figure 5. DS Group in Library open to show structure.

EasyPower LLC 2016

Dynamic Stability Reference Manual

This means Round Rotor.

This means Salient Pole.